ABB ACS310 User Manual

ABB drives
User’s manual
Công ty TNHH điện tử công nghiệp RITECH
ACS310 drives
Chuyên cung cấp dịch vụ sửa chữa: biến tần, Servo, Máy CNC, Khởi động mềm...
Với đội ngũ kỹ thuật lâu năm kinh nghiệm trong nghề trực tiếp sửa chữa không qua trung gian
Hotline hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581
Website: ritech.vn
User’s manual
ACS310
Table of contents
Safety
Mechanical installation
Electrical installation
Start-up and control with I/O
3AUA0000044201 Rev D
EN
 2016 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved. EFFECTIVE: 2016-01-11
Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Table of contents 5
Table of contents
List of related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. Safety
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Use of warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Safety in installation and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Electrical safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safe start-up and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
General safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Safety
2. Introduction to the manual
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Target audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Purpose of the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Contents of this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Related documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Categorization by frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Quick installation and commissioning flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
3. Operation principle and hardware description

Operation principle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Product overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Power connections and control interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Type designation label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Type designation key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4. Mechanical installation
Checking the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Requirements for the installation site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Required tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Checking the delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Installing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Install the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fasten clamping plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

6 Table of contents
5. Planning the electrical installation

Implementing the AC power line connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Selecting the supply disconnecting device (disconnecting means) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
European union . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Other regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Selecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Alternative power cable types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Motor cable shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Additional US requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Selecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
General rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Relay cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Control panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Routing the cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Control cable ducts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Protecting the drive, input power cable, motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations and
against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protecting the drive, motor cable and input power cable against thermal overload . . . . . 41
Protecting the motor against thermal overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Using residual current devices (RCD) with the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Implementing a bypass connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Protecting the contacts of relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6. Electrical installation
Checking the insulation of the assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Input power cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Motor and motor cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems . . . . . . . 46
Connecting the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Connecting the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
I/O terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Default I/O connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Connection procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Connecting the embedded fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Connection diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
7. Installation checklist
Checking the installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Table of contents 7
8. Start-up and control with I/O

How to start up the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
How to start up the drive without a control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
How to perform a manual start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
How to perform a guided start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
How to control the drive through the I/O interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
9. Control panels
About control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Applicability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Basic control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Reference mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Parameter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Copy mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Basic control panel alarm codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Assistant control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Assistants mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Changed parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Fault logger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Time and date mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Parameter backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
IO settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
10. Application macros

What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Overview of macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Summary of the I/O connections of the application macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
ABB standard macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
3-wire macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Alternate macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Motor potentiometer macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

8 Table of contents
PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Default I/O connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
PFC control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
SPFC control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
User macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
AC500 Modbus macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
11. Program features

Start-up assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Default order of the tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Contents of the assistant displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Block diagram: Start, stop, direction source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Reference types and processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Reference trimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Programmable analog output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Programmable digital inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Programmable relay output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Frequency input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Transistor output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Table of contents 9
Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
DC magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Maintenance trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Acceleration and deceleration ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Motor heating function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Custom U/f ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
IR compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
AI<Min . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Panel loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
External fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Stall protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Motor thermal protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Earth fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Incorrect wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Input phase loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Pre-programmed faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Overcurrent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
DC overvoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
DC undervoltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Drive temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Short circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Internal fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Operation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Power limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Automatic resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Supervisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Parameter lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Process controller PID1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
External/Trim controller PID2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Block diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

10 Table of contents
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Sleep function for the process PID (PID1) control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Energy optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Energy saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Pump cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Peak value logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Amplitude loggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
PFC and SPFC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
PFC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
SPFC control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Connection diagram example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Pipe fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Reference ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
PID reference ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
12. Actual signals and parameters

Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Fieldbus equivalent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Default values with different macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Actual signals in the short parameter view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
04 FAULT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Parameters in the short parameter view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
13 ANALOG INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Table of contents 11
14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

16 SYSTEM CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
53 EFB PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
98 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
All actual signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
01 OPERATING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
04 FAULT HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
All parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
10 START/STOP/DIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
11 REFERENCE SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
12 CONSTANT SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
13 ANALOG INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
15 ANALOG OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
16 SYSTEM CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
20 LIMITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
21 START/STOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
22 ACCEL/DECEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
25 CRITICAL SPEEDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
26 MOTOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
29 MAINTENANCE TRIG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
30 FAULT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
31 AUTOMATIC RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
32 SUPERVISION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
33 INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
34 PANEL DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
36 TIMED FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
37 USER LOAD CURVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
40 PROCESS PID SET 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
41 PROCESS PID SET 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
42 EXT / TRIM PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
44 PUMP PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
45 ENERGY SAVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
46 PUMP CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
52 PANEL COMM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
53 EFB PROTOCOL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
64 LOAD ANALYZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
81 PFC CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
98 OPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
99 START-UP DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
13. Fieldbus control with the embedded fieldbus


System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Control word and Status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Fieldbus references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Reference selection and correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Fieldbus reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Reference handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Modbus mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Register mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Communication profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
ABB drives communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
DCU communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
14. Fault tracing

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Alarm and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Alarm messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Alarms generated by the Basic control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Embedded fieldbus faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
No master device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Same device address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Incorrect wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
15. Maintenance and hardware diagnostics

Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Cooling fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Replacing the cooling fan (frame sizes R1…R4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Reforming the capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Power connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Cleaning the control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Changing the battery in the Assistant control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Table of contents 13
16. Technical data

Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Fuses and alternate short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Alternate short-circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Fuses and MMPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Size of copper conductor in cablings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Dimensions, weights and free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Dimensions and weights ............................................... 343
Free space requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Losses, cooling data and noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Losses and cooling data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Terminal and lead-through data for the control cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Electric power network specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Motor connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Control connection data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Clearance and creepage distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Degrees of protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Ambient conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Applicable standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Compliance with the European EMC Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Category C1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Category C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Category C3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
UL marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
UL checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
RoHS marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Declaration of incorporation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
17. Dimension drawings

Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Frame size R2, NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Frame size R3, NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363

Frame size R4, NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
18. INDEX
19. Further information

Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Safety 15
1
Safety
What this chapter contains
The chapter contains safety instructions which you must follow when installing,
operating and servicing the drive. If ignored, physical injury or death may follow, or
damage may occur to the drive, motor or driven equipment. Read the safety
instructions before you work on the drive.
Use of warnings
Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death
and/or damage to the equipment, and advise on how to avoid the danger. The
following warning symbols are used in this manual:
Electricity warning warns of hazards from electricity which can cause physical
injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by
electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment.

16 Safety
Safety in installation and maintenance

These warnings are intended for all who work on the drive, motor cable or motor.
 Electrical safety
WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or

death, or damage to the equipment.
Only qualified electricians are allowed to install and maintain the drive!
• Never work on the drive, motor cable or motor when input power is applied. After
disconnecting the input power, always wait for 5 minutes to let the intermediate
circuit capacitors discharge before you start working on the drive, motor or motor
cable.
Always ensure by measuring with a multimeter (impedance at least 1 Mohm) that
there is no voltage between the drive input phases U1, V1 and W1 and the
ground.
• Do not work on the control cables when power is applied to the drive or to the
external control circuits. Externally supplied control circuits may carry dangerous
voltage even when the input power of the drive is switched off.
• Do not make any insulation or voltage withstand tests on the drive.
• Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an IT system (an
ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over 30 ohms] power
system), otherwise the system is connected to ground potential through the EMC
filter capacitors. This may cause danger or damage the drive. See page 46. Note:
When the internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible.
• Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner-grounded
TN system, otherwise the drive will be damaged. See page 46. Note: When the
internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible.
• All ELV (extra low voltage) circuits connected to the drive must be used within a
zone of equipotential bonding, ie within a zone where all simultaneously
accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent hazardous
voltages appearing between them. This is accomplished by a proper factory
grounding.
Note:
• Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the power
circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2.

Safety 17
 General safety

• The drive is not field repairable. Never attempt to repair a malfunctioning drive;
contact your local ABB representative or Authorized Service Center for
replacement.
• Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation.
Electrically conductive dust inside the drive may cause damage or lead to
malfunction.
• Ensure sufficient cooling.
Safe start-up and operation

These warnings are intended for all who plan the operation, start up or operate the
drive.
 General safety

• Before adjusting the drive and putting it into service, make sure that the motor and
all driven equipment are suitable for operation throughout the speed range
provided by the drive. The drive can be adjusted to operate the motor at speeds
above and below the speed provided by connecting the motor directly to the
power line.
• Do not activate automatic fault reset functions if dangerous situations can occur.
When activated, these functions reset the drive and resume operation after a
fault.
• Do not control the motor with an AC contactor or disconnecting device
(disconnecting means); use instead the control panel start and stop keys and
or external commands (I/O or fieldbus). The maximum allowed number of
charging cycles of the DC capacitors (that is, power-ups by applying power) is two
per minute and the maximum total number of chargings is 15 000.
Note:
• If an external source for start command is selected and it is ON, the drive starts
immediately after an input voltage break or fault reset unless the drive is
configured for 3-wire (a pulse) start/stop.
• When the control location is not set to local (LOC not shown on the display), the
stop key on the control panel does not stop the drive. To stop the drive using the
control panel, first press the LOC/REM key LOCREM and then the stop key .

18 Safety

Introduction to the manual 19
2
Introduction to the manual
The chapter describes applicability, the target audience and purpose of this manual. It
describes the contents of this manual and refers to a list of related manuals for more
information. The chapter also contains a flowchart of steps for checking the delivery,
installing and commissioning the drive. The flowchart refers to chapters/sections in
this manual.
Applicability
The manual is applicable to the ACS310 drive firmware version 4.050 or later. See
parameter 3301 FIRMWARE on page 222.
Target audience
The reader is expected to know the fundamentals of electricity, wiring, electrical
components and electrical schematic symbols.
The manual is written for readers worldwide. Both SI and imperial units are shown.
Special US instructions for installations in the United States are given.
Purpose of the manual

This manual provides information needed for planning the installation, installing,
commissioning, using and servicing the drive.

20 Introduction to the manual
Contents of this manual

The manual consists of the following chapters:
• Safety (page 15) gives safety instructions you must follow when installing,
commissioning, operating and servicing the drive.
• Introduction to the manual (this chapter, page 19) describes applicability, target
audience, purpose and contents of this manual. It also contains a quick
installation and commissioning flowchart.
• Operation principle and hardware description (page 23) describes the operation
principle, layout, power connections and control interfaces, type designation label
and type designation information in short.
• Mechanical installation (page 29) tells how to check the installation site, unpack,
check the delivery and install the drive mechanically.
• Planning the electrical installation (page 35) tells how to check the compatibility of
the motor and the drive and select cables, protections and cable routing.
• Electrical installation (page 45) tells how to check the insulation of the assembly
and the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems as
well as connect power cables, control cables and embedded fieldbus.
• Installation checklist (page 55) contains a checklist for checking the mechanical
and electrical installation of the drive.
• Start-up and control with I/O (page 57) tells how to start up the drive as well as
how to start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the motor
speed through the I/O interface.
• Control panels (page 67) describes the control panel keys, LED indicators and
display fields. It also instructs in using the panel in control, monitoring and
changing the settings.
• Application macros (page 101) gives a brief description of each application macro
together with a wiring diagram showing the default control connections. It also
explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it.
• Program features (page 115) describes program features with lists of related user
settings, actual signals, and fault and alarm messages.
• Actual signals and parameters (page 163) describes actual signals and
parameters. It also lists the default values for the different macros.
• Fieldbus control with the embedded fieldbus (page 287) tells how the drive can be
controlled by external devices over a communication network using embedded
fieldbus.
• Fault tracing (page 311) tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It lists all
alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
• Maintenance and hardware diagnostics (page 329) contains preventive
maintenance instructions and LED indicator descriptions.

Introduction to the manual 21
• Technical data (page 335) contains technical specifications of the drive, eg

ratings, sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the
requirements for CE and other marks.
• Dimension drawings (page 357) shows dimension drawings of the drive.
• Further information (inside of the back cover, page 353) tells how to make product
and service inquiries, get information on product training, provide feedback on
ABB Drives manuals and find documents on the Internet.
Related documents
See List of related manuals on page 2.
Categorization by frame size

The ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes R0…R4. Some instructions and other
information which only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of the
frame size (R0…R4). To identify the frame size of your drive, see the table in section
Ratings on page 336.
Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition
EIA-485 Standard defining the electrical characteristics of drivers and receivers for
use in balanced digital multipoint systems.
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
FlashDrop Hand-held drive programming tool that can also be used to copy parameters
to a drive that is not powered up.
Frame (size) Relates to the construction type of the component in question. The term is
often used in reference to a group of components that share a similar
mechanical construction. To determine the frame size of a component, refer
to the rating tables in chapter Technical data.
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor; a voltage-controlled semiconductor type
widely used in inverters due to its easy controllability and high switching
frequency.
Inverter An inverter converts the DC voltage to AC voltage. Its operation is controlled
by switching the IGBTs.
I/O Input/Output
MMP Manual motor protector
Modbus RTU Open, serial messaging protocol
MREL MREL relay output extension module
MRP code Material Requirement Planning code
Pt100 A type of resistance thermometer (temperature sensor)
PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient sensor (temperature sensor)
RS-232 Standard for serial binary single-ended data and control signals

22 Introduction to the manual
Quick installation and commissioning flowchart
Task See
Identify the frame size of your drive: R0…R4. Operation principle and hardware description:
Type designation key on page 27
Technical data: Ratings on page 336
Plan the installation: select the cables, etc. Planning the electrical installation on page 35
Check the ambient conditions, ratings and Technical data on page 335
required cooling air flow.
Unpack and check the drive. Mechanical installation: Unpacking on page

31
If the drive will be connected to an IT Operation principle and hardware description:

(ungrounded) or corner-grounded system, Type designation key on page 27
check that the internal EMC filter is not Electrical installation: Checking the
connected. compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and corner-
grounded TN systems on page 46
Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet. Mechanical installation on page 29
Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the

cables on page 39
Check the insulation of the input cable and the Electrical installation: Checking the insulation
motor and the motor cable. of the assembly on page 45
Connect the power cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the power

cables on page 47
Connect the control cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the control

cables on page 49
Check the installation. Installation checklist on page 55
Commission the drive. Start-up and control with I/O on page 57

Operation principle and hardware description 23
3
Operation principle and
hardware description
The chapter briefly describes the operation principle, layout, type designation label
and type designation information. It also shows a general diagram of power
connections and control interfaces.
Operation principle
The ACS310 is a wall or cabinet mountable drive for controlling AC induction motors.
The figure below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the drive. The rectifier
converts three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage. The capacitor bank of the
intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage. The inverter converts the DC voltage
back to AC voltage for the AC motor.
Rectifier Intermediate Inverter

circuit
AC supply
M
AC motor
3~

24 Operation principle and hardware description
Product overview
 Layout
The layout of the drive is presented below. The figure shows a frame size R2 drive.
The construction of the different frame sizes R0…R4 varies to some extent.
1 Covers on (R2) Covers off (R2)

3b
2 3a
5
6
7
8 8
9
3c
4 10 12 11
14 13
15
18
16
2
17
18
1 Cooling outlet through top cover 9 EMC filter grounding screw (EMC).
2 Mounting holes Note: The screw is on the front in frame
size R4.
3 Panel cover (a) / Basic control panel (b) /
Assistant control panel (c) 10 Varistor grounding screw (VAR)
4 Terminal cover 11 EIA-485 connection
5 Panel connection 12 Jumper J701 for connecting EIA-485
termination resistor
6 Option connection
13 I/O connections
7 FlashDrop connection
8 Power OK and Fault LEDs. See section 14 Switch S1 for selecting voltage or current
LEDs on page 333. for analog inputs
15 Input power connection (U1, V1, W1) and
motor connection (U2, V2, W2). (Braking
chopper connection is disabled.)
16 I/O clamping plate
17 Clamping plate
18 Clamps

 Power connections and control interfaces

The diagram gives an overview of connections. I/O connections are parameterable.
See chapter Application macros on page 101 for I/O connections for the different
macros and chapter Electrical installation on page 45 for installation in general.
8 Control panel
(RJ-45)
Modbus RTU
Screen 1 SCR (RS-232)
S1 AO 7
Analog input 1 2 AI1 Analog output
AI1
AI2
0…10 V GND 8 0…20 mA
3 GND mA
Reference voltage V
+10 V DC, max. 10 mA 4 +10V
Analog input 2 5 AI2
6 GND
Aux. voltage output 9 +24 V PROGRAMMABLE RELAY

+24 V DC, max. 200 mA AND DIGITAL OUTPUTS
10 GND
ROCOM
11 DCOM 17
RONC 18 Relay output
12 DI1 250 V AC / 30 V DC / 6 A
RONO
PROGRAMMABLE 13 DI2 19
DIGITAL INPUTS DOSRC
14 DI3 20
DOOUT Digital/frequency output,
15 DI4 21 PNP transistor type
DI5 can also be used DOGND 30 V DC, max. 100 mA
as a frequency input 16 DI5 22
23 SHIELD
6 MREL relay
output extension
Modbus RTU 24 B J701 module
(EIA-485)
25 A
26 GND_A EMC EMC filter grounding screw
6
FlashDrop VAR Varistor grounding screw
PE PE
L1 U1 U2
M
L2 V1 V2 3~
L3 W1 W2
3-phase Input EMC Output AC motor
power choke filter choke
supply,
200…480
V AC
Note: For 1-phase power supply, connect power to U1/L and V1/N terminals.

Type designation label

The type designation label is attached to the left side of the drive. An example label
and explanation of the label contents are shown below.
ACS310Ͳ03EͲ09A7Ͳ4 1
IP20/ULOpentype 2 lllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
ULType1withMUL1option S/NMYYWWRXXXX 4
PN4kW(5HP) llllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllllll
U1 3~380…480V 3AUA0000039632 5
I1 15.0A 3
f1 48…63Hz RoHS
U2 3~0…U1V 6
I2 9.7A N713
f2 0…500Hz
1 Type designation, see section Type designation key on page 27

2 Degree of protection by enclosure (IP and UL/NEMA)
3 Nominal ratings, see section Ratings on page 336.
4 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX, where
M: Manufacturer
YY: 09, 10, 11, … for 2009, 2010, 2011, …
WW: 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, …
R: A, B, C, … for product revision number
XXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001
5 ABB MRP code of the drive
6 CE marking and C-Tick, C-UL US and RoHS marks (the label of your drive shows the valid
markings)

Type designation key

The type designation contains information on the specifications and configuration of
the drive. You find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the
drive. The first digits from the left express the basic configuration, for example
ACS310-03E-09A7-4. The optional selections are given after that, separated by +
signs, for example +J404. The explanations of the type designation label selections
are described below.
ACS310-03E-09A7-4+J404+...
ACS310 product series
3-phase
03 = 3-phase input
Configuration
E = EMC filter connected, 50 Hz frequency
U = EMC filter disconnected, 60 Hz frequency
Output current rating

In format xxAy, where xx indicates the integer part and y the fractional part,
for example, 09A7 means 9.7 A.
For more information, see section Ratings on page 336.
Input voltage range

2 = 200…240 V AC
4 = 380…480 V AC
Options
J404 = ACS-CP-C Basic control panel 1)
J400 = ACS-CP-A Assistant control panel 1)
R700 = ACS310 User’s Manual in English (3AUA0000044201 [EN])
R701 = ACS310 User’s Manual in German (3AUA0000048396 [DE])
R702 = ACS310 User’s Manual in Italian (3AUA0000048398 [IT])
R707 = ACS310 User’s Manual in French (3AUA0000048400 [FR])
R708 = ACS310 User’s Manual in Spanish (3AUA0000048401 [ES])
1)
The ACS310 is compatible with panels that have the following panel revisions and panel
firmware versions. To find out the revision and firmware version of your panel, see page 68.
Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware
version
Basic control panel ACS-CP-C M or later 1.13 or later
Assistant control panel ACS-CP-A E or later 2.04 or later
Assistant control panel (Asia) ACS-CP-D P or later 2.04 or later
Note that unlike the other panels, the ACS-CP-D is ordered with a separate material code.


Mechanical installation 29
4
Mechanical installation
The chapter tells how to check the installation site, unpack, check the delivery and
install the drive mechanically.
Checking the installation site

The drive may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet. Check the enclosure
requirements for the need to use the NEMA 1 option in wall installations (see chapter
Technical data on page 335.
The drive can be installed in three different ways, depending on the frame size:
a) back mounting (all frame sizes)
b) side mounting (frame sizes R0…R2)
c) DIN rail mounting (all frame sizes).
The drive must be installed in an upright position.
Check the installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to chapter
Dimension drawings on page 357 for frame details.
 Requirements for the installation site

Operation conditions
See chapter Technical data on page 335 for the allowed operation conditions of the
drive.
Wall
The wall should be as close to vertical and even as possible, of non-flammable
material and strong enough to carry the weight of the drive.

30 Mechanical installation
Floor
The floor/material below the installation should be non-flammable.
Free space around the drive

The required free space for cooling above and below the drive is 75 mm (3 in). No
free space is required on the sides of the drive, so drives can be mounted
immediately next to each other.
Required tools
To install the drive, you need the following tools:
• screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used)
• wire stripper
• tape measure
• drill (if the drive will be installed with screws/bolts)
• mounting hardware: screws or bolts (if the drive will be installed with screws/
bolts). For the number of screws/bolts, see With screws on page 32.

Unpacking
The drive (1) is delivered in a package that also contains the following items (frame
size R2 shown in the figure):
• plastic bag (2) including clamping plate (also used for I/O cables in frame sizes
R3 and R4), I/O clamping plate (for frame sizes R0…R2), clamps and screws
• panel cover (3)
• mounting template, integrated into the package (4)
• short form user’s manual (5)
• possible options (Basic control panel, Assistant control panel or complete User’s
Manual).
3
2
Checking the delivery

Check that there are no signs of damage. Notify the shipper immediately if damaged
components are found.
Before attempting installation and operation, check the information on the type
designation label of the drive to verify that the drive is of the correct type. See section
Type designation label on page 26.

Installing
The instructions in this manual cover drives with the IP20 degree of protection. To
comply with NEMA 1, use the MUL1-R1, MUL1-R3 or MUL1-R4 option kit, which is
delivered with multilingual installation instructions (3AFE68642868, 3AFE68643147
or 3AUA0000025916, respectively).
 Install the drive

Install the drive with screws or on a DIN rail as appropriate.
Note: Make sure that dust from drilling does not enter the drive during the installation.
With screws
1. Mark the hole locations using for example the mounting template cut out from the
package. The locations of the holes are also shown in the drawings in chapter
Dimension drawings on page 357. The number and location of the holes used
depend on how the drive is installed:
a) back mounting (frame sizes R0…R4): four holes
b) side mounting (frame sizes R0…R2): three holes; one of the bottom holes is
located in the clamping plate.
2. Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations.
1 2 2

3. Position the drive onto the screws on the wall.

4. Tighten the screws in the wall securely.
3 4
On DIN rail
1. Click the drive to the rail.
To detach the drive, press the release lever on top of the drive (1b).
1 1b

 Fasten clamping plates

1. Fasten the clamping plate to the plate at the bottom of the drive with the provided
screws.
2. For frame sizes R0…R2, fasten the I/O clamping plate to the clamping plate with
the provided screws.
2
1

Planning the electrical installation 35
5
Planning the electrical
installation
The chapter contains the instructions that you must follow when checking the
compatibility of the motor and drive, and selecting cables, protections, cable routing
and way of operation for the drive.
Note: The installation must always be designed and made according to applicable
local laws and regulations. ABB does not assume any liability whatsoever for any
installation which breaches the local laws and/or other regulations. Furthermore, if the
recommendations given by ABB are not followed, the drive may experience problems
that the warranty does not cover.
Implementing the AC power line connection

See the requirements in section Electric power network specification on page 348.
Use a fixed connection to the AC power line.
WARNING! As the leakage current of the device typically exceeds 3.5 mA, a
fixed installation is required according to IEC 61800-5-1.
Selecting the supply disconnecting device (disconnecting

means)
Install a hand-operated supply disconnecting device (disconnecting means) between
the AC power source and the drive. The disconnecting device must be of a type that
can be locked to the open position for installation and maintenance work.

36 Planning the electrical installation
 European union
To meet the European Union Directives, according to standard EN 60204-1, Safety of
Machinery, the disconnecting device must be one of the following types:
• a switch-disconnector of utilization category AC-23B (EN 60947-3)
• a disconnector having an auxiliary contact that in all cases causes switching
devices to break the load circuit before the opening of the main contacts of the
disconnector (EN 60947-3)
• a circuit breaker suitable for isolation in accordance with EN 60947-2.
 Other regions
The disconnecting device must conform to the applicable safety regulations.
Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive

Check that the 3-phase AC induction motor and the drive are compatible according to
the rating table in section Ratings on page 336. The table lists the typical motor power
for each drive type.
Selecting the power cables

 General rules
Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations.
• The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding
load currents. See section Ratings on page 336 for the rated currents.
• The cable must be rated for at least 70 °C maximum permissible temperature of
the conductor in continuous use. For US, see section Additional US requirements
on page 38.
• The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase
conductor (same cross-sectional area).
• 600 V AC cable is accepted for up to 500 V AC.
• Refer to chapter Technical data on page 335 for the EMC requirements.
A symmetrical shielded motor cable (see the following figure) must be used to meet
the EMC requirements of the CE and C-Tick marks.
A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but a shielded symmetrical
cable is recommended.
Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of a symmetrical shielded cable
reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing
currents and wear.

 Alternative power cable types

Power cable types that can be used with the drive are presented below.
Motor cables Note: A separate PE conductor is required

(recommended for input cables also) if the conductivity of the cable shield is not
sufficient for the purpose.
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase
conductors, a concentric or otherwise
symmetrically constructed PE conductor
and a shield
PE Shield Shield
conductor
and shield
PE
PE
Allowed as input cables

Shield
A four-conductor system: three phase
conductors and a protective conductor
PE PE
 Motor cable shield

To function as a protective conductor, the shield must have the same cross-sectional
area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal.
To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the shield
conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The
requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminium shield. The minimum
requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a
concentric layer of copper wires. The better and tighter the shield, the lower the
emission level and bearing currents.
Insulation jacket Copper wire screen Cable core

 Additional US requirements
Type MC continuous corrugated aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds or
shielded power cable is recommended for the motor cables if metallic conduit is not
used.
The power cables must be rated for 75 °C (167 °F).
Conduit
Where conduits must be coupled together, bridge the joint with a ground conductor
bonded to the conduit on each side of the joint. Bond the conduits also to the drive
enclosure. Use separate conduits for input power, motor and control wiring. Do not
run motor wiring from more than one drive in the same conduit.
Armored cable / shielded power cable

Six-conductor (three phases and three ground) type MC continuous corrugated
aluminium armor cable with symmetrical grounds is available from the following
suppliers (trade names in parentheses):
• Anixter Wire & Cable (Philsheath)
• BICC General Corp (Philsheath)
• Rockbestos Co. (Gardex)
• Oaknite (CLX).
Shielded power cable is available from the following suppliers:
• Belden
• LAPPKABEL (ÖLFLEX)
• Pirelli.
Selecting the control cables

 General rules
All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded.
Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a, for example, JAMAK by Draka NK
Cables) for analog signals. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do
not use common return for different analog signals.

A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals, but a
single-shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable (Figure b) is also usable.
However, for frequency input, always use a shielded cable.
a b
Double-shielded twisted Single-shielded twisted

multipair cable multipair cable
Run analog and digital signals in separate cables.

Relay-controlled signals, providing their voltage does not exceed 48 V, can be run in
the same cables as digital input signals. It is recommended that the relay-controlled
signals are run as twisted pairs.
Never mix 24 V DC and 115/230 V AC signals in the same cable.
 Relay cable
The cable type with braided metallic screen (for example, ÖLFLEX by LAPPKABEL)
has been tested and approved by ABB.
 Control panel cable

In remote use, the cable connecting the control panel to the drive must not exceed
3 m (10 ft). The cable type tested and approved by ABB is used in control panel
option kits.
Routing the cables

Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives
can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor
cable, input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays. Avoid
long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic
interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage.
Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at
an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible.
The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding
electrodes. Aluminium tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of
potential.

A diagram of the cable routing is shown below.
Motor cable
Drive min. 300 mm (12 in)

Power cable
Input power cable Motor cable

min. 200 mm (8 in) 90° min. 500 mm (20 in)
Control cables
 Control cable ducts
24 V 230 V 24 V 230 V
Not allowed unless the 24 V cable is Lead 24 V and 230 V control cables in
insulated for 230 V or insulated with an separate ducts inside the cabinet.
insulation sleeving for 230 V.

Protecting the drive, input power cable, motor and motor

cable in short-circuit situations and against thermal
overload
 Protecting the drive and input power cable in short-circuit situations
Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines.
Circuit diagram Short-circuit protection
Distribution Input cable Drive Protect the drive and input
board cable with fuses. See
footnote 1).
1)
M
3~
1)
Size the fuses according to instructions given in chapter Technical data on page 335. The
fuses protect the input cable in short-circuit situations, restrict drive damage and prevent
damage to adjoining equipment in case of a short circuit inside the drive.
 Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations

The drive protects the motor and motor cable in a short-circuit situation when the
motor cable is dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional protection devices are needed.
 Protecting the drive, motor cable and input power cable against
thermal overload
The drive protects itself and the input and motor cables against thermal overload
when the cables are dimensioned according to the nominal current of the drive. No
additional thermal protection devices are needed.
WARNING! If the drive is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal

overload switch must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These
devices may require a separate fuse to cut off the short-circuit current.
 Protecting the motor against thermal overload

According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and
the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The drive includes a
motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and switches off the current
when necessary. It is also possible to connect a motor temperature measurement to
the drive. The user can tune both the thermal model and the temperature
measurement function further by parameters.

The most common temperature sensors are:

• motor sizes IEC180…225: thermal switch (for example Klixon)
• motor sizes IEC200…250 and larger: PTC or Pt100.
For more information on the thermal model, see section Motor thermal protection on
page 135. For more information on the temperature measurement function, see
section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 145.
Using residual current devices (RCD) with the drive

ACS310-03x drives are suitable to be used with residual current devices of Type B.
Other measures for protection in case of direct or indirect contact, such as separation
from the environment by double or reinforced insulation or isolation from the supply
system by a transformer, can also be applied.
Implementing a bypass connection
WARNING! Never connect the supply power to the drive output terminals U2,
V2 and W2. Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent
damage to the drive.
If frequent bypassing is required, employ mechanically connected switches or

contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line
and drive output terminals simultaneously.
Protecting the contacts of relay outputs

Inductive loads (relays, contactors, motors) cause voltage transients when switched
off.
Equip inductive loads with noise attenuating circuits (varistors, RC filters [AC] or
diodes [DC]) in order to minimize the EMC emission at switch-off. If not suppressed,
the disturbances may connect capacitively or inductively to other conductors in the
control cable and form a risk of malfunction in other parts of the system.

Install the protective component as close to the inductive load as possible. Do not
install protective components at the I/O terminal block.
Varistor
Drive
230 V AC relay
output
RC filter
Drive
230 V AC relay
output
Diode
Drive
24 V DC relay
output


Electrical installation 45
6
Electrical installation
The chapter tells how to check the insulation of the assembly and the compatibility
with IT (ungrounded) and corner-grounded TN systems as well as connect power
cables, control cables and embedded fieldbus.
WARNING! The work described in this chapter may only be carried out by a
qualified electrician. Follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page 15.
Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.
Make sure that the drive is disconnected from the input power during
installation. If the drive is already connected to the input power, wait for
5 minutes after disconnecting the input power.
Checking the insulation of the assembly

 Drive
Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (for example, hi-pot
or megger) on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has
been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory.
Also, there are voltage-limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing
voltage automatically.
 Input power cable

Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before
connecting to the drive.

46 Electrical installation
 Motor and motor cable

Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows:
1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the
drive output terminals U2, V2 and W2.
2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase
conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a U1 M
V1
measuring voltage of 500 V DC. The insulation resistance W1
3~
ohm
of an ABB motor must exceed 100 Mohm (reference value PE
at 25 °C or 77 °F). For the insulation resistance of other

motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions.
Note: Moisture inside the motor casing reduces the insulation resistance. If
moisture is suspected, dry the motor and repeat the measurement.
Checking the compatibility with IT (ungrounded) and

corner-grounded TN systems
WARNING! Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on an
IT system (an ungrounded power system or a high-resistance-grounded [over
30 ohms] power system), otherwise the system is connected to ground potential
through the EMC filter capacitors. This may cause danger or damage the drive.
Disconnect the internal EMC filter when installing the drive on a corner-grounded TN
system, otherwise the drive will be damaged.
Note: When the internal EMC filter is disconnected, the drive is not EMC compatible.
1. If you have an IT (ungrounded) or corner-grounded TN system, disconnect the

internal EMC filter by removing the EMC screw. For 3-phase U-type drives (with
type designation ACS310-03U-), the EMC screw is already removed at the factory
and replaced by a plastic one.
Note: In frame size R4
the EMC screw is located
to the right of terminal W2.
1
EMC
VAR

Connecting the power cables

 Connection diagram
Drive
INPUT OUTPUT
PE U1 V1 W1 U2 V2 W2
1)
2)
For alternatives, see section PE

Selecting the supply V1
disconnecting device U1 W1
(disconnecting means) on
page 35. 3~
Motor
3)
L1 L2 L3
(L) (N)
1) Ground the other end of the PE conductor at the distribution board.

2)
Use a separate grounding cable if the conductivity of the cable shield is insufficient (smaller
than the conductivity of the phase conductor) and there is no symmetrically constructed
grounding conductor in the cable. See section Selecting the power cables on page 36.
3)
L and N are connection markings for 1-phase supply.
Note:
Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable.
If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to
the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the drive
and motor ends.
For the 1-phase supply, connect power to U1 (L) and V1 (N) terminals.
Route the motor cable, input power cable and control cables separately. For more
information, see section Routing the cables on page 39.
Grounding of the motor cable shield at the motor end

For minimum radio frequency interference:
• ground the cable by twisting the shield as follows:
flattened width > 1/5 · length b > 1/5 · a
• or ground the cable shield 360 degrees at the lead-
through of the motor terminal box. a b

 Connection procedure
1. Fasten the grounding conductor (PE) of the input power cable under the
grounding clamp. Connect the phase conductors to the U1, V1 and W1 terminals.
Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m (7 lbf·in) for frame sizes R0…R2, 1.7 N·m
(15 lbf·in) for R3, and 2.5 N·m (22 lbf·in) for R4.
2. Strip the motor cable and twist the shield to form as short a pigtail as possible.
Fasten the twisted shield under the grounding clamp. Connect the phase
conductors to the U2, V2 and W2 terminals. Use a tightening torque of 0.8 N·m
(7 lbf·in) for frame sizes R0…R2, 1.7 N·m (15 lbf·in) for R3, and 2.5 N·m
(22 lbf·in) for R4.
3. Secure the cables outside the drive mechanically.
1
2

Connecting the control cables

 I/O terminals
The figure below shows the I/O terminals. Tightening torque is 0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).
J701 X1C X1A: X1B:

1: SCR 17: ROCOM
2: AI1 18: RONC
3: GND 19: RONO
4: +10 V 20: DOSRC
5: AI2 21: DOOUT
6: GND 22: DOGND
S1 7: AO
mA 8: GND X1C:
V 9: +24 V 23: SCR
10: GND 24: B
AI1
AI2
X1A X1B
11: DCOM 25: A
12: DI1 26: GND_A
J701: Connects 120 ohm termination resistor. See page 13: DI2
54. 14: DI3
S1: Selects voltage or current as the signal types for 15: DI4
analog inputs AI1 and AI2. 16: DI5 digital or frequency input
WARNING! All ELV (Extra Low Voltage) circuits connected to the drive must be
used within a zone of equipotential bonding, i.e. within a zone where all
simultaneously accessible conductive parts are electrically connected to prevent
hazardous voltages appearing between them. This is accomplished by a proper
factory grounding.
The terminals on the control board as well as on the optional modules attachable to
the board fulfil the Protective Extra Low Voltage (PELV) requirements stated in EN
50178, provided that the external circuits connected to the terminals also fulfil the
requirements and the installation site is below 2000 m (6562 ft).
Voltage and current selection for analog inputs

Switch S1 selects voltage (0 [2]…10 V / -10…10 V) or current (0 [4]…20 mA /
-20…20 mA) as the signal types for analog inputs AI1 and AI2. The factory settings
are unipolar voltage for AI1 (0 [2]…10 V) and unipolar current for AI2 (0 [4]…20 mA),
which correspond to the default usage in the application macros. The switch is
located to the left of I/O terminal 9 (see the I/O terminal figure above).
Top position: I (0 [4]…20 mA, default for AI2; or -20…20 mA)

S1
Bottom position: U (0 [2]…10 V, default for AI1; or -10…10 V)
AI1
AI2

Voltage and current connection for analog inputs

Bipolar voltage (-10…10 V) and current (-20…20 mA) are also possible. If a bipolar
connection is used instead of a unipolar one, see section Programmable analog
inputs on page 124 for how to set parameters accordingly.
Unipolar voltage Bipolar voltage Unipolar/Bipolar current

1…10 kohm SCR SCR SCR
AI AI AI
GND GND GND
+10V Use external power supply.
+10 V GND -10 V
PNP and NPN configuration for digital inputs

You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration.
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)

X1 X1
9 +24V 9 +24V
10 GND 10 GND
11 DCOM 11 DCOM
12 DI1 12 DI1
13 DI2 13 DI2
14 DI3 14 DI3
15 DI4 15 DI4
16 DI5 16 DI5
External power supply for digital inputs

For using an external +24 V supply for the digital inputs, see the figure below.
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)

X1 X1
9 +24V 9 +24V
0 V DC 10 GND +24 V DC 10 GND
11 DCOM 11 DCOM
+24 V DC 0 V DC
12 DI1 12 DI1
13 DI2 13 DI2
14 DI3 14 DI3
15 DI4 15 DI4
16 DI5 16 DI5
Frequency input
If DI5 is used as a frequency input, see section Frequency input on page 127 for how
to set parameters accordingly.

Connection examples of two-wire and three-wire sensors

Hand/Auto, PID control, PFC control and SPFC control macros (see section
Application macros on page 101) use analog input 2 (AI2). The macro wiring
diagrams on these pages use an externally powered sensor (connections not shown).
The figures below gives example of a connections using a two-wire or three-wire
sensor/transmitter supplied by the drive auxiliary voltage output.
Note: Maximum capability of the auxiliary 24 V (200 mA) output must not be
exceeded.
Two-wire sensor/transmitter
X1A
P
- 4…20 mA
5 AI2 Process actual value measurement or reference,
I + 6 GND 0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
…
9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
10 GND +24 V DC, max. 200 mA
Note: The sensor is supplied through its current output and the drive feeds the supply
voltage (+24 V). Thus the output signal must be 4…20 mA, not 0…20 mA.
Three-wire sensor/transmitter
X1A
OUT (0)4…20 mA
P 5 AI2 Process actual value measurement or reference,
- 6 GND 0(4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
I
+ …
9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output, non-isolated,
10 GND +24 V DC, max. 200 mA

 Default I/O connection diagram

The default connection of the control signals depends on the application macro in
use, which is selected with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO.
The default macro is the ABB standard macro. It provides a general purpose I/O
configuration with three constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values
given in section Default values with different macros on page 165. For information on
other macros, see chapter Application macros on page 101.
The default I/O connections for the ABB standard macro are given in the figure below.
X1A
1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 Output frequency reference: 0…10 V
1…10 kohm
3 GND Analog input circuit common
4 +10V Reference voltage: +10 V DC, max. 10 mA
5 AI2 Not in use by default. 0…10 V
max. 500 ohm 6 GND Analog input circuit common
7 AO Output frequency value: 0…20 mA
8 GND Analog output circuit common
3)
9 +24V Auxiliary voltage output: +24 V DC, max. 200 mA
10 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
11 DCOM Digital input common
12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1)
13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1)
14 DI3 Constant speed selection 1)
16 DI5 Acceleration and deceleration selection 2)
X1B
17 ROCOM Relay output 1
18 RONC No fault [Fault (-1)]
19 RONO
20 DOSRC Digital output, max. 100 mA
21 DOOUT No fault [Fault (-1)]
22 DOGND
1) 2)
See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 0 = ramp times according to parameters
SPEEDS: 2202 and 2203.
DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter) 1 = ramp times according to parameters
0 0 Set speed through AI1 2205 and 2206.
1 0 Speed 1 (1202 CONST SPEED 1) 3)
360 degree grounding under a clamp.
0 1 Speed 2 (1203 CONST SPEED 2)
Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).

 Connection procedure
1. Remove the terminal cover by simultaneously pushing the recess and sliding the
cover off the frame.
2. Digital signals: Strip the outer insulation of the digital signal cable 360 degrees
and ground the bare shield under the clamp.
3. Connect the conductors of the cable to the appropriate terminals. Use a tightening
torque of 0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).
4. For double-shielded cables, twist also the grounding conductors of each pair in
the cable together and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal (terminal 1).
4
3
4
1 2
2
5. Analog signals: Strip the outer insulation of the analog signal cable 360 degrees
and ground the bare shield under the clamp.
6. Connect the conductors to the appropriate terminals. Use a tightening torque of
0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).
7. Twist the grounding conductors of each pair in the analog signal cable together
and connect the bundle to the SCR terminal (terminal 1).
8. Secure the connected cables outside the drive mechanically.
9. Slide the terminal cover back in place.
6
4
7
5
9
5

Connecting the embedded fieldbus

Embedded fieldbus is connected to the drive with EIA-485 or RS-232.
 Connection diagram
EIA-485
The figure below shows the fieldbus connection.
J701 SCR B A GND_A

X1C
SCR 23 SCR Fieldbus cable shield (screen) X1C
+ 24 B Positive
- 25 A Negative
GND
25 GND_A Fieldbus common
Terminate the EIA-485 bus with a 120 ohm resistor at the end of the network by
setting the jumper J701 shunts as in the figure below.
Fieldbus
controller
EIA-485
Jumper shunts Fieldbus
connect the J701 J701 J701
120 ohm
termination
resistor.
RS-232
Plug a communication cable into the control panel connection X2. The cable must be
shorter than 3 meters.
Fieldbus
controller
RS-232
<3m

Installation checklist 55
7
Installation checklist
Checking the installation
Check the mechanical and electrical installation of the drive before start-up. Go
through the checklist below together with another person. Read chapter Safety on
page 15 of this manual before you work on the drive.
Check
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
The ambient operating conditions are within allowed limits. (See Mechanical installation:
Checking the installation site on page 29 as well as Technical data: Losses, cooling data
and noise on page 345 and Ambient conditions on page 351.)
The drive is fixed properly on an even vertical non-flammable wall. (See Mechanical
installation on page 29.)
The cooling air flows freely. (See Mechanical installation: Free space around the drive on
page 30.)
The motor and the driven equipment are ready for start. (See Planning the electrical
installation: Checking the compatibility of the motor and drive on page 36 as well as
Technical data: Motor connection data on page 348.)
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (See Planning the electrical installation on page 35 and
Electrical installation on page 45.)
For ungrounded and corner-grounded systems: The internal EMC filter is disconnected
(EMC screw removed).
The capacitors are reformed if the drive has been stored over a year.
The drive is grounded properly.
The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage.
The input power connections at U1, V1 and W1 are OK and tightened with the correct
torque.
Appropriate input power fuses and disconnector are installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2 and W2 are OK and tightened with the correct torque.

56 Installation checklist
Check
The motor cable, input power cable and control cables are routed separately.
The external control (I/O) connections are OK.
The input power voltage cannot be applied to the output of the drive (with a bypass
connection).
Terminal cover and, for NEMA 1, hood and connection box, are in place.

Start-up and control with I/O 57
8
Start-up and control with I/O
The chapter tells how to:
• perform the start-up
• start, stop, change the direction of the motor rotation and adjust the speed of the
motor through the I/O interface
Using the control panel to do these tasks is explained briefly in this chapter. For
details on how to use the control panel, refer to chapter Control panels on page 67.
How to start up the drive
WARNING! The start-up may only be carried out by a qualified

electrician.
The safety instructions given in chapter Safety on page 15 must be followed during
the start-up procedure.
The drive starts up automatically at power up if the external run command is on and
the drive is in the remote control mode.
Check that the starting of the motor does not cause any danger. De-couple the
driven machine if there is a risk of damage in case of incorrect direction of rotation.
Note: By default, parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 (SHORT VIEW),

and you cannot see all actual signals and parameters. To be able to view them, set
parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to 3 (LONG VIEW).

58 Start-up and control with I/O
• Check the installation. See the checklist in chapter Installation checklist on page
55.
How you start up the drive depends on the control panel you have, if any.
• If you have no control panel, follow the instructions given in section How to start
up the drive without a control panel on page 58.
• If you have a Basic control panel (ACS-CP-S), follow the instructions given in
section How to perform a manual start-up on page 59.
• If you have an Assistant control panel (ACS-CP-A or ACS-CP-D), you can
either run the Start-up assistant (see section How to perform a guided start-up on
page 62) or perform a manual start-up (see section How to perform a manual
start-up on page 59).
The Start-up assistant, which is included in the Assistant control panel only,
guides you through all essential settings to be done. In the manual start-up, the
drive gives no guidance; you go through the very basic settings by following the
instructions given in section How to perform a manual start-up on page 59.
 How to start up the drive without a control panel

POWER-UP
Apply input power and wait for a moment.
Check that the red LED is not lit and the green LED is lit but not blinking.
The drive is now ready for use.

 How to perform a manual start-up

For the manual start-up, you can use the Basic control panel or the Assistant control
panel. The instructions below are valid for both control panels, but the displays shown
are the Basic control panel displays, unless the instruction applies to the Assistant
control panel only.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
POWER-UP
Apply input power.
The Basic control panel powers up into the
Output mode.
REM
OUTPUT
00
. FWD
Hz
The Assistant control panel asks if you want to REM CHOICE

run the Start-up assistant. If you press
EXIT
, the Do you want to
use the start-up
Start-up assistant is not run, and you can assistant?
Yes
continue with manual start-up in a similar manner No
as described below for the Basic control panel. EXIT 00:00 OK
MANUAL ENTRY OF START-UP DATA (parameter group 99)

If you have an Assistant control panel, select the REM PAR EDIT
language (the Basic control panel does not 9901 LANGUAGE
support languages). See parameter 9901 for the ENGLISH
values of the available language alternatives. [0]
For instructions on how to set parameters with the CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Assistant control panel, see section Assistant control
panel on page 80.
Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate: Note: Set the motor data to
exactly the same value as on
the motor nameplate. For
ABB Motors example, if the nominal motor
speed is 1470 rpm on the
3 motor M2AA 200 MLA 4
nameplate, setting the value of
IEC 200 M/L 55 parameter 9908 MOTOR NOM
No SPEED to 1500 rpm results in
Ins.cl. F IP 55 the wrong operation of the
V Hz kW r/min A cos IA/IN t E/s drive.
690 Y 50 30 1475 32.5 0.83
400 D 50 30 1475 56 0.83
660 Y 50 30 1470 34 0.83 380 V
380 D 50 30 1470 59 0.83 supply
415 D 50 30 1475 54 0.83 voltage
440 D 60 35 1770 59 0.83
Cat. no 3GAA 202 001 - ADA
6312/C3 6210/C3 180

IEC 34-1
• nominal motor voltage (parameter 9905)

Setting of parameter 9905 is shown below as an
example of parameter setting with the Basic control
REM
9905PAR FWD
panel. You find more detailed instructions in section
Basic control panel on page 69.

1. To go to the Main menu, press if the bottom

line shows OUTPUT; otherwise press
repeatedly until you see MENU at the bottom.
REM
rEF
MENU FWD
2. Press keys / until you see “PAr”, and
press . REM
-01- PAR FWD
3. Find the appropriate parameter group with keys
/ and press . REM
9901 PAR FWD
4. Find the appropriate parameter in the group with
keys / . REM
9905 PAR FWD
5. Press and hold for about two seconds until the
400
V
parameter value is shown with SET under the value. REM
PAR SET FWD
6. Change the value with keys / . The value
380
V
changes faster while you keep the key pressed REM
down.
PAR SET FWD
7. Save the parameter value by pressing .
REM
9905 PAR FWD
Enter the rest of the motor data:
• nominal motor current (parameter 9906)
Allowed range: 0.2…2.0 · I 2N A
REM
9906 PAR FWD
• nominal motor frequency (parameter 9907)
REM
9907 PAR FWD
• nominal motor speed (parameter 9908)
REM
9908 PAR FWD
• nominal motor power (parameter 9909)
REM
9909 PAR FWD
Select the application macro (parameter 9902)
according to how the control cables are
connected. The default value 1 (ABB
REM
9902 PAR FWD
STANDARD) is suitable in most cases.

DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION

Check the direction of the motor rotation.
• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on
xxx
LOC
the left), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM .
. SET FWD
Hz
• To go to the Main menu, press if the

bottom line shows OUTPUT; otherwise press
repeatedly until you see MENU at the
bottom.
• Press keys / until you see “rEF” and
press .
• Increase the frequency reference from zero to
a small value with key .
• Press to start the motor.
• Check that the actual direction of the motor is
the same as indicated on the display (FWD
means forward and REV reverse).
• Press to stop the motor. forward reverse
direction direction
To change the direction of the motor rotation:
• If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not
1611
LOC
visible, first set parameter 1611 PARAMETER
VIEW to 3 (LONG VIEW). PAR FWD
• Invert the phases by changing the value of
9914
LOC
parameter 9914 to the opposite, ie from 0 (NO)
to 1 (YES), or vice versa. PAR FWD
• Verify your work by applying input power and
repeating the check as described above. Set
parameter 1611 back to 2 (SHORT VIEW).
FINAL CHECK
Check that the drive state is OK.
Basic control panel: Check that there are no
faults or alarms shown on the display. If you want
to check the LEDs on the front of the drive, switch
first to remote control (otherwise a fault is
generated) before removing the panel and
verifying that the red LED is not lit and the green
LED is lit but not blinking.
Assistant control panel: Check that there are no
faults or alarms shown on the display and that the
panel LED is green and does not blink.

 How to perform a guided start-up

To be able to perform the guided start-up, you need the Assistant control panel.
Before you start, ensure that you have the motor nameplate data on hand.
POWER-UP
Apply input power. The control panel first asks if you REM CHOICE
want to use the Start-up assistant. Do you want to
use the start-up
• Press
OK
(when Yes is highlighted) to run the assistant?
Yes
Start-up assistant. No
EXIT
EXIT 00:00 OK
• Press if you do not want to run the Start-up
assistant.
OK
• Press key to highlight No and then press REM CHOICE
Show start-up
if you want to make the panel ask (or not ask) the assistant on
question about running the Start-up assistant again next boot?
Yes
the next time you switch on the power to the drive. No
EXIT 00:00 OK
SELECTING THE LANGUAGE
If you decided to run the Start-up assistant, the REM PAR EDIT
display then asks you to select the language. Scroll 9901 LANGUAGE
to the desired language with keys / and ENGLISH
SAVE
press to accept. [0]
EXIT CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
If you press , the Start-up assistant is stopped.
STARTING THE GUIDED SET-UP
The Start-up assistant now guides you through the REM PAR EDIT
set-up tasks, starting with the motor set-up. Set the 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
motor data to exactly the same value as on the motor 220 V
nameplate.
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
Scroll to the desired parameter value with keys /
SAVE
and press to accept and continue with the
Start-up assistant.
EXIT
Note: At any time, if you press , the Start-up
assistant is stopped and the display goes to the
Output mode.
The basic start-up is now completed. However, it REM CHOICE
might be useful at this stage to set the parameters Do you want to
continue with
required by your application and continue with the application setup?
Continue
application set-up as suggested by the Start-up Skip
assistant. EXIT 00:00 OK

Select the application macro according to which the REM PAR EDIT
control cables are connected. 9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
[1]
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
Continue with the application set-up. After REM CHOICE
completing a set-up task, the Start-up assistant Do you want to
continue with
suggests the next one. EXT1 reference setup?
OK
Continue
• Press (when Continue is highlighted) to Skip
EXIT 00:00 OK
continue with the suggested task.
• Press key to highlight Skip and then press
OK
to move to the following task without doing the
suggested task.
EXIT
• Press to stop the Start-up assistant.
DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR ROTATION
Check the direction of the motor rotation.
• If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the LOC xx.xHz
status line), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM .
xx.x Hz
• If you are not in the Output mode, press
EXIT
x .x A
repeatedly until you get there. xx.x %
DIR 00:00 MENU
• Increase the frequency reference from zero to a
small value with key .
• Press to start the motor.
• Check that the actual direction of the motor is the
same as indicated on the display ( means
forward and reverse).
• Press to stop the motor. forward reverse
direction direction
To change the direction of the motor rotation:
• If parameter 9914 PHASE INVERSION is not LOC PAR EDIT
visible, first set parameter 1611 PARAMETER 1611 PARAMETER VIEW
VIEW to 3 (LONG VIEW). LONG VIEW
[3]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
• Invert the phases by changing the value of LOC PAR EDIT
parameter 9914 to the opposite, ie from 0 (NO) to 9914 PHASE INVERSION
1 (YES), or vice versa. YES
• Verify your work by applying input power and [1]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
repeating the check as described above.
• Set parameter 1611 back to 2 (SHORT VIEW).

FINAL CHECK
After the whole set-up is completed, check that there
are no faults or alarms shown on the display and the
panel LED is green and does not blink.

How to control the drive through the I/O interface

The table below instructs how to operate the drive through the digital and analog
inputs when:
• the motor start-up is performed, and
• the default (standard) parameter settings are valid.
Displays of the Basic control panel are shown as an example.
PRELIMINARY SETTINGS
If you need to change the direction of rotation, check
that parameter 1003 DIRECTION is set to 3
(REQUEST).
Ensure that the control connections are wired See section Default I/O
according to the connection diagram given for the connection diagram on page
52.
ABB standard macro.
Ensure that the drive is in remote control. Press key In remote control, the panel
REM to switch between remote and local control.
LOC display shows text REM.
STARTING AND CONTROLLING THE SPEED OF THE MOTOR

Start by switching digital input DI1 on.
Basic control panel: Text FWD starts flashing fast and
stops after the setpoint is reached
REM
OUTPUT
00
. FWD
Hz
Assistant control panel: The arrow starts rotating. It is

dotted until the setpoint is reached.
Regulate the drive output frequency (motor speed) by
adjusting the voltage of analog input AI1. REM
OUTPUT
500
. FWD
Hz
CHANGING THE DIRECTION OF MOTOR ROTATION

Reverse direction: Switch digital input DI2 on.
REM
OUTPUT
500
. Hz
REV
Forward direction: Switch digital input DI2 off.
REM
OUTPUT
500
. FWD
Hz
STOPPING THE MOTOR

Switch digital input DI1 off. The motor stops.
Basic control panel: Text FWD starts flashing slowly.
REM
OUTPUT
00
. FWD
Hz
Assistant control panel: The arrow stops rotating.


Control panels 67
9
Control panels
The chapter describes the control panel keys, LED indicators and display fields. It
also instructs in using the panel in control, monitoring and changing the settings.
About control panels

Use a control panel to control the ACS310, read status data, and adjust parameters.
The drive works with either of two different control panel types:
• Basic control panel – This panel (described in section Basic control panel on page
69) provides basic tools for manual entry of parameter values.
• Assistant control panel – This panel (described in section Assistant control panel
on page 80) includes pre-programmed assistants to automate the most common
parameter setups. The panel provides language support. It is available with
different language sets.
Applicability
The manual is applicable to panels with the panel revisions and the panel firmware
versions given in the table below.
Panel type Type code Panel revision Panel firmware
version
Basic control panel ACS-CP-C M or later 1.13 or later
Assistant control panel ACS-CP-A E or later 2.04 or later
Assistant control panel (Asia) ACS-CP-D P or later 2.04 or later

68 Control panels
To find out the panel revision, see the label on the back of the panel. An example
label and explanation of the label contents are shown below.
1 ABB Oy, ACS-CP-A

2 S/N M0935E0001 RoHS 3
1 Panel type code

2 Serial number of format MYYWWRXXXX, where
M: Manufacturer
YY: 08, 09, 10, …, for 2008, 2009, 2010, …
WW: 01, 02, 03, … for week 1, week 2, week 3, …
R: A, B, C, … for panel revision
XXXX: Integer starting every week from 0001
3 RoHS mark (the label of your drive shows the valid markings)
To find out the panel firmware version of your Assistant control panel, see page 84.
For the Basic control panel see page 72.
See parameter 9901 LANGUAGE to find out the languages supported by the different
Assistant control panels.

Control panels 69
Basic control panel

 Features
The Basic control panel features:
• numeric control panel with an LCD display
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.

70 Control panels
 Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Basic control
panel.
No. Use
1 LCD display – Divided into five areas:
a. Upper left – Control location:
LOC: drive control is local, that is, from the 1a LOC A 1b
control panel 1c 11
.
REM: drive control is remote, such as the drive 1d OUTPUT FWD 1e
I/O or fieldbus.
b. Upper right – Unit of the displayed value.
c. Center – Variable; in general, shows parameter 2 3
and signal values, menus or lists. Shows also 4
fault and alarm codes. 6 5 7
d. Lower left and center – Panel operation state:
8 9
OUTPUT: Output mode
PAR: Parameter mode
MENU: Main menu.
FAULT : Fault mode.
e. Lower right – Indicators:
FWD (forward) / REV (reverse): direction of the motor rotation
Flashing slowly: stopped
Flashing rapidly: running, not at setpoint
Steady: running, at setpoint
SET : Displayed value can be modified (in the Parameter and Reference modes).
2 RESET/EXIT – Exits to the next higher menu level without saving changed values.
Resets faults in the Output and Fault modes.
3 MENU/ENTER – Enters deeper into menu level. In the Parameter mode, saves the
displayed value as the new setting.
4 Up –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list.
• Increases a value if a parameter is selected.
• Increases the reference value in the Reference mode.
• Holding the key down changes the value faster.
5 Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or list.
• Decreases a value if a parameter is selected.
• Decreases the reference value in the Reference mode.
• Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
7 DIR – Changes the direction of the motor rotation.
8 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
9 START – Starts the drive in local control.

Control panels 71
 Operation
You can operate the control panel with the help of menus and keys. You can select an
option, for example, an operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and
arrow keys until the option is visible on the display and then pressing the key.
With the key, you can return to the previous operation level without saving the
made changes.
The Basic control panel has five panel modes: Output mode, Reference mode,
Parameter mode, Copy mode and Fault mode. The operation in the first four modes
is described in this chapter. When a fault or alarm occurs, the panel goes
automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm code. You can reset the
fault or alarm in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter Fault tracing on page 311).
After the power is switched on, the panel is in the
Output mode, where you can start, stop, change the
direction, switch between local and remote control and
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
monitor up to three actual values (one at a time). To do

other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
appropriate mode.
REM
MENU
PAr FWD
How to perform common tasks

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and the page
number where the steps of the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to find out the panel firmware version At power up 72
How to switch between local and remote control Any 72
How to start and stop the drive Any 72
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any 73
How to browse the monitored signals Output 74
How to set the frequency reference Reference 75
How to change the value of a parameter Parameter 76
How to select the monitored signals Parameter 77
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 311
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Copy 79
How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Copy 79

72 Control panels
How to find out the panel firmware version

Step Action Display
1. If the power is switched on, switch it off.
2. Keep key pressed down while you switch on the
power and read the panel firmware version shown on
the display. X.X X
When you release the key, the panel goes to the
Output mode.
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action Display
1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on
491
LOC
the left) and local control (LOC shown on the left),
press LOC
REM .
OUTPUT
. FWD
Hz
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled

with parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
After pressing the key, the display briefly shows
LoC
LOC
message “LoC” or “rE”, as appropriate, before
returning to the previous display.
FWD
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in

remote control (REM) and controlled through the
drive I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC)
and control the drive using the control panel, press
REM . The result depends on how long you press
LOC
the key:
• If you release the key immediately (the display
flashes “LoC”), the drive stops. Set the local
control reference as instructed on page 75.
• If you press the key for about two seconds
(release when the display changes from “LoC”
to “LoC r”), the drive continues as before. The
drive copies the current remote values for the
run/stop status and the reference, and uses
them as the initial local control settings.
• To stop the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing slowly.
• To start the drive in local control, press . Text FWD or REV on the bottom
line starts flashing rapidly. It
stops flashing when the drive
reaches the setpoint.

Control panels 73
How to change the direction of the motor rotation

You can change the direction of the motor rotation in any mode.
Step Action Display
1. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the
491
LOC
left), switch to local control by pressing LOC
display briefly shows message “LoC” before
REM . The
OUTPUT
. FWD
Hz
returning to the previous display.

2. To change the direction from forward (FWD shown at
491
LOC
the bottom) to reverse (REV shown at the bottom), or
vice versa, press .
OUTPUT
. Hz
REV
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3

(REQUEST).

74 Control panels
 Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three group 01 OPERATING DATA signals, one
signal at a time
• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
You can enter the Output mode by pressing until the display shows text OUTPUT
at the bottom.
The display shows the value of one group 01
OPERATING DATA signal. The unit is shown on the
right. Page 77 tells how to select up to three signals to
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
be monitored in the Output mode. The table below

shows how to view them one at a time.
How to browse the monitored signals

Step Action Display
1. If more than one signals have been selected to be
monitored (see page 77), you can browse them in
the Output mode.
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
To browse the signals forward, press key
05
repeatedly. To browse them backward, press key A
repeatedly.
REM
OUTPUT
. FWD
REM
OUTPUT
107
. FWD
%

Control panels 75
 Reference mode
In the Reference mode, you can:
• set the frequency reference
How to set the frequency reference

Step Action Display
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in
the Output mode, otherwise by pressing
REM
PAr
MENU FWD
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the

PAr
LOC
left), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM . The
display briefly shows “LoC” before switching to local

MENU FWD
control.
Note: With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT, you
can allow the reference modification in remote
control (REM).
3. If the panel is not in the Reference mode (“rEF” not
rEF
LOC
visible), press key or until you see “rEF”
and then press . Now the display shows the
MENU FWD
current reference value with SET under the value.
491
LOC
. SET FWD
Hz
4. • To increase the reference value, press .

500
LOC
• To decrease the reference value, press
The value changes immediately when you press the
.
. SET FWD
Hz
key. It is stored in the drive permanent memory and

restored automatically after power switch-off.

76 Control panels
 Parameter mode
In the Parameter mode, you can:
• view and change parameter values
• select and modify the signals shown in the Output mode
How to select a parameter and change its value

Step Action Display
rEF
LOC
MENU FWD
2. If the panel is not in the Parameter mode (“PAr” not

PAr
LOC
visible), press key or until you see “PAr”
and then press . The display shows the number
MENU FWD
of one of the parameter groups.
-01-
LOC
PAR FWD
3. Use keys and to find the desired

-11-
LOC
parameter group.
PAR FWD
4. Press . The display shows one of the

1101
LOC
parameters in the selected group.
PAR FWD
5. Use keys and to find the desired

1103
LOC
parameter.
PAR FWD
6. Press and hold for about two seconds until the

1
LOC
display shows the value of the parameter with SET
underneath indicating that changing of the value is
PAR SET FWD
now possible.
Note: When SET is visible, pressing keys and
simultaneously changes the displayed value to
the default value of the parameter.
7. Use keys and to select the parameter
2
LOC
value. When you have changed the parameter value,
SET starts flashing.
PAR SET FWD
• To save the displayed parameter value, press

1103
LOC
.
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, PAR FWD
press .

Control panels 77
How to select the monitored signals

Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the
103
LOC
Output mode and how they are displayed with group
34 PANEL DISPLAY parameters. See page 76 for
PAR SET FWD
detailed instructions on changing parameter values.
104
By default, the display shows three signals: LOC
Signal 1: 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
Signal 2: 0104 CURRENT PAR SET FWD
Signal 3: 0105 TORQUE
105
LOC
To change the default signals, select up to three
signals from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be
PAR SET FWD
shown.
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401
SIGNAL1 PARAM to the index of the signal
parameter in group 01 OPERATING DATA
(= number of the parameter without the leading
zero), for example, 105 means parameter 0105
TORQUE. Value 100 means that no signal is
displayed.
Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3
(3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM). For example, if 3401 = 0
and 3415 = 0, browsing is disabled and only the
signal specified by 3408 appears in the display. If all
three parameters are set to 0, ie no signals are
selected for monitoring, the panel displays text “n.A”.
2. Specify the decimal point location, or use the decimal
9
LOC
point location and unit of the source signal (setting 9
[DIRECT]). Bar graphs are not available for basic
PAR SET FWD
control panel. For details, see parameter 3404.
Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.
3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This
3
LOC
has no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9
(DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405.
PAR SET FWD
Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT.
4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the
00
LOC
minimum and maximum display values. This has no
effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 .PAR SET FWD
Hz
(DIRECT). For details, see parameters 3406 and

3407.
5000
LOC
Signal 1: parameters 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN and 3407
OUTPUT1 MAX
.PAR SET FWD
Hz

OUTPUT2 MAX
OUTPUT3 MAX.

78 Control panels
 Copy mode
The Basic control panel can store a full set of drive parameters and up to two user
sets of drive parameters to the control panel. Uploading and downloading can be
performed in local control. The control panel memory is non-volatile.
In the Copy mode, you can do the following:
• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (uL – Upload). This
includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by the
user) parameters.
• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (dL A –
Download all). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-
adjustable motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of
parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to
systems that are identical to the original system.
• Copy a partial parameter set from the control panel to a drive (dL P – Download
partial). The partial set does not include user sets, internal motor parameters,
parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any group 53 EFB PROTOCOL
parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• Copy user set 1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u1 – Download
user set 1). A user set includes group 99 START-UP DATA parameters and the
internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when User set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section user macros on page 112)
and then uploaded to panel.
• Copy user set 2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (dL u2 – Download
user set 2). As dL u1 – Download User set 1 above.
• Start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

Control panels 79
How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above. Note that the drive has
to be in local control for uploading and downloading.
Step Action Display
PAr
LOC
MENU FWD
2. If the panel is not in the Copy mode (“CoPY” not

CoPY
LOC
visible), press key or until you see
“CoPY”.
MENU FWD
Press .
uL
LOC
MENU FWD
3. To upload all parameters (including user sets) from

uL
LOC
the drive to the control panel, step to “uL” with keys
and .
MENU FWD
Press . During the transfer, the display shows

uL 50
LOC
the degree of completion in percent. %
FWD
To perform downloads, step to the appropriate

dL A
LOC
operation (here “dL A”, Download all, is used as an
example) with keys and .
MENU FWD
Press . During the transfer, the display shows

dL 50
LOC
the degree of completion in percent. %
FWD
 Basic control panel alarm codes

In addition to the faults and alarms generated by the drive (see chapter Fault tracing
on page 311), the Basic control panel indicates control panel alarms with a code of
form A5xxx. See section Alarms generated by the Basic control panel on page 317
for a list of the alarm codes and descriptions.

80 Control panels
Assistant control panel

 Features
The Assistant control panel features:
• alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display
• language selection for the display
• Start-up assistant to ease drive commissioning
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.
• context sensitive help
• real time clock.

Control panels 81
 Overview
The following table summarizes the key functions and displays on the Assistant
control panel
No. Use 1
1 Status LED – Green for normal operation. If LED is
flashing, or red, see section LEDs on page 333. 2a LOC 49.1Hz
2 LCD display – Divided into three main areas: 49. 1 Hz
2a: Status line – variable, depending on the mode of 2b 0. 5 A
operation, see section Status line on page 82. 10. 7 %
2b: Center – variable; in general, shows signal and 2c DIR 00:00 MENU
parameter values, menus or lists. Shows also faults
and alarms. 3 4
2c: Bottom line – shows current functions of the two 5
soft keys and, if enabled, the clock display. 6
7 8
3 Soft key 1 – Function depends on the context. The
text in the lower left corner of the LCD display 9 10
indicates the function.
4 Soft key 2 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right corner of the
LCD display indicates the function.
5 Up –
• Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
• Increments a value if a parameter is selected.
• Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 Down –
• Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
• Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.
• Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
7 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
8 Help – Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed. The information
displayed describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display.
9 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
10 START – Starts the drive in local control.

82 Control panels
Status line
The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.
LOC 49.1Hz LOC MAIN MENU 1
1 2 4 1 2 3 4
No. Field Alternatives Significance

1 Control location LOC Drive control is local, that is, from the
control panel.
REM Drive control is remote, such as the drive
I/O or fieldbus.
2 State Forward shaft direction
Reverse shaft direction
Rotating arrow Drive is running at setpoint.
Dotted rotating arrow Drive is running but not at setpoint.
Stationary arrow Drive is stopped.
Dotted stationary arrow Start command is present, but the motor is
not running, eg because start enable is
missing.
3 Panel operation • Name of the current mode
mode • Name of the list or menu shown
• Name of the operation state, eg PAR
EDIT.
4 Reference value or • Reference value in the Output mode
number of the • Number of the highlighted item, eg
selected item mode, parameter group or fault.
 Operation
You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two context-
sensitive soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the
display above each key.
You select an option, eg operation mode or parameter, by scrolling the and
arrow keys until the option is highlighted (in reverse video) and then pressing
the relevant soft key. With the right soft key you usually enter a mode, accept an
option or save the changes. The left soft key is used to cancel the made changes
and return to the previous operation level.
The Assistant control panel has nine panel modes: Output mode, Parameter mode,
Assistants mode, Changed parameters mode, Fault logger mode, Time and date
mode, Parameter backup mode, IO settings mode and Fault mode. The operation in
the first eight modes is described in this chapter. When a fault or alarm occurs, the
panel goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm. You can reset
it in the Output or Fault mode (see chapter Fault tracing on page 311).

Control panels 83
Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you can LOC 49.1Hz
start, stop, change the direction, switch between local and 49.1 Hz
remote control, modify the reference value and monitor up 0.5 A
to three actual values. 10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
To do other tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
LOC MAIN MENU 1
appropriate mode on the menu. The status line (see
section Status line on page 82) shows the name of the
PARAMETERS
current menu, mode, item or state.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
How to do common tasks

The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them and
the page number where the steps to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode Page
How to get help Any 84
How to find out the panel version At power up 84
How to adjust the display contrast Output 87
How to switch between local and remote control Any 85
How to start and stop the drive Any 86
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Output 86
How to set the frequency reference Output 87
How to change the value of a parameter Parameters 88
How to select the monitored signals Parameters 89
How to perform guided tasks (specification of related parameter Assistants 91
sets) with assistants
How to view and edit changed parameters Changed 93
parameters
How to view faults Fault logger 94
How to reset faults and alarms Output, Fault 311
How to show/hide the clock, change date and time formats, set the Time and date 95
clock and enable/disable automatic clock transitions according to
the daylight saving changes
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control panel Parameter 98
backup
How to restore parameters from the control panel to the drive Parameter 98
backup
How to view backup information Parameter 99
backup
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals IO Settings 100

84 Control panels
How to get help

Step Action Display
1. Press ? to read the context-sensitive help text for the LOC PAR GROUPS 10
item that is highlighted. 01 OPERATING DATA
03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
If help text exists for the item, it is shown on the display. LOC HELP
This group defines
external sources
(EXT1 and EXT2) for
commands that enable
start, stop and
EXIT 00:00
2. If the whole text is not visible, scroll the lines with keys LOC HELP
and . external sources
(EXT1 and EXT2) for
commands that enable
start, stop and
direction changes.
EXIT 00:00
3. After reading the text, return to the previous display by LOC PAR GROUPS 10
EXIT
pressing . 01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
How to find out the panel version

Step Action Display
1. If the power is switched on, switch it off.
2. Keep key ? pressed down while you switch on the PANEL VERSION INFO
power and read the information. The display shows the Panel SW: x.xx
following panel information: Rom CRC: xxxxxxxxxx
Flash Rev: x.xx
Panel SW: panel firmware version xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ROM CRC: panel ROM check sum
Flash Rev: flash content version
Flash content comment.
When you release the ? key, the panel goes to the
Output mode.

Control panels 85
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive, the drive must be in local control.
Step Action Display
1. • To switch between remote control (REM shown on the LOC MESSAGE
status line) and local control (LOC shown on the status Switching to the
line), press LOC
REM .
local control mode.
Note: Switching to local control can be disabled with

00:00
parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in
remote control (REM) and controlled through the drive
I/O terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and
control the drive using the control panel, press LOC
REM .
The result depends on how long you press the key:

• If you release the key immediately (the display
flashes “Switching to the local control mode”), the
drive stops. Set the local control reference as
instructed on page 87.
• If you press the key for about two seconds, the drive
continues as before. The drive copies the current
remote values for the run/stop status and the
reference, and uses them as the initial local control
settings.
• To stop the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the
status line stops rotating.
• To start the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the
status line starts rotating. It
is dotted until the drive
reaches the setpoint.

86 Control panels
 Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three signals in group 01 OPERATING DATA
• change the direction of the motor rotation
• set the frequency reference
• adjust the display contrast
EXIT
You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly.
The top right corner of the LOC 49.1Hz LOC 5.0Hz
display shows the reference 49.1 Hz Hz 50%
value. The center can be 0.5 A 0.4 A
configured to show up to three 10.7 % 24.4 %
signal values or bar graphs; see DIR 00:00 MENU DIR 00:00 MENU
page 89 for instructions on
selecting and modifying the monitored signals.
How to change the direction of the motor rotation

Step Action Display
EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly REM 49.1Hz
until you get there.
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status LOC 49.1Hz
line), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM . The display
briefly shows a message about changing the mode and

49.1 Hz
then returns to the Output mode. 0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
3. To change the direction from forward ( shown on the LOC 49.1Hz
status line) to reverse ( shown on the status line), or
vice versa, press
DIR
.
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to 3
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
(REQUEST).

Control panels 87
How to set the frequency reference

Step Action Display
EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly REM 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status LOC 49.1Hz
line), switch to local control by pressing LOC
REM . The display
briefly shows a message about changing the mode and

49.1 Hz
then returns to the Output mode. 0.5 A
Note: With group 11 REFERENCE SELECT, you can 10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
allow the reference modification in remote control.
3. • To increase the highlighted reference value shown in LOC 50.0Hz
the top right corner of the display, press . The
value changes immediately. It is stored in the drive
50.0 Hz
permanent memory and restored automatically after 0.5 A
power switch-off. 10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
• To decrease the value, press .
How to adjust the display contrast

Step Action Display
EXIT
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly LOC 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
MENU
2. • To increase the contrast, press keys and LOC 49.1Hz
simultaneously.
• To decrease the contrast, press keys
MENU
and
49.1 Hz
simultaneously.
0.5 A
10.7 %
DIR 00:00 MENU

88 Control panels
 Parameters mode
In the Parameters mode, you can:
• view and change parameter values
How to select a parameter and change its value

Step Action Display
MENU
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the LOC MAIN MENU 1
EXIT
Output mode, otherwise by pressing repeatedly until PARAMETERS
you get to the Main menu.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Parameters mode by selecting PARAMETERS LOC PAR GROUPS 01
on the menu with keys and , and pressing 01 OPERATING DATA
ENTER 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS
.
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
11 REFERENCE SELECT
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys LOC PAR GROUPS 99
and . 99 START-UP DATA
01 OPERATING DATA
04 FAULT HISTORY
10 START/STOP/DIR
EXIT 00:00 SEL
SEL
Press . LOC PARAMETERS
9901 LANGUAGE
ENGLISH
9902 APPLIC MACRO
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
4. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and LOC PARAMETERS
. The current value of the parameter is shown 9901 LANGUAGE
below the selected parameter. 9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
EDIT
Press . LOC PAR EDIT
9902 APPLIC MACRO
ABB STANDARD
[1]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
5. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys LOC PAR EDIT
and .
9902 APPLIC MACRO
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. 3-WIRE
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed [2]
value with the default value. CANCEL 00:00 SAVE

Control panels 89
Step Action Display

SAVE
6. • To save the new value, press . LOC PARAMETERS
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press 9901 LANGUAGE
CANCEL 9902 APPLIC MACRO
. 3-WIRE
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
How to select the monitored signals

Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output LOC PAR EDIT
mode and how they are displayed with group 34 PANEL
DISPLAY parameters. See page 88 for detailed 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM
instructions on changing parameter values. OUTPUT FREQ
By default, the display shows three signals: [103]
Signal 1: 0103 OUTPUT FREQ CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Signal 2: 0104 CURRENT LOC PAR EDIT
Signal 3: 0105 TORQUE 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM
To change the default signals, select up to three signals
from group 01 OPERATING DATA to be shown.
CURRENT
[104]
Signal 1: Change the value of parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
PARAM to the index of the signal parameter in group 01 LOC PAR EDIT
OPERATING DATA (= number of the parameter without
the leading zero), eg 105 means parameter 0105 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM
TORQUE. Value 0 means that no signal is displayed. TORQUE
Repeat for signals 2 (3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM) and 3 [105]
(3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM). CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
2. Select how you want the signals to be displayed: as a LOC PAR EDIT
decimal number or a bar graph. For decimal numbers,
you can specify the decimal point location, or use the 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM
decimal point location and unit of the source signal DIRECT
(setting 9 [DIRECT]). For details, see parameter 3404. [9]
Signal 1: parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Signal 3: parameter 3418 OUTPUT3 DSP FORM.
3. Select the units to be displayed for the signals. This has LOC PAR EDIT
no effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9
(DIRECT). For details, see parameter 3405. 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT
Signal 1: parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT Hz
Signal 2: parameter 3412 OUTPUT2 UNIT [3]
Signal 3: parameter 3419 OUTPUT3 UNIT. CANCEL 00:00 SAVE

90 Control panels
Step Action Display

4. Select the scalings for the signals by specifying the LOC PAR EDIT
minimum and maximum display values. This has no
effect if parameter 3404/3411/3418 is set to 9 (DIRECT). 3406 OUTPUT1 MIN
For details, see parameters 3406 and 3407. 0.0 Hz
OUTPUT1 MAX CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
Signal 2: parameters 3413 OUTPUT2 MIN and 3414 LOC PAR EDIT
OUTPUT2 MAX 3407 OUTPUT1 MAX
OUTPUT3 MAX.
500.0 Hz
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE

Control panels 91
 Assistants mode
When the drive is first powered up, the Start-up assistant guides you through the
setup of the basic parameters. The Start-up assistant is divided into assistants, each
of which is responsible for the specification of a related parameter set, for example
Motor set-up or PID control. The Start-up assistant activates the assistants one after
the other. You may also use the assistants independently. For more information on
the tasks of the assistants, see section Start-up assistant on page 115.
In the Assistants mode, you can:
• use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters
How to use an assistant

The table below shows the basic operation sequence which leads you through
assistants. The Motor set-up assistant is used as an example.
Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on LOC ASSISTANTS 1
ENTER
the menu keys and , and pressing . Start-up assistant
Motor Set-up
Application
Speed control EXT1
Speed control EXT2
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select the assistant keys and , and press LOC PAR EDIT
SEL
.
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
If you select any other assistant than the Start-up
assistant, it guides you through the task of specification 200 V
of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. and 5. below.
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
After that you can select another assistant on the
Assistants menu or exit the Assistants mode. The Motor
set-up assistant is used here as an example.
If you select the Start-up assistant, it activates the first LOC CHOICE
assistant, which guides you through the task of Do you want to
specification of its parameter set as shown in steps 4. continue with
application setup?
and 5. below. The Start-up assistant then asks if you Continue
want to continue with the next assistant or skip it – select Skip
the appropriate answer with keys and , and EXIT 00:00 OK
SEL
press . If you choose to skip, the Start-up assistant
asks the same question about the next assistant, and so
on.

92 Control panels
Step Action Display

4. • To specify a new value, press keys and . LOC PAR EDIT
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT
240 V
EXIT 00:00 SAVE
• To ask for information on the requested parameter, LOC HELP
press key ? . Scroll the help text with keys and Set as given on the
EXIT motor nameplate.
. Close the help by pressing .
Voltage value must
correspond to motor
D/Y connection.
EXIT 00:00
5. • To accept the new value and continue to the setting of LOC PAR EDIT
SAVE
the next parameter, press .
EXIT 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
• To stop the assistant, press .
1.2 A
EXIT 00:00 SAVE

Control panels 93
 Changed parameters mode

In the Changed parameters mode, you can:
• view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default
values
• change these parameters
How to view and edit changed parameters

Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Changed parameters mode by selecting LOC CHANGED PAR
CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys and , 1202 CONST SPEED 1
ENTER 10.0 Hz
and pressing .
1203 CONST SPEED 2
1204 CONST SPEED 3
9902 APPLIC MACRO
EXIT 00:00 EDIT
3. Select the changed parameter on the list with keys LOC PAR EDIT
and . The value of the selected parameter is shown
EDIT 1202 CONST SPEED 1
below it. Press to modify the value.
10.0 Hz
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
4. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys LOC PAR EDIT
and .
1202 CONST SPEED 1
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. 15.0 Hz
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed
SAVE
5. • To accept the new value, press . If the new value LOC CHANGED PAR
is the default value, the parameter is removed from the 1202 CONST SPEED 1
list of changed parameters. 15.0 Hz
1203 CONST SPEED 2
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press 1204 CONST SPEED 3
CANCEL 9902 APPLIC MACRO
.
EXIT 00:00 EDIT

94 Control panels
 Fault logger mode

In the Fault logger mode, you can:
• view the drive fault history of maximum ten faults (after a power off, only the three
latest faults are kept in the memory)
• see the details of the three latest faults (after a power off, the details of only the
most recent fault is kept in the memory)
• read the help text for the fault
How to view faults

Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Fault logger mode by selecting FAULT LOC FAULT LOGGER 1
LOGGER on the menu with keys and , and 10: PANEL LOSS
ENTER 19.03.05 13:04:57
pressing . The display shows the fault log starting
6: DC UNDERVOLT
with the latest fault. 7: AI1 LOSS
The number on the row is the fault code according to
EXIT 00:00 DETAIL
which the causes and corrective actions are listed in
chapter Fault tracing on page 311.
3. To see the details of a fault, select it with keys and LOC PANEL LOSS
DETAIL
, and press . FAULT
10
FAULT TIME 1
13:04:57
FAULT TIME 2
EXIT 00:00 DIAG
DIAG
4. To show the help text, press . Scroll the help text with LOC DIAGNOSTICS
keys and . Check: comm lines
OK and connections,
After reading the help, press to return to the parameter 3002,
previous display. parameters in groups
10 and 11.
EXIT 00:00 OK

Control panels 95
 Time and date mode

In the Time and date mode, you can:
• show or hide the clock
• change date and time display formats
• set the date and time
• enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving
changes
The Assistant control panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock
when the panel is not powered by the drive.
How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time
and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes
Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Time and date mode by selecting TIME & LOC TIME & DATE 1
DATE on the menu with keys and , and CLOCK VISIBILITY
ENTER TIME FORMAT
pressing .
DATE FORMAT
SET TIME
SET DATE
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. • To show (hide) the clock, select CLOCK VISIBLILITY LOC CLOCK VISIB 1
SEL
on the menu, press , select Show clock (Hide Show clock
SEL Hide clock
clock) and press , or, if you want to return to the
EXIT
previous display without making changes, press .
EXIT 00:00 SEL

• To specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on LOC DATE FORMAT 1
SEL
the menu, press and select a suitable format. dd.mm.yy
OK CANCEL mm/dd/yy
Press to save or to cancel your changes.
dd.mm.yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To specify the time format, select TIME FORMAT on LOC TIME FORMAT 1
SEL
the menu, press and select a suitable format. 24-hour
OK CANCEL 12-hour
Press to save or to cancel your changes.
CANCEL 00:00 SEL

96 Control panels
Step Action Display

• To set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and LOC SET TIME
SEL
press . Specify the hours with keys and
OK
, and press .Then specify the minutes. Press
OK
to save or
CANCEL
to cancel your changes. 15:41
CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and LOC SET DATE
SEL
press . Specify the first part of the date (day or
month depending on the selected date format) with
keys and , and press
OK
. Repeat for the 19.03.05
OK
second part. After specifying the year, press . To
CANCEL
cancel your changes, press . CANCEL 00:00 OK
• To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions LOC DAYLIGHT SAV 1
according to the daylight saving changes, select Off
SEL EU
DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press .
US
Pressing ? opens the help that shows the beginning Australia1:NSW,Vict..
and end dates of the period during which daylight Australia2:Tasmania..
EXIT 00:00 SEL
saving time is used in each country or area whose
daylight saving changes you can select to be followed. LOC HELP
EU:
• To disable automatic clock transitions according to On: Mar last Sunday
the daylight saving changes, select Off and press Off: Oct last Sunday
SEL
. US:
• To enable automatic clock transitions, select the EXIT 00:00
country or area whose daylight saving changes are
SEL
followed and press .
• To return to the previous display without making
EXIT
changes, press .

Control panels 97
 Parameter backup mode

The Parameter backup mode is used to export parameters from one drive to another
or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading to the panel stores all drive
parameters, including up to two user sets, to the Assistant control panel. The full set,
partial parameter set (application) and user sets can then be downloaded from the
control panel to another drive or the same drive. Uploading and downloading can be
performed in local control.
The control panel memory is non-volatile and does not depend on the panel battery.
In the Parameter backup mode, you can:
• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel (UPLOAD TO PANEL).
This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not adjustable by
the user) parameters.
• View the information about the backup stored to the control panel with UPLOAD
TO PANEL (BACKUP INFO). This includes eg the type and rating of the drive
where the backup was made. It is useful to check this information when you are
going to copy the parameters to another drive with DOWNLOAD FULL SET to
ensure that the drives match.
• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
FULL SET). This writes all parameters, including the internal non-user-adjustable
motor parameters, to the drive. It does not include the user sets of parameters.
Note: Only use this function to restore a drive from a backup or to transfer
parameters to systems that are identical to the original system.
• Copy a partial parameter set (part of the full set) from the control panel to a drive
(DOWNLOAD APPLICATION). The partial set does not include user sets, internal
motor parameters, parameters 9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any group 53
EFB PROTOCOL parameters.
The source and target drives and their motor sizes do not need to be the same.
• Copy user set 1 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SET1). A user set includes group 99 START-UP DATA parameters and the
internal motor parameters.
The function is only shown on the menu when User set 1 has been first saved
using parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO (see section user macros on page 112)
and then uploaded to the control panel with UPLOAD TO PANEL.
• Copy user set 2 parameters from the control panel to the drive (DOWNLOAD
USER SET2). As DOWNLOAD USER SET1 above.
• Start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.

98 Control panels
How to upload and download parameters

For the upload and download functions available, see above. Note that the drive has
to be in local control for uploading and downloading.
Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
you get to the Main menu. – If REM is shown on the
status line, press LOC
REM to switch to local control.
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP LOC PAR BACKUP 1
on the menu with keys and , and pressing UPLOAD TO PANEL
ENTER BACKUP INFO
.
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD APPLICATION
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. • To copy all parameters (including user sets and LOC PAR BACKUP
internal parameters) from the drive to the control Copying parameters
panel, select UPLOAD TO PANEL on the Par backup 50% 50%
SEL
menu with keys and , and press .
During the transfer, the display shows the degree of
ABORT
completion in percent. Press if you want to stop ABORT 00:00
the operation.
After the upload is completed, the display shows a LOC MESSAGE
OK
message about the completion. Press to return to Parameter upload
the Par backup menu. successful
OK 00:00
• To perform downloads, select the appropriate LOC PAR BACKUP
operation (here DOWNLOAD FULL SET is used as an Downloading
example) on the Par backup menu with keys parameters (full
and , and press
SEL
. The display shows the set)
degree of completion in percent. Press
ABORT
if you 50% 50%
want to stop the operation. ABORT 00:00
After the download is completed, the display shows a LOC MESSAGE
OK
message about the completion. Press to return to Parameter download
the Par backup menu. successfully
completed.
OK 00:00

Control panels 99
How to view information about the backup

Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the Par backup mode by selecting PAR BACKUP LOC PAR BACKUP 1
on the menu with keys and , and pressing UPLOAD TO PANEL
ENTER BACKUP INFO
.
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select BACKUP INFO on the Par backup menu with keys LOC BACKUP INFO
SEL
and , and press . The display shows the DRIVE TYPE
following information about the drive where the backup ACS310
3304 DRIVE RATING
was made: 9A74i
DRIVE TYPE: type of the drive 3301 FIRMWARE
EXIT 00:00
DRIVE RATING: rating of the drive in format XXXYZ,
where LOC BACKUP INFO
XXX: Nominal current rating. If ACS310
present, an “A” indicates a decimal 3304 DRIVE RATING
9A74i
point, eg 9A7 means 9.7 A. 3301 FIRMWARE
Y: 2 = 200 V 241A hex
4 = 400 V EXIT 00:00
Z: i = European loading package
n = US loading package
FIRMWARE: firmware version of the drive.
You can scroll the information with keys and .
EXIT
4. Press to return to the Par backup menu. LOC PAR BACKUP 1
UPLOAD TO PANEL
BACKUP INFO
DOWNLOAD FULL SET
DOWNLOAD USER SET1
EXIT 00:00 SEL

100 Control panels
 IO settings mode
In the IO settings mode, you can:
• check the parameter settings related to any I/O terminal
• edit the parameter setting. For example, if “1103: REF1” is listed under Ain1
(Analog input 1), that is, parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT has value AI1, you can
change its value to eg AI2. You cannot, however, set the value of parameter 1106
REF2 SELECT to AI1.
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals

Step Action Display
MENU
EXIT
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT 00:00 ENTER
2. Go to the IO settings mode by selecting IO SETTINGS LOC IO SETTINGS 1
on the menu with keys and , and pressing DIGITAL INPUTS (DI)
ENTER ANALOG INPUTS (AI)
.
RELAY OUTPUTS (ROUT)
ANALOG OUTPUTS (AOUT)
PANEL
EXIT 00:00 SEL
3. Select the I/O group, eg DIGITAL INPUTS, with keys LOC IO SETTINGS
SEL
and , and press . After a brief pause, the -DI1-
display shows the current settings for the selection. 1001:START/STOP (E1)
-DI2-
1001:DIR (E1)
-DI3-
EXIT 00:00
4. Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with LOC PAR EDIT
EDIT
keys and , and press .
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
DI1,2
[2]
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE
5. Specify a new value for the setting with keys and LOC PAR EDIT
.
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster. DI1P,2P
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed [3]
SAVE
6. • To save the new value, press . LOC IO SETTINGS
• To cancel the new value and keep the original, press -DI1-
CANCEL 1001:START PLS (E1)
. -DI2-
1001:STOP PLS (E1)
-DI3-
EXIT 00:00

Application macros 101
10
Application macros
The chapter describes the application macros. For each macro, there is a wiring
diagram showing the default control connections (digital and analog I/O). The chapter
also explains how to save a user macro and how to recall it.
Overview of macros
Application macros are pre-programmed parameter sets. While starting up the drive,
the user typically selects one of the macros - the one that is best suited for the
purpose - with parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO, makes the essential changes and
saves the result as a user macro.
The ACS310 has eight standard macros and two user macros. The table below
contains a summary of the macros and describes suitable applications.
Macro Suitable applications
ABB standard Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant
speeds are used. Start/stop is controlled with one digital input (level start
and stop). It is possible to switch between two acceleration and
deceleration times.
3-wire Ordinary speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant
speeds are used. The drive is started and stopped with push buttons.
Alternate Speed control applications where no, one, two or three constant speeds
are used. Start, stop and direction are controlled by two digital inputs
(combination of the input states determines the operation).
Motor Speed control applications where no or one constant speed is used. The
potentiometer speed is controlled by two digital inputs (increase / decrease / keep
unchanged).
Hand/Auto Speed control applications where switching between two control devices is
needed. Some control signal terminals are reserved for one device, the
rest for the other. One digital input selects between the terminals (devices)
in use.

102 Application macros
Macro Suitable applications

PID control Process control applications, for example different closed loop control
systems such as pressure control, level control and flow control. It is
possible to switch between process and speed control: Some control
signal terminals are reserved for process control, others for speed control.
One digital input selects between process and speed control.
PFC control Pump alternation applications, for example booster stations in buildings.
The pressure in the network is adjusted by changing the speed of the
pump according to the signal received from the pressure transducer and
adding auxiliary pumps directly on-line when needed.
SPFC control Soft PFC control for pump alternation applications where lower pressure
peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started.
User The user can save the customized standard macro, ie the parameter
settings including group 99 START-UP DATA into the permanent memory,
and recall the data at a later time.
For example, two user macros can be used when switching between two
different motors is required.
AC500 MODBUS Application that requires a complex control logic and when several drives
are connected together through a Modbus link. AC500-eCo PLC is used
for controlling and monitoring the system.

Summary of the I/O connections of the application macros

The following table gives the summary of the default I/O connections of all application
macros.
Input/ Macro
output
ABB 3-wire Alternate Motor Hand/ PID PFC AC500
standard potentiom. Auto control control, Moodbus
SPFC
control
AI1 Freq. ref. Freq. ref. Freq. ref. - Freq. ref. Freq. ref. Ext. ref. Freq. ref.
(0…10 V) (Hand) (Hand) / 1 (Hand)
Proc. ref. / Ext. ref.
(PID) 2 (PID/
PFC)
AI2 (0… - - - - Freq. ref. Process Process -
20 mA) (Auto) value value
AO Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output
freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq. freq.
DI1 Stop/ Start Start Stop/Start Stop/ Stop/ Stop/ Stop/
Start (pulse) (fwd) Start Start Start Start
(Hand) (Hand) (Hand)
DI2 Fwd/Rev Stop Start (rev) Fwd/Rev Fwd/Rev Hand/ Hand/ Fwd/Rev
(pulse) (Hand) PID PID,PFC
DI3 Const. Fwd/Rev Const. Freq. ref. Hand/Au Const. Interlock Const.
speed speed up to speed 1 speed
input 1 input 1 input 1
DI4 Const. Const. Const. Freq. ref. Fwd/Rev Run Interlock Const.
speed speed speed down (Auto) enable speed
input 2 input 1 input 2 input 2
DI5 Ramp Const. Ramp Const. Stop/ Stop/ Stop/ Ramp
pair speed pair speed 1 Start Start Start pair
selection input 2 selection (Auto) (PID) (PID/ selection
PFC)
RO Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) PFC Fault (-1)
DO Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) Fault (-1) PFC Fault (-1)
control:
Fault (-1)
SPFC
control:
PFC

ABB standard macro

This is the default macro. It provides a general purpose I/O configuration with three
constant speeds. Parameter values are the default values given in section All
parameters on page 177.
If you use other than the default connections presented below, see section I/O
terminals on page 49.
 Default I/O connections

X1A
1…10 kohm
3)
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) 2)

3-wire macro
This macro is used when the drive is controlled using momentary push-buttons. It
provides three constant speeds. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter
9902 APPLIC MACRO to 2 (3-WIRE).
For the parameter default values, see section Default values with different macros on
page 165. If you use other than the default connections presented below, see section
I/O terminals on page 49.
Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input), the control panel start and
stop buttons are disabled.

X1A
1…10 kohm
2)
12 DI1 Start (pulse )
13 DI2 Stop (pulse )
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) 2)
See parameter group 12 CONSTANT 360 degree grounding under a clamp.
SPEEDS: Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).
DI3 DI4 Operation (parameter)
0 0 Set speed through AI1

Alternate macro
This macro provides an I/O configuration adapted to a sequence of DI control signals
used when alternating the rotation direction of the motor. To enable the macro, set the
value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 3 (ALTERNATE).

X1A
1…10 kohm
3)
12 DI1 Start forward: If DI1 = DI2, the drive stops.
13 DI2 Start reverse
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) 2)

Motor potentiometer macro

This macro provides a cost-effective interface for PLCs that vary the speed (output
frequency) of the motor using only digital signals. To enable the macro, set the value
of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 4 (MOTOR POT).

X1A
2)
14 DI3 Output frequency reference up 1)
15 DI4 Output frequency reference down 1)
16 DI5 Constant speed 1: parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1)
If DI3 and DI4 are both active or inactive, the 2) 360 degree grounding under a clamp.
output frequency reference is unchanged. Tightening torque: 0.4 N·m (3.5 lbf·in).
The existing output frequency reference is
stored during stop and power down.

Hand/Auto macro
This macro can be used when switching between two external control devices is
needed. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to
5 (HAND/AUTO).
Note: Parameter 2108 START INHIBIT must remain in the default setting 0 (OFF).

X1A
2 AI1 Output frequency reference (Hand): 0…10 V
1…10 kohm
5 AI2 Output frequency reference (Auto): 0…20 mA 2)
max. 500 ohm
1)
12 DI1 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Hand)
13 DI2 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Hand)
14 DI3 Hand (0) / Auto (1) control selection
15 DI4 Forward (0) / Reverse (1) (Auto)
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (Auto)
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) 2)
360 degree grounding under a clamp. The signal source must be powered
externally. See the manufacturer’s
instructions. An example of a connection
using a two-wire sensor is given on page 51.

PID control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for closed-loop control systems such as
pressure control, flow control, etc. Control can also be switched to speed control
using a digital input. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO to 6 (PID CONTROL).

X1A
2 AI1 Output freq. ref. (Hand) / Process ref. (PID): 0…10 V 1)
1…10 kohm
5 AI2 Process actual value: 4…20 mA 3)
max. 500 ohm
2)
13 DI2 Hand (0) / PID (1) control selection)
14 DI3 Constant speed 1: parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1
15 DI4 Run enable
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (PID)
X1B
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) Hand: 0…10 V -> output freq. reference. 3) The signal source must be powered
PID: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint. externally. See the manufacturer’s
2) 360 degree grounding under a clamp. instructions. An example of a connection

PFC control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (PFC) applications.
To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 7 (PFC
CONTROL).

X1A
2 AI1 Ext. ref. 1 (Hand) / Ext. ref. 2 (PID/PFC): 0…10 V 1)
1…10 kohm
2)
13 DI2 Hand (0) / PID/PFC (1) control selection
14 DI3 Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive
15 DI4 Interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (PID/PFC)
X1B
18 RONC PFC
19 RONO
22 DOGND
1) Hand: 0…10 V -> 0…50 Hz. 3) The signal source must be powered
PID/PFC: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint. externally. See the manufacturer’s

SPFC control macro

This macro provides parameter settings for pump and fan control (SPFC) applications
with a soft start function. To enable the macro, set the value of parameter 9902
APPLIC MACRO to 15 (SPFC CONTROL).

X1A
2 AI1 Ext. ref. 1 (Hand) / Ext. ref. 2 (PID/PFC): 0…10 V 1)
1…10 kohm
2)
13 DI2 Hand (0) / PID/PFC (1) control selection
14 DI3 Interlock: Deactivation always stops the drive
15 DI4 Interlock: Deactivation stops constant speed motor
16 DI5 Stop (0) / Start (1) (PID/PFC)
X1B
18 RONC PFC
19 RONO
21 DOOUT PFC
22 DOGND
1) Hand: 0…10 V -> 0…50 Hz. 3) The signal source must be powered
PID/PFC: 0…10 V -> 0…100% PID setpoint. externally. See the manufacturer’s

User macros
In addition to the standard application macros, it is possible to create two user
macros. The user macro allows the user to save the parameter settings, including
group 99 START-UP DATA, into the permanent memory and recall the data at a later
time. The panel reference is also saved if the macro is saved and loaded in local
control. The remote control setting is saved into the user macro, but the local control
setting is not.
The steps below show how to create and recall User macro 1. The procedure for the
User macro 2 is identical, only the parameter 9902 values are different.
To create User macro 1:
• Adjust the parameters.
• Save the parameter settings to the permanent memory by changing parameter
9902 to -1 (USER S1 SAVE).
MENU
SAVE ENTER
• Press (Assistant control panel) or (Basic control panel) to save.
To recall User macro 1:

• Change parameter 9902 to 0 (USER S1 LOAD).
MENU
SAVE ENTER
• Press (Assistant control panel) or (Basic control panel) to load.
The user macro can also be switched through digital inputs (see parameter 1605).
Note: User macro load restores the parameter settings, including group 99 START-
UP DATA. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used.
Hint: The user can for example switch the drive between two motors without having
to adjust the motor parameters every time the motor is changed. The user needs only
to adjust the settings once for each motor and then to save the data as two user
macros. When the motor is changed, only the corresponding user macro needs to be
loaded, and the drive is ready to operate.

AC500 Modbus macro

The AC500 Modbus application macro configures the ACS310 drive communication
and control parameters. The macro is available in ACS310 drives with firmware
manual version 4.050 or later. To activate the macro, set parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO to AC500 MODBUS.
AC500-eCo PLC
Modbus
Drive
Other
devices
FMBA-01
Drive
RS-485
I/O terminals 23...26
Data flow
Control word (CW)
References
Process I/O (cyclic)
Status word (SW)
Actual values
Parameter R/W Service messages
requests/responses (acyclic)
The AC500 Modbus application macro default values for the drive parameters
correspond to the ABB standard macro (parameter 9902, value 1 (ABB STANDARD),
see section ABB standard macro on page 104), with the following differences:
Parameter Default value
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 10 (COMM)
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 8 (COMM)
1103 REF1 SELECT 8 (COMM)
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 (COMM)
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL 0 (NOT SEL)
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 1 (FAULT)
5302 EFB STATION ID 2
5303 EFB BAUD RATE 192 (19.2 kbit/s)

Parameter Default value

5304 EFB PARITY 1 (8 NONE 1)
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 2 (ABB DRV FULL)
5310 EFB PAR 10 101
5311 EFB PAR 11 303
5312 EFB PAR 12 305
Note: The default slave address of the drive is 2 (parameter 5302 EFB STATION ID),
but if several drives are used, the address must be unique for each drive.

Program features 115
11
Program features
The chapter describes program features. For each feature, there is a list of related
user settings, actual signals, and fault and alarm messages.
Start-up assistant
 Introduction
The Start-up assistant (requires the Assistant control panel) guides the user through
the start-up procedure, helping to enter the requested data (parameter values) to the
drive. The Start-up assistant also checks that the entered values are valid, ie within
the allowed range.
The Start-up assistant calls other assistants, each of which guides the user through
the task of specifying a related parameter set. At the first start, the drive suggests
entering the first task, Language select, automatically. The user may activate the
tasks either one after the other as the Start-up assistant suggests, or independently.
The user may also adjust the drive parameters in the conventional way without using
the assistant at all.
See section Assistants mode on page 91 for how to start the Start-up assistant or
other assistants.

116 Program features
 Default order of the tasks

Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO), the Start-up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests. The
default tasks are shown in the table below.
Application selection Default tasks
ABB STANDARD Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
control EXT1, Speed control EXT2, Start/Stop control, Timed
functions, Protections, Output signals
3-WIRE Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
ALTERNATE Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
MOTOR POT Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
HAND/AUTO Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
PID CONTROL Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, PID
control, Speed control EXT2, Start/Stop control, Timed functions,
Protections, Output signals
PFC CONTROL Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
SPFC CONTROL Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed
AC500 MODBUS Language select, Motor set-up, Application, Option modules, Speed

 List of the tasks and the relevant drive parameters

Depending on the selection made in the Application task (parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO), the Start-up assistant decides which consequent tasks it suggests.
Name Description Set parameters
Language select Selecting the language 9901
Motor set-up Setting the motor data 9905…9909
Application Selecting the application macro 9902, parameters
associated to the macro
Option modules Activating the option modules Group 35 MOTOR TEMP
MEAS, group 52 PANEL
COMM
9802
Speed control EXT1 Selecting the source for the speed (output 1103
frequency) reference
(If AI1 is used: Setting analog input AI1 (1301…1303, 3001)
limits, scale, inversion)
Setting the reference limits 1104, 1105
Setting the frequency limits 2007, 2008
Setting the acceleration and deceleration 2202, 2203
times
Speed control EXT2 Selecting the source for the speed (output 1106
frequency) reference
PID control Selecting the source for the process 1106
reference
Setting the speed (reference) limits 2007, 2008
Setting the source and limits for the 4016, 4018, 4019
process actual value
Start/Stop control Selecting the source for start and stop 1001, 1002
signals of the two external control
locations, EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting between EXT1 and EXT2 1102
Defining the direction control 1003
Defining the start and stop modes 2101…2103
Selecting the use of Run Enable signal 1601
Protections Setting the current limits 2003

Name Description Set parameters

Output signals Output signals Selecting the signals Group 14 RELAY
indicated through relay output RO1 and, if OUTPUTS
the MREL relay output extension module is
in use, RO2…RO4.
Selecting the signals indicated through Group 15 ANALOG
analog output AO OUTPUTS
Setting the minimum, maximum, scaling
and inversion
Timed functions Setting the timed functions Group 36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS
Selecting the timed start/stop control for 1001, 1002
external control locations EXT1 and EXT2
Selecting timed EXT1/EXT2 control 1102
Activation of timed constant speed 1 1201
Selecting timed function status indicated 1401…1403, 1410
through relay output RO1 or, if the MREL
relay output extension module is in use,
RO2…RO4
Selecting timed PID1 parameter set 1/2 4027
control
Selection between different internal 4039
(constant) set points for the process PID
control (PID1 parameter set 1)
Selection between different internal 4139
(constant) set points for the process PID
control (PID1 parameter set 2)
Selecting timed Autochange control 8126

 Contents of the assistant displays

There are two types of displays in the Start-up assistant: Main displays and
information displays. The main displays prompt the user to feed in information. The
assistant steps through the main displays. The information displays contain help texts
for the main displays. The figure below shows a typical example of both and
explanations of the contents.
Main display Information display
REM PAR EDIT LOC HELP

Set exactly as given
1 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT on the motor
2 220 V nameplate
If connected to
multiple motors
CANCEL 00:00 SAVE EXIT 00:00
1 Parameter Help text …

2 Feed-in field … help text continued
Local control vs. external control

The drive can receive start, stop and direction commands and reference values from
the control panel or through digital and analog inputs. Embedded fieldbus enables
control over an open fieldbus link. A PC equipped with the DriveWindow Light PC tool
can also control the drive.
Local control Drive External control
RS-232
Embedded fieldbus
(Modbus RTU*)
Control panel
or EIA-485
PC tool
Standard I/O
*With SREA Ethernet adapter module it is possible to use Modbus TCP/IP with
the Ethernet. For more information, see SREA-01 Ethernet adapter module
user’s manual (3AUA0000042896 [English]).

 Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad when the drive is in
local control. LOC indicates local control on the panel display.
Assistant control panel Basic control panel
LOC 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
491
LOC
0.5 A . Hz
10.7 % OUTPUT FWD

DIR 00:00 MENU
The control panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in
local control.
 External control
When the drive is in external (remote) control, the commands are given through the
standard I/O terminals (digital and analog inputs) and/or the fieldbus interface. In
addition, it is also possible to set the control panel as the source for the external
control.
External control is indicated with REM on the panel display.
Assistant control panel Basic control panel
REM 49.1Hz
49.1 Hz
0.5 A
10.7 %
REM
OUTPUT
491
. FWD
Hz
DIR 00:00 MENU
The user can connect the control signals to two external control locations, EXT1 or
EXT2. Depending on the user selection, either one is active at a time. This function
operates on a 2 ms time level.
 Settings
Panel key Additional information
LOC/REM Selection between local and external (remote) control
Parameter
1102 Selection between EXT1 and EXT2
1001/1002 Start, stop, direction source for EXT1/EXT2
1103/1106 Reference source for EXT1/EXT2

 Diagnostics
Actual signals Additional information
0111/0112 EXT1/EXT2 reference
 Block diagram: Start, stop, direction source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for start, stop, and
direction for external control location EXT1.
DI1 Select
DI1
DI5 EXT1
DI5 Start/stop/
direction
Fieldbus selection
See chapter COMM
Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with
the embedded 1001
fieldbus on page
KEYPAD
Control panel
TIMED FUNC 1…4
Timed function
 Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1

The figure below shows the parameters that select the interface for the speed
reference of external control location EXT1.
Select
AI1 AI1, AI2, DI3, DI4, DI5
AI2 EXT1
DI3 Reference
REF1
DI4 Fieldbus selection (Hz/rpm)
DI5 See chapter COMM
Embedded fieldbus Fieldbus control with
the embedded 1103
fieldbus on page
FREQ INPUT
Frequency input
KEYPAD
Control panel

Reference types and processing

The drive can accept a variety of references in addition to the conventional analog
input and control panel signals.
• The drive reference can be given with two digital inputs: One digital input
increases the speed, the other decreases it.
• The drive can form a reference out of two analog input signals by using
mathematical functions: addition, subtraction, multiplication and division.
• The drive can form a reference out of an analog input signal and a signal received
through a serial communication interface by using mathematical functions:
addition and multiplication.
• The drive reference can be given with frequency input.
It is possible to scale the external reference so that the signal minimum and
maximum values correspond to a speed other than the minimum and maximum
speed limits.
 Settings
Parameter Additional information
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT External reference source, type and scaling
Group 20 LIMITS Operating limits
Group 22 ACCEL/DECEL Speed reference acceleration/deceleration ramps
Group 32 SUPERVISION Reference supervision
 Diagnostics
Actual signal Additional information
0111/0112 REF1/REF2 reference
Group 03 FB ACTUAL SIGNALS References in different stages of the reference
processing chain

Reference trimming
In reference trimming, the external reference is corrected depending on the
measured value of a secondary application variable. The block diagram below
illustrates the function.
Switch 2) Select
1105 REF1 MAX / 2 (DIRECT)
1108 REF2 MAX 2)
REF1 1
(Hz/rpm) / (PROPORTION
max. freq
REF2 (%)1) AL)
REF1 (Hz/rpm) /
SEL) Add
0 0 (NOT REF2 (%)1) REF’
4230 Mul. Mul.
Switch 4231 TRIM SCALE
PID2 ref PID2

PID2
PID2 act output
4232 CORRECTION SRC
REF1 (Hz/rpm) / REF2 (%) = The drive reference before trimming

REF’ = The drive reference after trimming
max. freq = par. 2008 (or 2007 if the absolute value is greater)
PID2 ref = par. 4210
PID2 act = par. 4214…4221
1)
REF1 or REF2 depending on which is active. See parameter 1102.
2) When par. 4232 = PID2REF, the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter
1105 when REF1 is active and by parameter 1108 when REF2 is active.
When par. 4232 = PID2OUTPUT, the maximum trimming reference is defined by parameter
2008 value.
 Settings
1102 REF1/2 selection
4230 …4232 Trimming function settings
4201 …4229 PID control settings
Group 20 LIMITS Drive operation limits

 Example
The drive runs a conveyor line. It is speed controlled but the line tension also needs
to be taken into account: If the measured tension exceeds the tension setpoint, the
speed is slightly decreased, and vice versa.
To accomplish the desired speed correction, the user
• activates the trimming function and connects the tension setpoint and the
measured tension to it.
• tunes the trimming to a suitable level.
Speed controlled conveyor line
Drive rollers (pull)

Tension measurement
Simplified block diagram

Add
Output frequency
reference Trimmed output
PID frequency reference
Tension
measurement
Tension
setpoint
Programmable analog inputs

The drive has two programmable analog voltage/current inputs. The inputs can be
inverted, filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The update
cycle for the analog input is 8 ms (12 ms cycle once per second). The cycle time is
shorter when information is transferred to the application program (8 ms -> 2 ms).
 Settings
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT AI as reference source
Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input processing
3001, 3021, 3022, 3107 AI loss supervision
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AI in motor temperature measurement
Groups 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 AI as PID process control reference or actual value
…42 EXT / TRIM PID source
Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION AI as pump protection measurement source

 Diagnostics
0120, 0121 Analog input values
1401 AI1/A2 signal loss
Alarm
AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS AI1/AI2 signal below limit 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT /
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT
Fault
AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS AI1/AI2 signal below limit 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT /
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT
PAR AI SCALE Incorrect AI signal scaling (1302 < 1301 or 1305 <
1304)
Programmable analog output

One programmable current output (0…20 mA) is available. Analog output signal can
be inverted, filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The
analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed, output frequency, output
current, motor torque, motor power, etc. The update cycle for the analog output is
2 ms.
It is also possible to write a value to an analog output through a serial communication
link.
 Settings
Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS AO value selection and processing
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS AO in motor temperature measurement
 Diagnostics
0124 AO value
Fault
PAR AO SCALE Incorrect AO signal scaling (1503 < 1502)

Programmable digital inputs

The drive has five programmable digital inputs. The update time for the digital inputs
is 2 ms.
It is possible to delay the state change of digital inputs with delays defined in group
18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT. This enables very simple program sequences by
connecting several functions with the same physical wire, eg to remove branches and
leaves from a pipe by running the fan in reverse before normal operation.
One digital input (DI5) can be programmed as a frequency input. See section
Frequency input on page 127.
 Settings
Group 10 START/STOP/DIR DI as start, stop, direction
Group 11 REFERENCE SELECT DI in reference selection, or reference source
Group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS DI in constant speed selection
Group 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS DI as external Run enable, fault reset or user macro
change signal
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Delays in DI state changes
2109 DI as external emergency stop command source
2115 DI as source for controlling motor heating
2201 DI as acceleration and deceleration ramp selection
signal
2209 DI as zero ramp force signal
3003 DI as external fault source
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS DI in motor temperature measurement
3601 DI as timed function enable signal source
3622 DI as booster activation signal source
4010/4110/4210 DI as PID controller reference signal source
4022/4122 DI as sleep function activation signal in PID1
4027 DI as PID1 parameter set 1/2 selection signal source
4034/4035 DI as PID reference/output freezing source
4039/4139 DI as PID internal setpoint selection source
4228 DI as external PID2 function activation signal source
4406/4414 DI as connection signal source for pump inlet/outlet
pressure switch
4421 DI as pipe fill enable source
4601 DI as pump clean trigger source
6403 DI as load analyzer logger reset source
8120 DI as PFC interlock source

 Diagnostics
0160 DI status
0414 DI status at the time the latest fault occurred
Programmable relay output

The drive has one programmable relay output. It is possible to add three additional
relay outputs with the optional MREL relay output extension module. For more
information, see MREL-01 relay output extension module user's manual
(3AUA0000035974 [English]).
With a parameter setting it is possible to choose what information to indicate through
the relay output: Ready, running, fault, alarm, etc. The update time for the relay
output is 2 ms.
A value can be written to a relay output through a serial communication link.
 Settings
Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS RO value selections and operation times
 Diagnostics
0134 RO Control word through fieldbus control
0162 RO 1 status
0173 RO 2…4 status. With option MREL-01 only.
Frequency input
Digital input DI5 can be programmed as a frequency input. Frequency input
(0…16000 Hz) can be used as external reference signal source. The update time for
the frequency input is 50 ms. Update time is shorter when information is transferred
to the application program (50 ms -> 2 ms).
 Settings
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Frequency input minimum and maximum values and
filtering
1103/1106 External reference REF1/2 through frequency input
4010, 4110, 4210 Frequency input as PID reference source

 Diagnostics
0161 Frequency input value
Transistor output
The drive has one programmable transistor output. The output can be used either as
a digital output or frequency output (0…16000 Hz). The update time for the
transistor/frequency output is 2 ms.
 Settings
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Transistor output settings
 Diagnostics
0163 Transistor output status
0164 Transistor output frequency
Actual signals
Several actual signals are available:
• Drive output frequency, current, voltage and power
• Motor speed and torque
• Intermediate circuit DC voltage
• Active control location (LOCAL, EXT1 or EXT2)
• Reference values
• Drive temperature
• Operating time counter (h), kWh counter
• Digital I/O and analog I/O status
• PID controller actual values.
Three signals can be shown simultaneously on the assistant control panel display
(one signal on the basic control panel display). It is also possible to read the values
through the serial communication link or through the analog outputs.
 Settings
1501 Selection of an actual signal to AO
1808 Selection of an actual signal to frequency output
Group 32 SUPERVISION Actual signal supervision


Group 34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of an actual signals to be displayed on the
control panel
 Diagnostics
Groups 01 OPERATING DATA … Lists of actual signals
04 FAULT HISTORY
Power loss ride-through

If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive continues to operate by utilizing the
kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive is fully operational as long as the motor
rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the operation after
the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Uinput power
TM fout UDC
(N·m) (Hz) (Vdc) UDC
160 80 520
120 60 390
fout
80 40 260
TM
40 20 130
0 0 0
t (s)
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4
UDC = Intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = Output frequency of the drive,
TM = Motor torque
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops
to the minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the input power is
switched off. The drive runs the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is
operational as long as the motor has enough kinetic energy.
 Settings
Parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL

DC magnetizing
When DC magnetizing is activated, the drive automatically magnetizes the motor
before starting. This feature guarantees the highest possible break-away torque, up
to 180% of the nominal motor torque. The Automatic start feature and DC
magnetizing cannot be activated at the same time.
 Settings
Parameters 2101 START FUNCTION and 2103 DC MAGN TIME
Maintenance trigger
A maintenance trigger can be activated to show a notice on the panel display when
eg drive power consumption has exceeded the defined trigger point.
 Settings
Parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG
Acceleration and deceleration ramps

Two user-selectable acceleration and Motor speed
deceleration ramps are available. It is possible to
Linear
adjust the acceleration/deceleration times and
the ramp shape. Switching between the two
ramps can be controlled through a digital input or
fieldbus. S-curve
The available ramp shape alternatives are
Linear and S-curve.
t (s)
Linear: Suitable for drives requiring steady or 2
slow acceleration/deceleration.
S-curve: Ideal for conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where a
smooth transition is required when changing the speed.
 Settings
Parameter group 22 ACCEL/DECEL

Motor heating function

With the motor heating function, DC current can be injected into the motor to keep it
warm in low temperatures. The function can be enabled with parameter 2104 DC
HOLD CTL. The source to activated the function is selected with parameter 2115
MOT. HEATING SEL.
Parameter 1805 DO SIGNAL and the relay outputs 1...4 (parameters 1401...1403
and 1410) can be used to indicate the status of motor heating.
 Settings
2104 DC HOLD CTL Activates the motor heating feature
2114 HEATING CURR REF [%] A percentage of nominal current that is to be dc injected
into the motor windings.
2115 MOT. HEATING SEL Defines the input that turns On/Off motor heating.
 Diagnostics
Alarm Additional information
20381) MOTOR HEATING Motor heating active
Critical speeds
Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid
certain motor speeds (drive output frequencies) or speed bands (output frequency
bands) because of eg mechanical resonance problems. The user can define three
critical frequencies or frequency bands.
 Settings
Parameter group 25 CRITICAL SPEEDS
Constant speeds
It is possible to define seven positive constant speeds. Constant speeds are selected
with digital inputs. Constant speed activation overrides the external speed reference.
Constant speed selections are ignored if
• PID reference is being followed, or
• drive is in the local control mode.
This function operates on a 2 ms time level.
 Settings
Parameter group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS

Constant speed 7 (1208 CONST SPEED 7) is also used for fault functions. See
parameter group 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS.

Custom U/f ratio

The user can define a U/f curve (output voltage as a function of frequency). This
custom ratio is used only in special applications where linear and squared U/f ratio
are not sufficient (eg when motor break-away torque needs to be boosted).
Voltage (V) Custom U/f ratio
Par. 2618
Par. 2616
Par. 2614
Par. 2612
Par. 2610
Par. 2603
f (Hz)
Par. 2611 Par. 2613 Par. 2615 Par. 2617 Par. 9907
Note: The voltage and the frequency points of the U/f curve must fulfill the following
requirements:
2610 < 2612 < 2614 < 2616 < 2618 and
2611 < 2613 < 2615 < 2617 < 9907
WARNING! High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance or

motor damage (overheating).
 Settings
2605 Custom U/f ratio activation
2610…2618 Custom U/f ratio settings
 Diagnostics
Fault Additional information
PAR USER DEFINED U/F Incorrect U/f ratio

IR compensation
When IR compensation is activated, the drive Motor voltage
gives an extra voltage boost to the motor at low
speeds. IR compensation is useful in IR compensation
applications that require high break-away torque.
 Settings
No compensation
Parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT
f (Hz)
Programmable protection functions

 AI<Min
AI<Min function defines the drive operation if an analog input signal falls below the
set minimum limit.
Settings
Parameters 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT
LIMIT
 Panel loss
Panel loss function defines the operation of the drive if the control panel selected as
the control location for the drive stops communicating.
Settings
Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR
 External fault
External faults (1 and 2) can be supervised by defining one digital input as a source
for an external fault indication signal.
Settings
Parameters 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 and 3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2
 Stall protection
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (frequency, time) and choose how the drive reacts to the motor stall condition
(alarm indication / fault indication & drive stop / no reaction).
Settings
Parameters 3010 STALL FUNCTION…3012 STALL TIME

 Motor thermal protection

The motor can be protected against overheating by activating the Motor thermal
protection function.
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1. The motor is in the ambient temperature of 30 °C when power is applied to the
drive.
2. Motor temperature is calculated using either the user-adjustable or automatically
calculated motor thermal time constant and motor load curve (see the figures
below). The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient temperature
exceeds 30 °C.
Motor
load
100% Output current relative (%) to
motor nom. current
150
Break point
t
Motor load curve
Temp. P 3007 100 =
rise 127%
100%
P 3008 50
63% Zero speed load
t f
P 3009
}
Motor thermal time constant
Settings
Parameters 3005 MOT THERM PROT…3009 BREAK POINT FREQ
Note: It is also possible to use the motor temperature measurement function. See
section Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O on page 145.
 Earth fault protection

The Earth fault protection detects earth faults in the motor or motor cable. The
protection is active only during start.
An earth fault in the input power line does not activate the protection.
Settings
Parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT
 Incorrect wiring
Defines the operation when incorrect input power cable connection is detected.

Settings
Parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT
 Input phase loss

Input phase loss protection circuits supervise the input power cable connection status
by detecting intermediate circuit ripple. If a phase is lost, the ripple increases.
Settings
Parameter 3016 SUPPLY PHASE
Pre-programmed faults
 Overcurrent
The overcurrent trip limit for the drive is 325% of the drive nominal current.
 DC overvoltage
The DC overvoltage trip limit is 420 V (for 200 V drives) and 840 V (for 400 V drives).
 DC undervoltage
The DC undervoltage trip limit is adaptive. See parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL.
 Drive temperature
The drive supervises the IGBT temperature. There are two supervision limits: Alarm
limit and fault trip limit.
 Short circuit
If a short circuit occurs, the drive does not start and a fault indication is given.
 Internal fault
If the drive detects an internal fault, the drive is stopped and a fault indication is given.
Operation limits
The drive has adjustable limits for output frequency, current (maximum) and DC
voltage.
 Settings
Parameter group 20 LIMITS

Power limit
Power limitation is used to protect the input bridge and the DC intermediate circuit.
If the maximum allowed power is exceeded, the drive torque is automatically limited.
Maximum overload and continuous power limits depend on the drive hardware.
For specific values, see chapter Technical data on page 335.
Automatic resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage,
external and “analog input below a minimum” faults. The Automatic resets must be
activated by the user.
 Settings
Group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET Automatic reset settings
 Diagnostics
AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm
Supervisions
The drive monitors whether certain user selectable variables are within the user-
defined limits. The user may set limits for speed, current etc. The supervision status
can be indicated through relay or digital output.
The supervision function outputs can be used for triggering some drive functionality
(start/stop, sleep, pump cleaning).
The supervision functions operate on a 2 ms time level.
 Settings
Parameter group 32 SUPERVISION
 Diagnostics
1001/1002 EXT1/EXT2 start/stop according to supervision functions
1401 Supervision status through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 Supervision status through RO 2…4. With option
MREL-01 only.
1805 Supervision status through DO
4022/4122 Sleep start according to supervision functions
4601 Pump clean trigger according to supervision functions

Parameter lock
The user can prevent parameter adjustment by activating the parameter lock.
 Settings
Parameters 1602 PARAMETER LOCK and 1603 PASS CODE
PID control
There are two built-in PID controllers in the drive:
• Process PID (PID1) and
• External/Trim PID (PID2).
The PID controller can be used when the motor speed needs to be controlled based
on process variables such as pressure, flow or temperature.
When the PID control is activated, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the
drive instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also
brought back to the drive. The drive compares the reference and the actual values,
and automatically adjusts the drive speed in order to keep the measured process
quantity (actual value) at the desired level (reference).
The control operates on a 2 ms time level.
 Process controller PID1

PID1 has two separate sets of parameters (40 PROCESS PID SET 1, 41 PROCESS
PID SET 2). Selection between parameter sets 1 and 2 is defined by a parameter.
In most cases when there is only one transducer signal wired to the drive, only
parameter set 1 is needed. Two different parameter sets (1 and 2) are used eg when
the load of the motor changes considerably in time.
 External/Trim controller PID2

PID2 (42 EXT / TRIM PID) can be used in two different ways:
• External controller: Instead of using additional PID controller hardware, the user
can connect PID2 output through drive analog output or fieldbus controller to
control a field instrument like a damper or a valve.
• Trim controller: PID2 can be used to trim or fine tune the reference of the drive.
See section Reference trimming on page 123.

 Block diagrams
The figure below shows an application example: The controller adjusts the speed of a
pressure boost pump according to the measured pressure and the set pressure
reference.
Example: PID control block diagram

Pressure boost pump
PID
A C S 6 0 0
%ref ref
Drive 4001 k
4002 ti
A C T P A R F U N C D R IV E
E N T E R
L O C R E S E T R E F
Actual values 4003 td

R E M
4014 i
3
. 4004 dFiltT
Frequency
.. 4005 errVInv
reference
2 0 ...1 0 b a r 4021
4 ...2 0 m A AI1
PIDmax oh1
AI2
PIDmin ol1
3
IMOT
...
%ref = 4010

PID act
AI selection Switch
PID1
Current controller Panel ref2
n PID ACT
Torque value
Power PID1 Out
COMM ACT 4014...4021/
4141...4121* Local ref
controller PID1.
Group
1106 switch
Limiter 40/41*
Panel ref1
Website: ritech.vn
LOC
Panel ref2 LOC/REM
switch Alarm
500% speed
-500%
Frequency
EXT1 ref REM
1101 ref
select Constant
speed Limiter
Panel ref1 Group 30
AI n Control panel
...
FREQ INPUT 1103 Group 12 Average speed
1104 Const speed 7
EXT2 ref
Constant
select
Panel ref2 speed
AI n
... EXT1/EXT2
Group 12 switch
FREQ INPUT 1106
PID act Switch Limiter

AI selection PID1
Current n controller
PID ACT
Torque value
Power 1107 1102
4014...4021/ PID1 Out
COMM ACT
4114...4121* Group 1106
40/41*
PID1 ref Limiter
select
Panel ref2
n
AI
... *Parameter 4027 selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2, ie group 40 and 41.
The following figure presents the speed/scalar control block diagram for process
FREQ INPUT 4012,4013/

4010/4110* 4112,4113*
Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

 Settings
1101 Local control mode reference type selection
1102 EXT1/EXT2 selection
1106 PID1 activation
1107 REF2 minimum limit
1501 PID2 output (external controller) connection to AO
9902 PID control macro selection
Groups 40 PROCESS PID SET PID1 settings
1…41 PROCESS PID SET 2
Group 42 EXT / TRIM PID PID2 settings
 Diagnostics
0126/0127 PID 1/2 output value
0128/0129 PID 1/2 setpoint value
0130/0131 PID 1/2 feedback value
0132/0133 PID 1/2 deviation
 Example
In the following example, four drives are set up for a duty/assist cycle with internal
setpoints (parameters 4011, 4036, 4037 and 4038). As shown in the table below, at
each setpoint, a different drive has the highest setpoint value, the second highest
value, and so on, enabling a duty cycle between the four drives.
Drive number Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Setpoint 3 Setpoint 4
(4011) (4036) (4037) (4038)
1 50% 40% 35% 30%
2 40% 35% 30% 50%
3 35% 30% 50% 40%
4 30% 50% 40% 35%
When the drive system is powered up and the pressure is below all setpoint values,
each drive keeps running until it reaches its setpoint. The drive with the highest
setpoint value keeps running even after this point and becomes the duty drive which
maintains the pressure at the desired value. The drive remains the duty drive until a
setpoint change occurs. Using a timer and a digital inputs as the source for setpoint
selection, setpoints can automatically be rotated, for example, once per day.
If the pressure in the system falls below the second highest setpoint value, that drive
assists to increase the pressure.
To enable the internal setpoints, set 4010 SET POINT SEL to INTERNAL.

Use timers to control the bits sent to the digital inputs as shown in the table below.
Enable setpoint selection through the digital inputs, set 4039 INT SETPNT SEL to, for
example, DI1,2 (7).
Day 1 Day 2 Day 3 Day 4
DI1 0 1 1 0
DI2 0 0 1 1
Setpoint 1 (4011) 2 (4036) 3 (4037) 4 (4038)
selected

Sleep function for the process PID (PID1) control

The sleep function operates on a 2 ms time level.
The block diagram below illustrates the sleep function enable/disable logic. The sleep
function can be put into use only when the PID control is active.
Compare Select
Output 1 NOT SEL
freq. Delay Delay
1<2 INTERNAL
DI1
And
. Set/Reset
t t
4023 2 . 4022
. S 2)
%refActive
&
PIDCtrlActive
4024 4030 Or S/R
modulating R
<1
Or
5320 (B1)
<1 Set/Reset 1)
5320 (B2)
Compare S
Select Delay Or
0132 1 NOT SEL S/R
1>2 INTERNAL t StartRq <1 R
4025 2 DI1
.
.
. 4022 4026
1) 1 = Activate sleeping
0 = Deactivate sleeping
2) 1 = Activate sleep boost

0 = Deactivate sleep boost
Mot. speed: Actual speed of the motor
%refActive: The % reference (EXT REF2) is in use. See parameter 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL.
PIDCtrlActive: 9902 APPLIC MACRO is PID CONTROL.
modulating: The inverter IGBT control is operating.

 Example
The time scheme below visualizes the operation of the sleep function.
Reference
Sleep boost time (4030)
Sleep boost step (4031)
Time
Selected process Wake-up delay
actual value (4026)
Wake-up level deviation

(4025)
Time
Output frequency
Control panel
display:
tsd = Sleep delay (4024)
PID
SLEEP
t < tsd tsd
Sleep level
(4023)
Time
Stop Start
Sleep function for a PID controlled pressure boost pump (when parameter 4022 is set
to INTERNAL): The water consumption falls at night. As a consequence, the PID
process controller decreases the motor speed. However, due to natural losses in the
pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low speeds, the motor does not
stop but keeps rotating. The sleep function detects the slow rotation, and stops the
unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The drive shifts into sleep
mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping restarts when the pressure falls
under the allowed minimum level and the wake-up delay has passed.

 Settings
9902 PID control activation
4022…4026, 4030, 4031, Sleep function settings
4122…4126, 4130, 4131
 Diagnostics
1401 PID sleep function status through RO 1
1402/1403/1410 PID sleep function status through RO 2…4. With option
MREL-01 only.
PID SLEEP Sleep mode
Motor temperature measurement through the standard I/O

This section describes the temperature measurement of one motor when the drive
I/O terminals are used as the connection interface.
Motor temperature can be measured using Pt100 or PTC sensors connected to
analog input and output.
One sensor Three sensors

AI1
AI1
Motor Motor GND
GND
T
T T T
AO
AO
GND
GND
3.3 nF
3.3 nF
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor temperature

sensor requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts and
the sensor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creepage distance of 8 mm
(400/500 V AC equipment).
If the assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the I/O board terminals must be
protected against contact and they may not be connected to other equipment, or the
temperature sensor must be isolated from the I/O terminals.

It is also possible to monitor motor temperature by connecting a PTC sensor and

a thermistor relay between the +24 V DC voltage supply offered by the drive and a
digital input. The figure below displays the connection.
Par. 3501 = THERM (0) or THERM(1)
Thermistor
relay
DI1…5
+24 V DC
T
Motor
WARNING! According to IEC 664, the connection of the motor thermistor to the
digital input requires double or reinforced insulation between motor live parts
and the thermistor. Reinforced insulation entails a clearance and creeping distance of
8 mm (400/500 V AC equipment).
If the thermistor assembly does not fulfill the requirement, the other I/O terminals of
the drive must be protected against contact, or a thermistor relay must be used to
isolate the thermistor from the digital input.
 Settings
Group 13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input settings
Group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS Analog output settings
Group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS Motor temperature measurement settings
Other
At the motor end the cable shield should be grounded through, eg a 3.3 nF capacitor. If this is
not possible, the shield is to be left unconnected.
 Diagnostics
0145 Motor temperature
Alarm/Fault Additional information
MOTOR TEMP/MOT OVERTEMP Excessive motor temp

Timed functions
A variety of drive functions can be time controlled, eg start/stop and EXT1/EXT2
control. The drive offers
• four start and stop times (START TIME 1…START TIME 4, STOP TIME 1…STOP
TIME 4)
• four start and stop days (START DAY 1…START DAY 4, STOP DAY 1…STOP
DAY 4)
• four timed functions for collecting the selected time periods 1…4 together (TIMED
FUNC 1 SRC…TIMED FUNC 4 SRC)
• booster time (an additional booster time connected to timed functions).
A timed function can be connected to multiple time periods:
Time period 1
3602 START TIME 1
3603 STOP TIME 1
3604 START DAY 1
3605 STOP DAY 1
Time period 2
3606 START TIME 2
3607 STOP TIME 2 Timed function 1
3608 START DAY 2 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC
3609 STOP DAY 2
Timed function 2
Time period 3
3627 TIMED FUNC 2 SRC
3610 START TIME 3
3611 STOP TIME 3
3612 START DAY 3 Timed function 3
3613 STOP DAY 3 3628 TIMED FUNC 3 SRC
Time period 4 Timed function 4

3614 START TIME 4 3629 TIMED FUNC 4 SRC
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4
Booster
3622 BOOSTER SEL
3623 BOOSTER TIME

A parameter which is triggered by a timed function can be connected to only one

timed function at a time.
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS

Timed function 1
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
Timed function 2
1209 TIMED MODE SEL
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2, 1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3,
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 (with the MREL option only)
1805 DO SIGNAL
4027 PID 1 PARAM SET
4039 INT SETPNT SEL
4139 INT SETPNT SEL
4228 ACTIVATE
8126 TIMED AUTOCHNG
You can use the Timed functions assistant for easy configuring. For more information
on the assistants, see section Assistants mode on page 91.
 Examples
Air conditioning is active on weekdays from 8:00 to 15:30 (8 a.m to 3:30 p.m) and on
Sundays from 12:00 to 15:00 (12 to 3 p.m). By pressing the extension time switch,
the air-conditioning is on for an extra hour.
Parameter Setting
3601 TIMERS ENABLE DI1
3602 START TIME 1 08:00:00
3603 STOP TIME 1 15:30:00
3604 START DAY 1 MONDAY
3605 STOP DAY 1 FRIDAY
3606 START TIME 2 12:00:00
3607 STOP TIME 2 15:00:00
3608 START DAY 2 SUNDAY
3609 STOP DAY 2 SUNDAY
3622 BOOSTER SEL DI5 (cannot be the same as parameter 3601 value)
3623 BOOSTER TIME 01:00:00
3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC T1+T2+B
If timed function is enabled in continuous mode, the start date can be different from
the stop date, ie operation can continue over midnight. In the example below, the

drive runs continuously from 18:00 (6 p.m.) on Friday evening to 06:30 (6:30 a.m.) on
Monday morning. Timed function is enabled on the rising edge of digital input DI1.
Parameter Setting
3601 TIMERS ENABLE DI1 CMODE
3602 START TIME 1 18:00:00
3603 STOP TIME 1 06:30:00
3604 START DAY 1 FRIDAY
3605 STOP DAY 1 MONDAY
 Settings
36 TIMED FUNCTIONS Timed functions settings
1001, 1002 Timed start/stop control
1102 Timed EXT1/EXT2 selection
1201 Timed constant speed 1 activation
1209 Timed speed selection
1401 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 1
1402/1403/1410 Timed function status indicated through relay output RO 2…4.
With option MREL-01 only.
1805 Timed function status indicated through digital output DO
4027 Timed PID1 parameter set 1/2 selection
4039 Selection between different internal (constant) set points for
the process PID control (PID1 parameter set 1)
4139 Selection between different internal (constant) set points for
the process PID control (PID1 parameter set 2)
4228 Timed external PID2 activation
8126 Timed Autochange activation

User load curve

The user can specify a load curve (motor torque as a function of frequency) for
supervision. The curve is defined by five points. Supervision can be set for the torque
dropping below the underload curve, exceeding the overload curve, or both.
A fault is generated if the torque has been out of the allowed area for longer than the
user-defined time limit. An alarm is generated if the torque has been out of the
allowed area for longer than the half of the user-defined time limit.
Motor torque (%)
Overload area
Torque Torque
Torque high 4 high 5
Torque Torque
high 1 high 2
high 3
Allowed operating area Torque Torque

low 4 low 5
Torque
low 3
Torque
low 1
Torque
low 2
Underload area Output
frequency (Hz)
Freq. 1 Freq. 2 Freq. 3 Freq. 4 Freq. 5
 Settings
Group 37 USER LOAD CURVE User load curve settings
 Diagnostics
0105 Motor torque
Alarm
USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than half of the defined
time limit
Fault
USER LOAD CURVE Out of allowed area for longer than the defined time
limit
PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load curve parameter setting
(3704 > 3707 or 3707 > 3710 or 3710 > 3713 or 3713 >
3716 or
3705 > 3706 or 3708 > 3709 or 3711 > 3712 or 3714 >
3715 or 3717 > 3718)

Energy optimizer
Energy optimizer optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor
noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The total
efficiency (motor and drive) can be improved by 1…10% depending on the load
torque and speed.
 Settings
4501 Energy optimizer enabling
Energy saving
Energy saving tools calculate energy saved in kWh and MWh, energy saved in local
currency as well as reduction in CO 2 emission, all compared to the situation when the
pump is connected directly to the supply.
Two actual signals, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 and 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 are used
to store the energy saved in local currency. To find out the total saved energy in
currency units, add the value of signal 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the value of signal
0176.
Example:
0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 = 123.4
0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 = 5
Total saved energy = 5 · 1000 + 123.4 = 5123.4 currency units.
Note: The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED
MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2
are derived from subtracting the drive's energy consumed from the direct-on-line
(DOL) consumption calculated on the basis of parameter 4508 PUMP POWER. As
such, the accuracy of the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power estimate
entered in that parameter.
 Settings
Group 45 ENERGY SAVING Energy saving settings
 Diagnostics
0174/0175 Energy saved in kWh/Mwh
0176/0177 Energy saved in local currency
0178 Reduction in CO2 emission

Pump cleaning
The Pump cleaning function can be used for preventing solids from building up on
pump impellers. The function consists of a programmable sequence of forward and
reverse runs of the pump (see the figure below), effectively shaking off any residue
on the impeller. This is especially useful with booster and wastewater pumps.
Forward
4602
Forward
step t
4603
Reverse
step
Reverse
4607 4605 4604 4606 4604 4605 4604

Trigger Forward Off Reverse Off Forward Off
time time time time time time time
Number of steps
The pump cleaning cycle can be activated at start-up, with a user-defined period, with
a selectable digital input or by the Supervision function (for example triggered by the
motor input current).
 Settings
Group 46 PUMP CLEANING Pump cleaning settings
2205/2206 Acceleration time 2 / Deceleration time 2

Load analyzer
The load analyzer can be used for analyzing the customer’s process and sizing the
drive and the motor.
 Peak value logger

The user can select a signal (group 01 OPERATING DATA) to be monitored by the
peak value logger (PVL). The signal is sampled at 2 ms intervals when the drive is
running. The logger records the peak (maximum) value of the signal along with the
time the peak occurred, as well as output current, DC voltage and output frequency at
the time of the peak.
 Amplitude loggers
The drive has two amplitude loggers.
For amplitude logger 2 (AL2), the user can select a signal (group 01 OPERATING
DATA) to be sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is running, and specify a
value that corresponds to 100%. The collected samples are sorted into 10 read-only
parameters according to their amplitude. Each parameter represents an amplitude
range 10 percentage points wide, and displays the percentage of the collected
samples that fall within that range.
Percentage of samples
0…10%
10…20%
20…30%
30…40%
40…50%
50…60%
60…70%
70…80%
80…90%
>90%
Amplitude ranges (parameters 6414…6423)
Amplitude logger 1 (AL1) is fixed to monitor output current, and it cannot be reset.
With amplitude logger 1, 100% corresponds to the nominal output current of the drive
(I2N).
The peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 can be reset by a user-defined
method. They are also reset if either of the signals or the peak value filter time is
changed.

 Settings
Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER, Load analyzer settings
parameters 6401…6405
 Diagnostics
Group 64 LOAD ANALYZER, Load analyzer results

PFC and SPFC control

 PFC control
Pump and fan control (PFC) switches auxiliary pumps on and off as required by
capacity changes. Autochange function alternates between pumps to keep the duty
times of the pumps equal. Interlocks function enables the drive to detect if any of the
pumps are unavailable (eg switched off for maintenance), in which case the next
available pump is started instead.
The drive controls the motor of pump 1, varying the motor speed to control the pump
capacity. This motor is the speed regulated motor.
Direct line connections power the motors of pump 2 and pump 3, etc. The drive
switches pump 2 (and then pump 3, etc.) on and off as needed. These motors are
auxiliary motors.
The drive PID control uses two signals: a process reference and an actual value
feedback. The PID controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump such that
the actual value follows the process reference.
When demand (defined by the process reference) exceeds the first motor’s capacity
(user defined as a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically starts an auxiliary
pump. The PFC also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary
pump’s addition to total output. Then, as before, the PID controller adjusts the speed
(frequency) of the first pump such that the actual value follows the process reference.
If demand continues to increase, PFC adds additional auxiliary pumps, using the
same process.
When demand drops, such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit
(user defined as a frequency limit), the PFC control automatically stops an auxiliary
pump. The PFC also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the auxiliary
pump’s missing output.
An Interlock function (when enabled) identifies off-line (out of service) motors, and the
PFC control skips to the next available motor in the sequence.
An Autochange function (when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear)
equalizes duty time between the pump motors. Autochange periodically increments
the position of each motor in the rotation – the speed regulated motor becomes the
last auxiliary motor, the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor, etc.
See also section PFC control macro on page 110.
 SPFC control
Soft pump and fan control (SPFC) is used for pump and fan alternation applications
where lower pressure peaks are desirable when a new auxiliary motor is connected
on-line. SPFC is an easy way to implement soft starting of direct on line (auxiliary)

motors. The main difference between traditional PFC and SPFC is the way SPFC
connects auxiliary motors on-line.
SPFC connects auxiliary motors online with a flying start, while the motor is still
coasting. Thus, in some cases SPFC makes it possible to soften the start-up current
while connecting auxiliary motors on-line. This is why lower pressure peaks on the
pipelines and pumps may also be achieved. Connection sequence and powering
routine of auxiliary motors in SPFC is explained more detailed in the diagram. The
motor stopping routine follows always the normal PFC routine.
SPFC powering routine

The diagram below illustrates the SPFC powering routine.
fout
3 4
8109 START
FREQ 1 Motor 1 is speed reg. motor
Motor 2 is speed reg. motor
1
6
2 Motor 1 is aux. motor
5 7
t
Start 8
RO 1 / Motor 1
RO 2 / Motor 2
8122 PFC START DELAY
8115 AUX MOT START D
1. At start, relay RO 1 is closed and motor 1 is connected to the drive output.

2. The drive waits for the time specified by parameter 8122 PFC START DELAY to
ensure that the contactor (RO 1) has stabilized and then starts modulating from
zero speed. Motor 1 is the speed regulated motor.
3. When the drive output frequency fout rises over the start frequency (8109 START
FREQ 1), the start delay for the auxiliary motor (8115 AUX MOT START D) is set.
4. When delay 8115 has elapsed, the drive coasts to stop and relay RO 1 is opened
(motor 1 is disconnected from the drive output).
5. The drive waits for 8122 PFC START DELAY to ensure that the contactor (RO 1)
has stabilized.
6. After delay, 8122 RO 2 is closed and motor 2 is connected to the drive output as
the new speed regulated motor.

7. The drive waits for 8122 PFC START DELAY to ensure that the contactor (RO 2)
has stabilized.
8. After delay 8122, the drive starts modulating from zero speed regulating the
speed of motor 2. RO 1 is closed and motor 1 is connected directly on-line as an
auxiliary motor.
How to parameterize SPFC control

1. Select the SPFC control macro by setting parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to
value 15 (SPFC CONTROL).
2. Set PFC reference steps (parameters 8103…8105) if needed.
3. Set PFC start and stop frequencies (parameters 8109…8114).
4. Set PFC auxiliary motor start and stop delays (parameters 8115…8116).
5. Set the number of auxiliary motors (parameter 8117).
6. Enable Autochange (parameter 8118). In SPFC control, the parameter only allows
SPFC to use PFC's alternation switchgear box. It is not used as the operating
time interval between the automatic motor changes as in normal PFC application.
7. Autochange level is ignored (parameter 8119).
8. Parameterize Interlocks (parameter 8120).
9. Set Bypass function if needed (parameter 8121).
10. Set PFC start delay (parameter 8122).
11. Enable SPFC. Depending on the application, set parameter 8123 PFC ENABLE
to value 2 (SPFC ACTIVE) or value 3 (SPFC + AUTOCHANGE).
Value 1 (ACTIVE): enables normal PFC functionality.
Value 2 (SPFC ACTIVE): enables SPFC function with auxiliary motors running.
Value 3 (SPFC + AUTOCHANGE): enables SPFC function only when auxiliary
motors are not running
12. Set PFC acceleration and deceleration times if needed (parameters 8124…8125).
13. Autochange enable with a timed function is ignored (parameter 8126).
14. Set relays in group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS. (Transistor output TO [parameter 1805
DO SIGNAL] can be used as an additional relay output, if needed.) Both PFC and
SPFC use these relays. You must set at least as many relays as there are motors
set for SPFC (= the number of auxiliary motors [parameter 8117] + 1 [speed
regulated motor] when SPFC is used).
15. Set number of PFC controlled motors in parameter 8127 (= number of PFC relays
in group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS).
16. Also set other needed motor dependent parameters, eg 2007 MINIMUM FREQ,
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ and 2605 U/F RATIO.
PFC control and SPFC control default settings have differences in acceleration time
(2202), deceleration time (2203) and auxiliary motor stop delay (8116) parameters.
See also section SPFC control macro on page 111.

 Settings
Group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS Selections of relay outputs for starting and stopping of
motors
Group 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT Selections of relay outputs for starting and stopping of
motors (transistor output can be used as an additional
relay)
Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Pump protection (pressure monitoring) settings
Group 81 PFC CONTROL; PFC control settings;
8123 PFC/SPFC enable/disable
 Diagnostics
0116 Application block output signal
0162 RO 1 status
0163 TO status
0173 RO 2…4 status. With option MREL-01 only.
Alarm
AUTOCHANGE PFC Autochange function active
PFC I LOCK PFC interlocks active
INLET LOW, INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump/fan inlet too low
OUTLET HIGH, OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump/fan outlet too high
HIGH
Fault Additional information
PAR PFC REF NEG 2007 < 0
PAR PFC IO 1 Not enough relays parameterized for PFC.
Conflict between group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS,
parameter 8117 and parameter 8118.
PAR PFC IO 2 Parameter 8127 does not match the PFC motors in
group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS and parameter 8118
PAR PFC IO 3 Allocation of a digital input (interlock) for each PFC
motor not possible
INLET LOW, INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump/fan inlet too low
OUTLET HIGH, OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump/fan outlet too high
HIGH

 Connection diagram example

Pipe fill
The Pipe fill function is used for soft-starting a pump system. The pipe system is filled
smoothly with water, and when the pressure in the pipe system is near the final set
point, the drive changes to closed loop control.
 Reference ramping
If there is no change detected in the actual pressure, the Pipe fill function increases
the pump motor speed. When a change in the actual pressure is detected, the speed
stepping is stopped and the motor speed remains unchanged until the pressure stops
changing.
Final setpoint
Change over
Actual pressure
Time
Pump motor speed
Time
Changes in actual pressure

 PID reference ramping

After PID deviation is below PID ENABLE DEV, PID reference ramping is enabled.
The PID reference ramping parameters are in group 40.
Final setpoint
Change over
Actual pressure
Time
Pump motor speed
Time
Changes in actual pressure
 Settings
Group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1 Process PID settings
parameters 4032 and 4033.
Group 44 PUMP PROTECTION Pump protection (pressure monitoring) settings


Actual signals and parameters 163
12
Actual signals and parameters
The chapter describes the actual signals and parameters and gives the fieldbus
equivalent values for each signal/parameter. It also contains a table of the default
values for the different macros.
Note: When the control panel is in the short parameter view, ie when parameter 1611
PARAMETER VIEW is set to 2 (SHORT VIEW), the control panel only shows a
subset of all signals and parameters. The lists of these signals and parameters starts
on page 167.
To be able to view all actual signals and parameters, set parameter 1611
PARAMETER VIEW to 3 (LONG VIEW). The descriptions of all actual signals and
parameters start on pages 170 and 177, respectively.
Terms and abbreviations

Term Definition
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user.
No user setting possible. Groups 01…04 contain actual signals.
Def Parameter default value
Parameter A user-adjustable operation instruction of the drive. Groups 10…99 contain
parameters.
Note: Parameter selections are shown on the Basic control panel as integer
values. Eg parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS selection COMM is shown as
value 10 (which is equal to the fieldbus equivalent FbEq).
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value and the integer used in
serial communication.
E Refers to types 03E- with European parametrization
U Refers to types 03U- with US parametrization

164 Actual signals and parameters
Fieldbus equivalent
Example: If 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ (see page 200) is set from an external control
system, an integer value of 1 corresponds to 0.1 Hz. All the read and sent values are
limited to 16 bits (-32768…32767).

Default values with different macros

When application macro is changed (9902 APPLIC MACRO), the software updates
the parameter values to their default values. The table below shows the parameter
default values for different macros. For other parameters, the default values are the
same for all macros. See the parameter list starting on page 177.
Index Name/ ABB 3-WIRE ALTERNA MOTOR HAND/ PID PFC SPFC AC500
Selection
STAND TE POT AUTO CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL MODBUS
ARD
9902 APPLIC 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= 7= 15 = 21 =
MACRO ABB 3-WIRE ALTERNA MOTOR HAND/ PID PFC SPFC AC500
STAND TE POT AUTO CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL MODBUS
ARD
1001 EXT1 2= 4= 9= 2= 2= 1 = DI1 1 = DI1 1 = DI1 10 =
COMMANDS DI1,2 DI1P,2P, DI1F,2R DI1,2 DI1,2 COMM
3
1002 EXT2 0= 0 = NOT 0 = NOT
0= 21 = 20 = DI5 20 = DI5 20 = DI5 0 = NOT
COMMANDS NOT SEL SEL NOT DI5,4 SEL
SEL SEL
1003 DIRECTION 3 = 3= 3= 3= 3= 1= 1= 1= 3=
REQU REQUES REQUEST REQUE REQUE FORWARD FORWARD FORWARD REQUES
EST T ST ST T
1102 EXT1/EXT2 0 = 0= 0 = EXT1 0 = 3 = DI3 2 = DI2 2 = DI2 2 = DI2 8=
SEL EXT1 EXT1 EXT1 COMM
1103 REF1 1= 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 12 = 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 1 = AI1 8=
SELECT AI1 DI3U,4 COMM
D(NC)
1106 REF2 2= 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 2 = AI2 19 = 19 = 19 = 2 = AI2
SELECT AI2 PID1OUT PID1OUT PID1OUT
1201 CONST 9= 10 = 9 = DI3,4 5 = DI5 0 3 = DI3 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 9 = DI3,4
SPEED SEL DI3,4 DI4,5 =NOT SEL SEL
SEL
1304 MINIMUM AI2 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 1.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 20.0% 1.0%
1401 RELAY 3= 3= 3= 3= 3= 3= 31 = PFC 31 = PFC 3 =
OUTPUT 1 FAULT FAULT(- FAULT(-1) FAULT(- FAULT( FAULT(-1) FAULT(-
(-1) 1) 1) -1) 1)
1601 RUN ENABLE 0 = 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = 0= 4 = DI4 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT
NOT SEL SEL NOT NOT SEL SEL SEL
SEL SEL SEL
1604 FAULT 0= 0= 0= 0= 0= 0= 0= 0= 8=
RESET SEL KEYP KEYPA KEYPAD KEYPA KEYPA KEYPAD KEYPAD KEYPAD COMM
AD D D D
1805 DO SIGNAL 3 = 3= 3= 3= 3= 3= 3= 31 = PFC 3 =
FAULT FAULT(- FAULT(-1) FAULT(- FAULT( FAULT(-1) FAULT(-1) FAULT(-
(-1) 1) 1) -1) 1)
2008 MAXIMUM 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 50.0 Hz 52.0 Hz 52.0 Hz 50.0 Hz
FREQ
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 5 = 0 = NOT 5 = DI5 0= 0= 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT
SEL DI5 SEL NOT NOT SEL SEL SEL SEL
SEL SEL
2202 ACCELER 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 30.0 s 5.0 s
TIME 1
2203 DECELER 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 5.0 s 30.0 s 5.0 s
TIME 1
3018 COMM FAULT 0= 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0= 0= 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 1=
FUNC NOT SEL SEL NOT NOT SEL SEL SEL FAULT
SEL SEL SEL
3019 COMM FAULT 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 10.0 s 3.0 s
TIME

Index Name/ ABB 3-WIRE ALTERNA MOTOR HAND/ PID PFC SPFC AC500
Selection STAND TE POT AUTO CONTROL CONTROL CONTROL MODBUS
ARD
4001 GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 1.0
4002 INTEGRATIO 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 60.0 s
N TIME
4101 GAIN 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 1.0
4102 INTEGRATIO 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 60.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 60.0 s
N TIME
5302 EFB STATION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
ID
5303 EFB BAUD 9.6 9.6 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 19.6 9.6 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s
RATE kbit/s kbit/s
5304 EFB PARITY 0 = 8 0 = 8 0=8 0=8 0=8 0=8 0=8 0=8 0=8
NONE NONE 1 NONE 1 NONE 1 NONE NONE 1 NONE 1 NONE 1 NONE 1
1 1
5305 EFB CTRL 0= 0 = ABB 0 = ABB 0 = ABB 0 = 0 = ABB 0 = ABB 0 = ABB 2 = ABB
PROFILE ABB DRV DRV LIM DRV ABB DRV LIM DRV LIM DRV LIM DRV
DRV LIM LIM DRV FULL
LIM LIM
5310 EFB PAR 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 101
5311 EFB PAR 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 303
5312 EFB PAR 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 305
8116 AUX MOT 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 3.0 s 20.0 s 3.0 s
STOP D
8118 AUTOCHNG 0.0 = 0.0 = 0.0 = 0.0 = 0.0 = 0.0 = 0.0 = 0.1 h 0.0 =
INTERV NOT NOT NOT SEL NOT NOT NOT SEL NOT SEL NOT SEL
SEL SEL SEL SEL
8123 PFC ENABLE 0 = 0 = NOT 0 = NOT 0= 0= 0 = NOT 1= 2 = SPFC 0 = NOT
NOT SEL SEL NOT NOT SEL ACTIVE ACTIVE SEL
SEL SEL SEL

Actual signals in the short parameter view

Actual signals in the short parameter view
No. Name/Value Description FbEq
04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history (read-only). See group 04 FAULT HISTORY in
the list of all parameters.
0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault. 1=1
Parameters in the short parameter view

No. Name/Value Description Def/FbEq
11 REFERENCE Panel reference type, external control location selection and
SELECT external reference sources and limits. See group 11
REFERENCE SELECT in the list of all parameters.
1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1. E: 50.0 Hz
U: 60.0 Hz
12 CONSTANT Constant speed (drive output frequency) selection and
SPEEDS values. See group 12 CONSTANT SPEEDS in the list of all
parameters.
1202 CONST Defines constant drive output frequency 1. E: 5.0 Hz
SPEED 1 U: 6.0 Hz
SPEED 2 U: 12.0 Hz
SPEED 3 U: 18.0 Hz
13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal processing. See group 13 ANALOG
INPUTS in the list of all parameters.
1301 MINIMUM AI1 Defines the minimum %-value that corresponds to minimum 1.0%
mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1.
14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output, and relay
operating delays. See group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS in the list
of all parameters.
1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1. FAULT(-1)
OUTPUT 1
16 SYSTEM Parameter view, Run enable, parameter lock etc. See group
CONTROLS 16 SYSTEM CONTROLS in the list of all parameters.
1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view, ie which parameters are shown SHORT
VIEW on the control panel. VIEW
20 LIMITS Drive operation limits. See group 20 LIMITS in the list of all
parameters.
2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. E: 50.0 Hz
FREQ U: 60.0 Hz
21 START/STOP Start and stop modes of the motor. See group 21
START/STOP in the list of all parameters.
2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function. COAST
FUNCTION


22 ACCEL/DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times. See group 22
ACCEL/DECEL in the list of all parameters.
2202 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 1. 5.0 s
TIME 1
2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1. 5.0 s
TIME 1
53 EFB PROTOCOL Embedded fieldbus link settings. See chapter Fieldbus
control with the embedded fieldbus on page 287.
5301 EFB Contains the identification and program version of the -
PROTOCOL ID protocol.
Note: You can reset this parameter only with parameter
9802 COMM PROT SEL.
5302 EFB STATION Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same 1
ID address are not allowed on-line.
5303 EFB BAUD Defines the transfer rate of the link 9.6 kbit/s
RATE
5304 EFB PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s) and the data length. 8 NONE 1
The same setting must be used in all on-line stations.
5305 EFB CTRL Selects the communication profile. See section ABB DRV
PROFILE Communication profiles on page 302. LIM
5306 EFB OK Number of valid messages received by the drive. During 0
MESSAGES normal operation, this number increases constantly.
5307 EFB CRC Number of messages with an CRC (cyclic redundancy 0
MESSAGES check) error received by the drive. If the number is high,
check CRC calculation for possible errors.
Note: High electromagnetic noise levels generate errors.
5308 EFB UART Number of messages with a character error received by the 0
ERRORS drive.
5309 EFB STATUS Status of the EFB protocol. IDLE
5310 EFB PAR 10 Selects an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register 0
40005.
40006.
40007.
40008.
40009.
40010.
40011.
40012.
5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus: Sets an additional delay before the drive 0
begins transmitting response to the master request.


5319 EFB PAR 19 ABB drives profile (ABB DRV LIM or ABB DRV FULL) 0000 hex
Control word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control word.
Status word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status word.
98 OPTIONS External serial communication activation.
9802 COMM PROT Activates the external serial communication and selects the NOT SEL
SEL interface.
99 START-UP DATA Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data. See
group 99 START-UP DATA in the list of all parameters.
9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language. ENGLISH
9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro. ABB
MACRO STANDA
RD
9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage. 200 V
VOLT units:
230 V
400 V
E units:
400 V
400 V
U units:
460 V
9906 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current. I2N
CURR
9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency. E: 50.0 Hz
FREQ U: 60.0 Hz
9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed. Type
SPEED dependent
9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power. PN
POWER

All actual signals

All actual signals
01 OPERATING Basic signals for monitoring the drive (read-only)
DATA
0101 SPEED & DIR Calculated motor speed in rpm. A negative value indicates 1 = 1 rpm
reverse direction.
0102 SPEED Calculated motor speed in rpm 1 = 1 rpm
0103 OUTPUT Calculated drive output frequency in Hz. (Shown by default 1 = 0.1 Hz
FREQ on the panel Output mode display.)
0104 CURRENT Measured motor current in A. (Shown by default on the 1 = 0.1 A
panel Output mode display.)
0105 TORQUE Calculated motor torque in percent of the nominal motor 1 = 0.1%
torque
0106 POWER Measured motor power in kW 1=
0.1 kW
0107 DC BUS Measured intermediate circuit voltage in V DC 1=1V
VOLTAGE
0109 OUTPUT Calculated motor voltage in V AC 1=1V
VOLTAGE
0110 DRIVE TEMP Measured IGBT temperature in °C 1 = 0.1 °C
0111 EXTERNAL External reference REF1 in Hz 1 = 0.1 Hz
REF 1
0112 EXTERNAL External reference REF2 in percent. Depending on the use, 1 = 0.1%
REF 2 100% equals the maximum motor speed, nominal motor
torque, or maximum process reference.
0113 CTRL Active control location. (0) LOCAL; (1) EXT1; (2) EXT2. See 1 = 1
LOCATION section Local control vs. external control on page 119.
0114 RUN TIME (R) Elapsed drive running time counter (hours). Runs when the 1 = 1 h
drive is modulating. The counter can be reset by pressing
the UP and DOWN keys simultaneously when the control
panel is in the Parameter mode.
0115 KWH kWh counter. The counter value is accumulated until it 1 = 1 kWh
COUNTER (R) reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts
again from 0. The counter can be reset by pressing UP and
DOWN keys simultaneously when the control panel is in the
Parameter mode.
0116 APPL BLK Application block output signal. Value is either from PFC 1 = 0.1%
OUTPUT control, if PFC control is active, or from signal 0112
EXTERNAL REF 2.
0120 AI 1 Relative value of analog input AI1 in percent 1 = 0.1%
0121 AI 2 Relative value of analog input AI2 in percent 1 = 0.1%
0124 AO 1 Value of analog output AO in mA 1=
0.1 mA
0126 PID 1 OUTPUT Output value of the process PID1 controller in percent 1 = 0.1%
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT Output value of the PID2 controller in percent 1 = 0.1%
0128 PID 1 SETPNT Setpoint signal (reference) for the process PID1 controller. -
Unit depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT
SCALE and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.

All actual signals

0129 PID 2 SETPNT Setpoint signal (reference) for the PID2 controller. Unit -
depends on parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE
settings.
0130 PID 1 FBK Feedback signal for the process PID1 controller. Unit -
depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT SCALE
and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.
0131 PID 2 FBK Feedback signal for the PID2 controller. Unit depends on -
parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings.
0132 PID 1 Deviation of the process PID1 controller, ie the difference -
DEVIATION between the reference value and the actual value. Unit
depends on parameter 4006 UNITS, 4007 UNIT SCALE
and 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET settings.
0133 PID 2 Deviation of the PID2 controller, ie the difference between -
DEVIATION the reference value and the actual value. Unit depends on
parameter 4106 UNITS and 4107 UNIT SCALE settings.
0134 COMM RO Relay output Control word through fieldbus (decimal). See 1=1
WORD parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
0135 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1=1
1
0136 COMM VALUE Data received from fieldbus 1=1
2
0137 PROCESS Process variable 1 defined by parameter group 34 PANEL -
VAR 1 DISPLAY
VAR 2 DISPLAY
VAR 3 DISPLAY
0140 RUN TIME Elapsed drive running time counter (thousands of hours). 1=
Runs when the drive is modulating. Counter cannot be 0.01 kh
reset.
0141 MWH MWH counter. The counter value is accumulated till it 1=
COUNTER reaches 65535 after which the counter rolls over and starts 1 MWh
again from 0. Cannot be reset.
0142 REVOLUTION Motor revolution counter (millions of revolutions). The 1=
CNTR counter can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN keys 1 Mrev
simultaneously when the control panel is in the Parameter
mode.
0143 DRIVE ON Drive control board power-on time in days. Counter cannot 1=
TIME HI be reset. 1 days
0144 DRIVE ON Drive control board power-on time in 2 second ticks (30 1=2s
TIME LO ticks = 60 seconds). Counter cannot be reset.
0145 MOTOR TEMP Measured motor temperature. Unit depends on the sensor 1=1
type selected by group 35 MOTOR TEMP MEAS
parameters.
0158 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2) 1 = 1
VALUE 1
0159 PID COMM Data received from fieldbus for PID control (PID1 and PID2) 1 = 1
VALUE 2
0160 DI 1-5 STATUS Status of digital inputs.
Example: 10000 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.

All actual signals

0161 PULSE INPUT Value of frequency input in Hz 1 = 1 Hz
FREQ
0162 RO STATUS Status of relay output 1. 1 = RO is energized, 0 = RO is de- 1 = 1
energized.
0163 TO STATUS Status of transistor output, when transistor output is used as 1 = 1
a digital output.
0164 TO Transistor output frequency, when transistor output is used 1 = 1 Hz
FREQUENCY as a frequency output.
0173 RO 2-4 Status of the relays in the MREL relay output extension
STATUS module. See MREL-01 relay output extension module
user's manual (3AUA0000035974 [English]).
Example: 100 = RO 2 is on, RO 3 and RO 4 are off.
0174 SAVED KWH Energy saved in kWh compared to the energy used when 1=
the pump is connected directly to the supply. See the note 0.1 kWh
on page 256.
The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999.9, after
which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.0, and
the counter value of signal 0175 is incremented by one. Can
be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all
energy calculators at the same time). See group 45
ENERGY SAVING.
0175 SAVED MWH Energy saved in MWh compared to the energy used when 1=
the pump is connected directly to the supply. See the note 1 MWh
on page 256.
The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535, after
which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0. Can be
reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all
energy calculators at the same time). See group 45
ENERGY SAVING.
0176 SAVED Energy saved in local currency (remainder when the total 1 = 0.1
AMOUNT 1 saved energy is divided by 1000). See the note on page (Currency)
256.
To find out the total saved energy in currency units, add the
value of signal 0177 multiplied by 1000 to the value of signal
0176.
Example:
0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1 = 123.4
0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 = 5
Total saved energy = 5 · 1000 + 123.4 = 5123.4 currency
units.
The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 999.9, after
which the counter rolls over and starts again from 0.0, and
the counter value of signal 0177 is incremented by one. Can
be reset with parameter 4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all
energy calculators at the same time). Local energy price is
set with parameter 4502 ENERGY PRICE. See group 45
ENERGY SAVING.
0177 SAVED Energy saved in local currency in thousand currency units. 1 = 1000
AMOUNT 2 Eg value 5 means 5000 currency units. See the note on (Currency)
page 256.
The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 65535 (the
counter does not roll over). See signal 0176 SAVED
AMOUNT 1.

All actual signals

0178 SAVED CO2 Reduction in carbon dioxide emissions in tn. See the note 1 = 0.1 tn
on page 256.
The counter value is accumulated till it reaches 6553.5 (the
counter does not roll over). Can be reset with parameter
4509 ENERGY RESET (resets all energy calculators at the
same time). CO2 conversion factor is set with parameter
4507 CO2 CONV FACTOR. See group 45 ENERGY
SAVING.
03 FB ACTUAL Data words for monitoring the fieldbus communication
SIGNALS (read-only). Each signal is a 16-bit data word.
Data words are displayed on the panel in hexadecimal
format.
0301 FB CMD A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
WORD 1 on page 307.
0302 FB CMD A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
WORD 2 on page 307
0303 FB STS WORD A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
1 on page 307.
0304 FB STS WORD A 16-bit data word. See section DCU communication profile
2 on page 307
0305 FAULT WORD A 16-bit data word. For the possible causes and remedies
1 and fieldbus equivalents, see chapter Fault tracing on page
311.
Bit 0 = OVERCURRENT
Bit 1 = DC OVERVOLT
Bit 2 = DEV OVERTEMP
Bit 3 = SHORT CIRC
Bit 4 = Reserved
Bit 5 = DC UNDERVOLT
Bit 6 = AI1 LOSS
Bit 7 = AI2 LOSS
Bit 8 = MOT OVERTEMP
Bit 9 = PANEL LOSS
Bit 10 = Reserved
Bit 11 = MOTOR STALL
Bit 12 = Reserved
Bit 13 = EXT FAULT 1
Bit 14 = EXT FAULT 2
Bit 15 = EARTH FAULT
311.
Bit 0 = Reserved
Bit 1 = THERM FAIL
Bit 2…3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = CURR MEAS

All actual signals

Bit 5 = SUPPLY PHASE
Bit 6 = Reserved
Bit 7 = OVERSPEED
Bit 8 = Reserved
Bit 9 = DRIVE ID
Bit 10 = CONFIG FILE
Bit 11 = SERIAL 1 ERR
Bit 12 = EFB CON FILE
Bit 13 = FORCE TRIP
Bit 14 = MOTOR PHASE
Bit 15 = OUTP WIRING
311.
Bit 0 = EFB 1
Bit 1 = EFB 2
Bit 2 = EFB 3
Bit 3 = INCOMPATIBLE SW
Bit 4 = USER LOAD CURVE
Bit 5 = UNKNOWN EXTENSION
Bit 6 = INLET VERY LOW
Bit 7 = OUTLET VERY HIGH
Bit 8 = INLET LOW
Bit 9 = OUTLET HIGH
Bit 10…14 = System error
Bit 15 = Parameter setting fault
0308 ALARM WORD A 16-bit data word. For the possible causes and remedies
311.
An alarm can be reset by resetting the whole alarm word:
Write zero to the word.
Bit 0 = OVERCURRENT
Bit 1 = OVERVOLTAGE
Bit 2 = UNDERVOLTAGE
Bit 3 = DIR LOCK
Bit 4 = IO COMM
Bit 5 = AI1 LOSS
Bit 6 = AI2 LOSS
Bit 7 = PANEL LOSS
Bit 8 = DEVICE OVERTEMP
Bit 9 = MOTOR TEMP
Bit 10 = Reserved

All actual signals

Bit 11 = MOTOR STALL
Bit 12 = AUTORESET
Bit 13 = AUTOCHANGE
Bit 14 = PFC I LOCK
Bit 15 = Reserved
311.
Bit 0 = Reserved
Bit 1 = PID SLEEP
Bit 2 = Reserved
Bit 3 = Reserved
Bit 4 = START ENABLE 1 MISSING
Bit 5 = START ENABLE 2 MISSING
Bit 6 = EMERGENCY STOP
Bit 7 = Reserved
Bit 8 = FIRST START
Bit 9 = Reserved
Bit 10 = USER LOAD CURVE
Bit 11 = START DELAY
Bit 12 = Reserved
Bit 13 = INLET LOW
Bit 14 = OUTLET HIGH
Bit 15 = PIPE FILL
311.
Bit 0 = INLET VERY LOW
Bit 1 = OUTLET VERY HIGH
Bit 2…15 = Reserved
04 FAULT HISTORY Fault history (read-only)
0401 LAST FAULT Code of the latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing on page 1 = 1
311 for the codes. 0 = Fault history is clear (on panel display
= NO RECORD).
0402 FAULT TIME 1 Day on which the latest fault occurred. 1=
Format: Date if the real time clock is operating. / The 1 days
number of days elapsed after the power-on if the real time
clock is not used, or was not set.

All actual signals

0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time at which the latest fault occurred.
Format on the assistant control panel: Real time (hh:mm:ss)
if the real time clock is operating. / Time elapsed after the
power-on (hh:mm:ss minus the whole days stated by signal
0402 FAULT TIME 1) if real time clock is not used, or was
not set.
Format on the basic control panel: Time elapsed after
power-on in 2-second ticks (minus the whole days stated by
signal 0402 FAULT TIME 1). 30 ticks = 60 seconds. Eg
value 514 equals 17 minutes and 8 seconds (= 514/30).
0404 SPEED AT FLT Motor speed in rpm at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 1 rpm
0405 FREQ AT FLT Frequency in Hz at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 0.1 Hz
0406 VOLTAGE AT Intermediate circuit voltage in V DC at the time the latest 1 = 0.1 V
FLT fault occurred
0407 CURRENT AT Motor current in A at the time the latest fault occurred 1 = 0.1 A
FLT
0408 TORQUE AT Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque at the 1 = 0.1%
FLT time the latest fault occurred
0409 STATUS AT Drive status in hexadecimal format at the time the latest
FLT fault occurred
0412 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 2nd latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing 1 = 1
FAULT 1 on page 311 for the codes.
0413 PREVIOUS Fault code of the 3rd latest fault. See chapter Fault tracing 1=1
FAULT 2 on page 311 for the codes.
0414 DI 1-5 AT FLT Status of digital inputs DI1…5 at the time the latest fault
occurred (binary).
Example: 10000 = DI1 is on, DI2…DI5 are off.

All parameters
All parameters
10 START/STOP/DIR The sources for external start, stop and direction control
1001 EXT1 Defines the connections and the source for the start, stop DI1,2
COMMANDS and direction commands for external control location 1
(EXT1).
NOT SEL No start, stop and direction command source 0
DI1 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 1
Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
(setting REQUEST = FORWARD).
DI1,2 Start and stop through digital input DI1. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 2
Direction through digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse.
To control direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting
must be REQUEST.
DI1P,2P Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. (In order to 3
start the drive, digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the
pulse fed to DI1.)
Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction
of rotation is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
Note: When the stop input (DI2) is deactivated (no input),
the control panel start and stop keys are disabled.
DI1P,2P,3 Pulse start through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start. (In order to 4
start the drive, digital input DI2 must be activated prior to the
pulse fed to DI1.)
Pulse stop through digital input DI2. 1 -> 0: Stop. Direction
through digital input DI3. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control
direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be
REQUEST.
DI1P,2P,3P Pulse start forward through digital input DI1. 0 -> 1: Start 5
forward. Pulse start reverse through digital input DI2. 0 -> 1:
Start reverse. (In order to start the drive, digital input DI3
must be activated prior to the pulse fed to DI1/DI2). Pulse
stop through digital input DI3. 1 -> 0: Stop. To control the
REQUEST.
KEYPAD Start, stop and direction commands through control panel 8
when EXT1 is active. To control the direction, parameter
1003 DIRECTION setting must be REQUEST.
DI1F,2R Start, stop and direction commands through digital inputs 9
DI1 and DI2.
DI1 DI2 Operation
0 0 Stop
1 0 Start forward
0 1 Start reverse
1 1 Stop
Parameter 1003 DIRECTION setting must be

3 (REQUEST).

All parameters
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the start and stop 10
commands, ie Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bits
0…1. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller
through the embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For
the Control word bits, see section DCU communication
profile on page 307.
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed start/stop control. Timed function 1 active = start, 11
timed function 1 inactive = stop. See parameter group 36
TIMED FUNCTIONS.
TIMED FUNC 2 See selection TIMED FUNC 1. 12
DI5 Start and stop through digital input DI5. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 20
Direction is fixed according to parameter 1003 DIRECTION
DI5,4 Start and stop through digital input DI5. 0 = stop, 1 = start. 21
Direction through digital input DI4. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse.
To control direction, parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be
REQUEST.
SUPRV1 Start when the value of supervision parameter 1 goes over 27
OVER the supervision high limit. Stop when the value goes below
the low limit. See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
SUPRV1 Start when the value of the supervision parameter 1 goes 28
UNDER below the supervision low limit. Stop when the value goes
over the high limit. See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 OVER. 29
OVER
SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER. 30
UNDER
OVER
SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER. 32
UNDER
SUP1OVER+ Start and stop as for SUPRV1 OVER. Direction through 33
DI2 digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control
REQUEST.
SUP1 Start and stop as for SUPRV1 UNDER. Direction through 34
UDR+DI2 digital input DI2. 0 = forward, 1 = reverse. To control
REQUEST.
1002 EXT2 Defines the connections and the source for the start, stop NOT SEL
COMMANDS and direction commands for external control location 2
(EXT2).
See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS.
1003 DIRECTION Enables the control of rotation direction of the motor, or fixes REQUES
the direction. T
Note: The Pump cleaning function can override this
parameter. See parameter 4601 PUMP CLEAN TRIG.
FORWARD Fixed to forward 1

All parameters
REVERSE Fixed to reverse 2
REQUEST Control of rotation direction allowed 3
1011 PANEL FORCE Enables stopping the drive from the control panel even DISABLE
STOP when not in local control.
DISABLE Control panel stop button is active only in local control 0
ENABLE Drive can be stopped from the control panel in remote 1
control
11 REFERENCE Panel reference type, external control location selection and
SELECT external reference sources and limits
1101 KEYPAD REF Selects the type of the reference in the local control mode. REF1(Hz/
SEL rpm)
REF1(Hz/rpm) Frequency reference in Hz 1
REF2(%) %-reference 2
1102 EXT1/EXT2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal EXT1
SEL that selects between the two external control locations,
EXT1 or EXT2.
EXT1 EXT1 active. The control signal sources are defined by 0
parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1103 REF1
SELECT.
DI1 Digital input DI1. 0 = EXT1, 1 = EXT2. 1
DI2 See selection DI1. 2
EXT2 EXT2 active. The control signal sources are defined by 7
parameters 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS and 1106 REF2
SELECT.
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for EXT1/EXT2 selection, 8
ie Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 5 (with ABB
drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 11). The Control word is
sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded
fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the Control word bits,
see sections DCU communication profile on page 307 and
ABB drives communication profile on page 302.
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed EXT1/EXT2 control selection. Timed function 1 active 9
= EXT2, timed function 1 inactive = EXT1. See parameter
group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 1 = EXT1, 0 = EXT2. -1
DI2(INV) See selection DI1(INV). -2

All parameters
1103 REF1 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF1. See AI1
section Block diagram: Reference source for EXT1 on page
121.
KEYPAD Control panel 0
AI1 Analog input AI1 1
AI1/JOYST Analog input AI1 as joystick. The minimum input signal runs 3
the motor at the maximum reference in the reverse
direction, the maximum input at the maximum reference in
the forward direction. Minimum and maximum references
are defined by parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1105 REF1
MAX.
Note: Parameter 1003 DIRECTION must be set to
REQUEST.
Speed ref par. 1301 = 20%, par 1302 = 100%

(REF1)
1105
1104
1104 -2% +2%
0 AI1
-1104
-1104
-1105 Hysteresis 4%
2 V / 4 mA 6 10 V / 20 mA of full scale
WARNING! If parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 is set to

0 V and analog input signal is lost (ie 0 V), the rotation
of the motor is reversed to the maximum reference. Set the
following parameters to activate a fault when analog input
signal is lost:
Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 to 20% (2 V or 4 mA).
Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to 5% or higher.
Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to FAULT.
AI2/JOYST See selection AI1/JOYST. 4
DI3U,4D(R) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 5
Reference decrease. Stop command resets the reference to
zero. Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of
the reference change.
DI3U,4D Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 6
Reference decrease. The program stores the active speed
reference (not reset by a stop command). When the drive is
restarted, the motor ramps up at the selected acceleration
rate to the stored reference. Parameter 2205 ACCELER
TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change.
COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 8
COMM+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input AI. 9
See section Reference selection and correction on page
294.
COMM*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF1 and analog input 10
AI1. See section Reference selection and correction on
page 294.

All parameters
DI3U,4D(RNC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 11
zero. The reference is not saved if the control source is
changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from
LOC to REM). Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 defines
the rate of the reference change.
DI3U,4D(NC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 12
Reference decrease. The program stores the active speed
reference (not reset by a stop command). The reference is
not saved if the control source is changed (from EXT1 to
EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM). When the
drive is restarted, the motor ramps up at the selected
acceleration rate to the stored reference. Parameter 2205
ACCELER TIME 2 defines the rate of the reference change.
AI1+AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 14
REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50%
AI1*AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 15
REF = AI1(%) · (AI2(%) / 50%)
AI1-AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 16
REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%)
AI1/AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 17
REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%))
KEYPAD(RNC) Defines the control panel as the reference source. Stop 20
command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for
reset.). The reference is not saved if the control source is
changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1).
KEYPAD(NC) Defines the control panel as the reference source. Stop 21
command does not reset the reference to zero. The
reference is stored. The reference is not saved if the control
source is changed (from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to
EXT1).
DI4U,5D See selection DI3U,4D. 30
DI4U,5D(NC) See selection DI3U,4D(NC). 31
FREQ INPUT Frequency input 32
1104 REF1 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF1. 0.0 Hz
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source
signal.

All parameters
0.0…500.0 Hz Minimum value in Hz. 1 = 0.1 Hz
Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the reference
source (value of parameter 1103 is AI1). The reference
minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM
AI1 and 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 settings as follows:
REF (Hz)
REF1 MAX
(1105)
REF1 MIN
(1104) 1302 1301 AI1 signal (%)
-REF1 MIN 1301 1302
(1104)
-REF1 MAX
(1105)
1105 REF1 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF1. E: 50.0 Hz
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source U: 60.0 Hz
signal.
0.0…500.0 Hz
Maximum value in Hz. See the example for parameter 1104 1 = 0.1 Hz
REF1 MIN.
1106 REF2 SELECT Selects the signal source for external reference REF2. AI2
KEYPAD See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 0
AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 1
AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 2
AI1/JOYST See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 3
AI2/JOYST See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 4
DI3U,4D(R) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 5
DI3U,4D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 6
COMM See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 8
COMM+AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 9
COMM*AI1 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 10
DI3U,4D(RNC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 11
DI3U,4D(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 12
AI1+AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 14
AI1*AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 15
AI1-AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 16
AI1/AI2 See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 17
PID1OUT PID controller 1 output. See parameter groups 19
40 PROCESS PID SET 1 and 41 PROCESS PID SET 2.
KEYPAD(RNC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 20
KEYPAD(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 21
DI4U,5D See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 30

All parameters
DI4U,5D(NC) See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 31
FREQ INPUT See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT. 32
1107 REF2 MIN Defines the minimum value for external reference REF2. 0.0%
Corresponds to the minimum setting of the used source
signal.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum frequency / maximum 1 = 0.1%
speed / nominal torque. See the example for parameter
1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal
limits.
1108 REF2 MAX Defines the maximum value for external reference REF2. 100.0%
Corresponds to the maximum setting of the used source
signal.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum frequency / maximum 1 = 0.1%
speed / nominal torque. See the example for parameter
1104 REF1 MIN for correspondence to the source signal
limits.
12 CONSTANT Constant speed (drive output frequency) selection and
SPEEDS values. See section Constant speeds on page 131.
1201 CONST Activates the constant speeds (drive output frequencies) or DI3,4
SPEED SEL selects the activation signal.
NOT SEL No constant speed in use 0
DI1 Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is 1
activated through digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive.
DI1,2 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1 and 7
DI2.1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI1 DI2 Operation
0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1
DI2,3 See selection DI1,2. 8


All parameters
DI1,2,3 Constant speed selection through digital inputs DI1, DI2 and 12
DI3. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI DI2 DI3 Operation
0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST SPEED 1
DI3,4,5 See selection DI1,2,3. 13

TIMED FUNC 1 External speed reference, speed defined by parameter 15
1202 CONST SPEED 1 or speed defined by parameter
1203 CONST SPEED 2 is used, depending on the selection
of parameter 1209 TIMED MODE SEL and the state of
timed function 1. See parameter group 36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS.
TIMED External speed reference or speed defined by parameter 19
FUN1&2 1202 CONST SPEED 1 … 1205 CONST SPEED 4 is used,
depending on the selection of parameter 1209 TIMED
MODE SEL and the state of timed functions 1 and 2. See
parameter group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
DI1(INV) Speed defined by parameter 1202 CONST SPEED 1 is -1
activated through inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 =
inactive.
inactive.
inactive.
inactive.
inactive.
DI1,2(INV) Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1 -7
and DI2. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI1 DI2 Operation
1 1 No constant speed

All parameters
DI2,3(INV) See selection DI1,2(INV). -8
DI1,2,3(INV) Constant speed selection through inverted digital inputs DI1, -12
DI2 and DI3. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI inactive.
DI DI2 DI3 Operation
1 1 1 No constant speed
DI3,4,5(INV) See selection DI1,2,3(INV). -13

1202 CONST Defines constant speed (drive output frequency) 1. E: 5.0 Hz
SPEED 1 U: 6.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Output frequency in Hz 1 = 0.1 Hz
SPEED 2 U: 12.0 Hz
SPEED 3 U: 18.0 Hz
SPEED 4 U: 24.0 Hz
SPEED 5 U: 30.0 Hz
SPEED 6 U: 48.0 Hz
SPEED 7 Constant speed 7 is also used with fault functions (3001 U: 60.0 Hz
AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3002 PANEL COMM ERR and 3018
COMM FAULT FUNC).

All parameters
1209 TIMED MODE Selects timed function activated speed. Timed function can CS1/2/3/4
SEL be used to change between the external reference and
constant speeds when parameter 1201 CONST SPEED
SEL selection is TIMED FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4 or
TIMED FUN1&2.
EXT/CS1/2/3 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED 1
FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4, this timed function selects an
external speed reference or constant speed. 1 = timed
function active, 0 = timed function inactive.
Timed function 1…4 Operation
0 External reference
1 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST
SPEED 1
When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED

FUN1&2, timed functions 1 and 2 select an external speed
reference or constant speed. 1 = timed function active, 0 =
timed function inactive.
Timed Timed Operation
function 1 function 2
0 0 External reference
1 0 Speed defined by par. 1202 CONST
SPEED 1
SPEED 2
SPEED 3
CS1/2/3/4 When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED 2

FUNC 1 … TIMED FUNC 4, this timed function selects a
constant speed. 1 = timed function active, 0 = timed
function inactive.
Timed function 1…4 Operation
0 Speed defined by parameter 1202
CONST SPEED 1
1 Speed defined by parameter 1203
CONST SPEED 2
When parameter 1201 CONST SPEED SEL = TIMED

FUN1&2, timed functions 1 and 2 select a constant speed.
1 = timed function active, 0 = timed function inactive.
Timed Timed Operation
0 0 Speed defined by parameter 1202
CONST SPEED 1
CONST SPEED 2
CONST SPEED 3
CONST SPEED 4

All parameters
13 ANALOG INPUTS Analog input signal processing
mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1. When used as a
reference, the value corresponds to the reference minimum
setting.
0…20 mA = 0…100%
4…20 mA = 20…100%
-10…10 mA = -50…50%
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external
reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of
parameter 1104 REF1 MIN.
Note: MINIMUM AI1 value must not exceed MAXIMUM AI1
value.
-100.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range. 1 = 0.1%
Example: If the minimum value for analog input is 4 mA, the
percent value for 0…20 mA range is:
(4 mA / 20 mA) · 100% = 20%
1302 MAXIMUM AI1 Defines the maximum %-value that corresponds to 100.0%
maximum mA/(V) signal for analog input AI1. When used as
a reference, the value corresponds to the reference
maximum setting.
0…20 mA = 0…100%
4…20 mA = 20…100%
-10…10 mA = -50…50%
Example: If AI1 is selected as the source for external
reference REF1, this value corresponds to the value of
parameter 1105 REF1 MAX.
-100.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range. 1 = 0.1%
Example: If the maximum value for analog input is 10 mA,
the percent value for 0…20 mA range is:
(10 mA / 20 mA) · 100% = 50%
1303 FILTER AI1 Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI1, that is, 0.1 s
the time within which 63% of a step change is reached.
% Unfiltered signal
100
63 Filtered signal
t
Time constant
0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant 1 = 0.1 s

mA/(V) signal for analog input AI2. See parameter 1301
MINIMUM AI1.
-100.0…100.0% See parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1. 1 = 0.1%
1305 MAXIMUM AI2 Defines the maximum %-value that corresponds to 100.0%
maximum mA/(V) signal for analog input AI2. See
parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1.

All parameters
-100.0…100.0% See parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1. 1 = 0.1%
1306 FILTER AI2 Defines the filter time constant for analog input AI2. See 0.1 s
parameter 1303 FILTER AI1.
14 RELAY OUTPUTS Status information indicated through relay output, and relay
operating delays.
Note: Relay outputs 2…4 are available only if the MREL
relay output extension module is connected to the drive.
See MREL-01 relay output extension module user's manual
(3AUA0000035974 [English]).
1401 RELAY Selects a drive status indicated through relay output RO 1. FAULT(-1)
OUTPUT 1 The relay energizes when the status meets the setting.
NOT SEL Not used 0
READY Ready to function: Run enable signal on, no fault, supply 1
voltage within acceptable range and emergency stop signal
off.
RUN Running: Start signal on, Run enable signal on, no active 2
fault.
FAULT(-1) Inverted fault. Relay is de-energized on a fault trip. 3
If fault is handled by autoreset, then the relay does not de-
energize.
FAULT Fault. Relay is energized on a fault trip. 4
If fault is handled by autoreset, then the relay does not
energize.
ALARM Alarm 5
REVERSED Motor rotates in reverse direction. 6
STARTED The drive has received start command. Relay is energized 7
even if Run enable signal is off. Relay is de-energized when
drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.
SUPRV1 Status according to supervision parameters 3201…3203. 8
OVER See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
UNDER
UNDER
UNDER
AT SET POINT Output frequency is equal to the reference frequency. 14
FAULT(RST) Fault. Automatic reset after the autoreset delay. See 15
parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC RESET.
FLT/ALARM Fault or alarm 16
EXT CTRL Drive is under external control. 17
REF 2 SEL External reference REF 2 is in use. 18

All parameters
CONST FREQ A constant speed is in use. See parameter group 12 19
CONSTANT SPEEDS.
REF LOSS Reference or active control location is lost. 20
OVERCURRE Alarm/Fault by overcurrent protection function 21
NT
OVERVOLTAG Alarm/Fault by overvoltage protection function 22
E
DRIVE TEMP Alarm/Fault by drive overtemperature protection function 23
UNDERVOLTA Alarm/Fault by undervoltage protection function 24
GE
AI1 LOSS Analog input AI1 signal is lost. 25
AI2 LOSS Analog input AI2 signal is lost. 26
MOTOR TEMP Alarm/Fault by motor overtemperature protection function. 27
See parameter 3005 MOT THERM PROT.
STALL Alarm/Fault by stall protection function. See parameter 3010 28
STALL FUNCTION.
PID SLEEP PID sleep function. See parameter group 40 PROCESS PID 30
SET 1 / 41 PROCESS PID SET 2.
PFC Start/stop motor in PFC control. See parameter group 81 31
PFC CONTROL. Use this option only when PFC control is
used. Selection activated/deactivated when the drive is not
running.
AUTOCHANG PFC Autochange operation is performed. Use this option 32
E only when PFC control is used.
FLUX READY Motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque. 33
USER MACRO User macro 2 is active. 34
2
COMM Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0 = de- 35
energize output, 1 = energize output.
0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 DO RO1

value (MREL) (MREL) (MREL)
0 00000 0 0 0 0 0
1 00001 0 0 0 0 1
2 00010 0 0 0 1 0
3 00011 0 0 0 1 1
4 00100 0 0 1 0 0
5…30 … … … … … …
31 11111 1 1 1 1 1

All parameters
COMM(-1) Fieldbus control signal 0134 COMM RO WORD. 0 = de- 36
energize output, 1 = energize output.
0134 Binary RO4 RO3 RO2 DO RO1

value (MREL) (MREL) (MREL)
0 00000 1 1 1 1 1
1 00001 1 1 1 1 0
2 00010 1 1 1 0 1
3 00011 1 1 1 0 0
4 00100 1 1 0 1 1
5…30 … … … … … …
31 11111 0 0 0 0 0
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed function 1 is active. See parameter group 36 TIMED 37

FUNCTIONS.
FUNCTIONS.
FUNCTIONS.
FUNCTIONS.
MNT TRIG FAN Cooling fan running time counter is triggered. See 41
parameter group 29 MAINTENANCE TRIG.
MNT TRIG Revolutions counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 42
REV MAINTENANCE TRIG.
MNT TRIG Run time counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 43
RUN MAINTENANCE TRIG.
MNT TRIG MWh counter is triggered. See parameter group 29 44
MWH MAINTENANCE TRIG.
START DELAY Start delay is active. 46
USER LOAD C Alarm/Fault from the user load curve. See parameter group 47
37 USER LOAD CURVE.
PIPE FILL Pipe fill (Precharge) function is active. See parameters 53
4421…4426.
PROFILE Actual signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT, 0132 PID 1 54
HIGH DEVIATION or 0133 PID 2 DEVIATION has stayed over
limit 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM longer than the time defined
by parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY. See parameters
4418…4420.
INLET PROT Pump inlet protection function is active or has caused the 55
drive to trip. See parameters 4401…4408.
OUTLET PROT Pump outlet protection function is active or has caused the 56
drive to trip. See parameters 4409…4416.
MOT. HEATING Energizes relay when motor heating is active. See 69
parameter 2115 MOT. HEATING SEL.
1402 RELAY See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1. Available only if NOT SEL
OUTPUT 2 the MREL relay output extension module is connected to
the drive.

All parameters
the drive.
1404 RO 1 ON Defines the operation delay for relay output RO 1. 0.0 s
DELAY
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time. The figure below illustrates the operation (on) 1 = 0.1 s
and release (off) delays for relay output RO.
Control event
Relay status
1404 On delay 1405 Off delay
1405 RO 1 OFF Defines the release delay for relay output RO 1. 0.0 s
DELAY
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time. See the figure for parameter 1404 RO 1 ON 1 = 0.1 s
DELAY.
1406 RO 2 ON See parameter 1404 RO 1 ON DELAY. 0.0 s
DELAY
1407 RO 2 OFF See parameter 1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY. 0.0 s
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
the drive.
DELAY
DELAY
15 ANALOG Selection of the actual signals to be indicated through
OUTPUTS analog output and output signal processing.
1501 AO1 Connects a drive signal to analog output AO. 103
CONTENT SEL
x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 =
0102 SPEED.

All parameters
1502 AO1 Defines the minimum value for the signal selected with -
CONTENT MIN parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL.
AO minimum and maximum correspond to the 1504
MINIMUM AO1 and 1505 MAXIMUM AO1 settings as
follows:
AO (mA) AO (mA)
1505 1505
1504 1504
1502 1503 AO 1503 1502 AO

content content
x…x Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 -

CONTENT SEL setting.
1503 AO1 Defines the maximum value for the signal selected with -
CONTENT parameter 1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL. See the figure for
MAX parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
x…x Setting range depends on the parameter 1501 AO1 -
CONTENT SEL setting.
1504 MINIMUM AO1 Defines the minimum value for the analog output signal AO. 0.0 mA
See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
0.0…20.0 mA Minimum value 1=
0.1 mA
1505 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum value for the analog output signal AO. 20.0 mA
AO1 See the figure for parameter 1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN.
0.0…20.0 mA Maximum value 1=
0.1 mA
1506 FILTER AO1 Defines the filter time constant for analog output AO, ie the 0.1 s
time within which 63% of a step change is reached. See the
figure for parameter 1303 FILTER AI1.
16 SYSTEM Parameter view, Run enable, parameter lock etc.
CONTROLS
1601 RUN ENABLE Selects a source for the external Run enable signal. NOT SEL
NOT SEL Allows the drive to start without an external Run enable 0
signal.
DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Run 1
enable. If Run enable signal is switched off, the drive does
not start or coasts to stop if it is running.

All parameters
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for inverted Run enable 7
signal (Run disable), ie Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD
1 bit 6 (with ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 3). The
Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the
embedded fieldbus (Modbus) to the drive. For the Control
word bits, see sections DCU communication profile on page
307 and ABB drives communication profile on page 302.
DI1(INV) External signal required through inverted digital input DI1. 0 -1
= Run enable. If Run enable signal is switched on, the drive
does not start or coasts to stop if it is running.
1602 PARAMETER Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents OPEN
LOCK parameter changing from the control panel.
LOCKED Parameter values cannot be changed from the control 0
panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid code to
parameter 1603 PASS CODE.
The lock does not prevent parameter changes made by
macros or fieldbus.
OPEN The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 1
NOT SAVED Parameter changes from the control panel are not stored 2
into the permanent memory. To store changed parameter
values, set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE value to SAVE....
1603 PASS CODE Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see 0
parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK).
0…65535 Pass code. Setting 358 opens the lock. The value reverts 1=1
back to 0 automatically.
1604 FAULT RESET Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal KEYPAD
SEL resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no
longer exists.
KEYPAD Fault reset only from the control panel 0
DI1 Reset through digital input DI1 (reset on the rising edge of 1
DI1) or from the control panel
START/STOP Reset along with the stop signal received through a digital 7
input, or from the control panel.
Note:
• Do not use this option when start, stop and direction
commands are received through fieldbus communication.
• This option does not work with control panel, when
parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS = KEYPAD.

All parameters
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the fault reset signal, ie 8
Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 4 (with ABB drives
profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 7). The Control word is sent by
the fieldbus controller through the embedded fieldbus
(Modbus) to the drive. For the Control word bits, see
sections DCU communication profile on page 307 and ABB
drives communication profile on page 302.
DI1(INV) Reset through inverted digital input DI1 (reset on the falling -1
edge of DI1) or from the control panel
1605 USER PAR Enables the change of the User parameter set through a NOT SEL
SET CHG digital input. See parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO. The
change is only allowed when the drive is stopped. During
the change, the drive does not start.
Note: Always save the User parameter set with parameter
9902 after changing any parameter setting, or reperforming
the motor identification. The last settings saved by the user
are loaded into use whenever the power is switched off and
on again or the parameter 9902 setting is changed. Any
unsaved changes are lost.
Note: The value of this parameter is not included in the
User parameter sets. A setting once made remains despite
User parameter set change.
Note: Selection of User parameter set 2 can be supervised
through relay outputs RO 1…4 and digital output DO. See
parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 … 1403 RELAY
OUTPUT 3, 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 and 1805 DO
SIGNAL.
NOT SEL User parameter set change is not possible through a digital 0
input. Parameter sets can be changed only from the control
panel.
DI1 User parameter set control through digital input DI1. Falling 1
edge of digital input DI1: User parameter set 1 is loaded into
use. Rising edge of digital input DI1: User parameter set 2 is
loaded into use.
DI1(INV) User parameter set control through inverted digital input -1
DI1. Falling edge of inverted digital input DI1: User
parameter set 2 is loaded into use. Rising edge of inverted
digital input DI1: User parameter set 1 is loaded into use.

All parameters
1606 LOCAL LOCK Disables entering the local control mode or selects the NOT SEL
source for the local control mode lock signal. When local
lock is active, entering the local control mode is disabled
(LOC/REM key of the panel).
NOT SEL Local control is allowed. 0
DI1 Local control mode lock signal through digital input DI1. 1
Rising edge of digital input DI1: Local control disabled.
Falling edge of digital input DI1: Local control allowed.
ON Local control is disabled. 7
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the local lock, ie Control 8
word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 14. The Control word is
sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded
see section DCU communication profile on page 307.
Note: This setting applies only for the DCU profile.
DI1(INV) Local lock through inverted digital input DI1. Rising edge of -1
inverted digital input DI1: Local control allowed. Falling edge
of inverted digital input DI1: Local control disabled.
1607 PARAM SAVE Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent DONE
memory.
Note: A new parameter value of a standard macro is saved
automatically when changed from the panel but not when
altered through a fieldbus connection.
DONE Saving completed 0
SAVE... Saving in progress 1

All parameters
1608 START Selects the source for the Start enable 1 signal. NOT SEL
ENABLE 1 Note: Functionality of the Start enable signal is different
from the Run enable signal.
Example: External damper control application using Start
enable and Run enable. Motor can start only after the
damper is fully open.
Drive started
Start/Stop
command
(group 10)
Start enable
signals
(1608 and 1609)
Relay energized
Relay Started
de- output status
energized (group 14)
Damper open
Damper Damper
closed closed Damper
status
Damper Damper
opening closing
time time
Run enable signal
from the damper end
switch when the
Motor damper is fully
speed opened. (1601)
Motor
status
Acceleration Deceleration
time (2202) time (2203)
NOT SEL Start enable signal is on. 0

DI1 External signal required through digital input DI1. 1 = Start 1
enable. If Start enable signal is switched off, the drive does
not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and alarm START
ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for the inverted Start 7
enable (Start disable) signal, ie Control word 0302 FB CMD
WORD 2 bit 18 (bit 19 for Start enable 2). The Control word
is sent by the fieldbus controller through the embedded
see section DCU communication profile on page 307.
DI1(INV) External signal required through inverted digital input DI1. 0 -1
= Start enable. If Start enable signal is switched off, the
drive does not start or it coasts to stop if it is running and
alarm START ENABLE 1 MISSING is activated.

All parameters
1609 START Selects the source for the Start enable 2 signal. See NOT SEL
ENABLE 2 parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1.
See parameter 1608 START ENABLE 1.
1610 DISPLAY Activates/deactivates alarms OVERCURRENT (2001), NO
ALARMS OVERVOLTAGE (2002), UNDERVOLTAGE (2003) and
DEVICE OVERTEMP (2009). For more information, see
chapter Fault tracing on page 311.
NO Alarms are inactive. 0
YES Alarms are active. 1
1611 PARAMETER Selects the parameter view, ie which parameters are shown SHORT
VIEW on the control panel. VIEW
Note: For embedded modbus, LONG VIEW (3) must be
selected.
FLASHDROP Shows the FlashDrop parameter list. Does not include the 1
short parameter list. Parameters which are hidden by the
FlashDrop device are not visible.
FlashDrop is designed for fast copying of parameters to
unpowered drives. It allows easy customization of the
parameter list, eg selected parameters can be hidden. For
more information, see MFDT-01 FlashDrop user’s manual
(3AFE68591074 [English]).
FlashDrop parameter values are activated by setting
parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO to 31 (LOAD FD SET).
SHORT VIEW Shows only a subset of all signals and parameters. See 2
section Actual signals in the short parameter view on page
167 and Parameters in the short parameter view on page
167.
LONG VIEW Shows all signals (section All actual signals on page 170) 3
and parameters (this table, starting on page 177).
1612 FAN Selects the heat sink fan On/Off control for forcing the AUTO
CONTROL cooling fan of the drive constantly On.
AUTO Automatic fan control 0
ON Fan is always On 1
18 FREQ IN & TRAN Frequency input and transistor output signal processing.
OUT
1801 FREQ INPUT Defines the minimum input value when DI5 is used as a 0 Hz
MIN frequency input. See section Frequency input on page 127.
0…16000 Hz Minimum frequency 1 = 1 Hz
1802 FREQ INPUT Defines the maximum input value when DI5 is used as a 1000 Hz
MAX frequency input. See section Frequency input on page 127.
0…16000 Hz Maximum frequency 1 = 1 Hz
1803 FILTER FREQ Defines the filter time constant for frequency input, that is, 0.1 s
IN the time within which 63% of a step change is reached. See
section Frequency input on page 127.

All parameters
1804 TO MODE Selects the operation mode for the transistor output TO. DIGITAL
See section Transistor output on page 128.
DIGITAL Transistor output is used as a digital output DO. 0
FREQUENCY Transistor output is used as a frequency output FO. 1
1805 DO SIGNAL Selects a drive status indicated through digital output DO. FAULT(-1)
See parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1806 DO ON DELAY Defines the operation delay for digital output DO. 0.0 s
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1807 DO OFF Defines the release delay for digital output DO. 0.0 s
DELAY
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1808 FO CONTENT Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output 104
SEL FO.
x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 =
0102 SPEED.
1809 FO CONTENT Defines the minimum frequency output FO signal value. -
MIN Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL.
FO minimum and maximum correspond to 1811 MINIMUM
FO and 1812 MAXIMUM FO settings as follows:
FO FO
1812 1812
1811 1811
1809 1810 FO 1809 1810 FO

content content
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT -

SEL setting.
1810 FO CONTENT Defines the maximum frequency output FO signal value. -
MAX Signal is selected with parameter 1808 FO CONTENT SEL.
See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT MIN.
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 1808 FO CONTENT -
SEL setting.
1811 MINIMUM FO Defines the minimum value for frequency output FO. 10 Hz
10…16000 Hz Minimum frequency. See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 1 = 1 Hz
MIN.
1812 MAXIMUM FO Defines the maximum value for frequency output FO. 1000 Hz
10…16000 Hz Maximum frequency. See parameter 1809 FO CONTENT 1 = 1 Hz
MIN.
1813 FILTER FO Defines the filter time constant for frequency output FO, ie 0.1 s
the time within which 63% of a step change is reached.

All parameters
1814 DI1 ON DELAY Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of 0.0 s
the digital input DI to the ON state.
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1815 DI1 OFF Defines the delay from the signal change to the change of 0.0 s
DELAY the digital input DI to the OFF state.
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
1816 DI2 ON DELAY See parameter 1814 DI1 ON DELAY. 0.0 s
1817 DI2 OFF See parameter 1815 DI1 OFF DELAY. 0.0 s
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
DELAY
20 LIMITS Drive operation limits
2003 MAX Defines the allowed maximum motor current. 1.6 · I2N
CURRENT
0.0…1.6 · I2N A Current 1 = 0.1 A
2005 OVERVOLT Activates or deactivates the overvoltage control of the ENABLE
CTRL intermediate DC link.
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise
to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage
from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller
automatically decreases the braking torque.
DISABLE Overvoltage control deactivated 0
ENABLE Overvoltage control activated 1
2006 UNDERVOLT Activates or deactivates the undervoltage control of the ENABLE(
CTRL intermediate DC link. TIME)
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the
undervoltage controller automatically decreases the motor
speed in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By
decreasing the motor speed, the inertia of the load causes
regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC link
charged and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor
coasts to stop. This acts as a power-loss ride-through
functionality in systems with a high inertia, such as a
centrifuge or a fan. See section Power loss ride-through on
page 129.
DISABLE Undervoltage control deactivated 0
ENABLE(TIME) Undervoltage control activated. The undervoltage control is 1
active for 500 ms.
ENABLE Undervoltage control activated. No operation time limit. 2

All parameters
2007 MINIMUM Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. 0.0 Hz
FREQ A positive (or zero) minimum frequency value defines two
ranges, one positive and one negative.
A negative minimum frequency value defines one speed
range.
Note: MINIMUM FREQ < MAXIMUM FREQ.
f
f 2007 value is > 0
2008 value is < 0 2008
2008 Allowed
Allowed frequency range
frequency range 2007
t t
0 0
-(2007)
Allowed
2007 frequency range
-(2008)
-500.0…500.0 Hz Minimum frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz

2008 MAXIMUM Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency. E: 50.0 Hz
FREQ U: 60.0 Hz
0.0…500.0 Hz Maximum frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
21 START/STOP Start and stop modes of the motor
2101 START Selects the motor starting method. AUTO
FUNCTION
AUTO The drive starts the motor instantly from zero frequency. If 1
flying start is required, use selection SCAN START.
DC MAGN The drive pre-magnetizes the motor with DC current before 2
the start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter
2103 DC MAGN TIME.
Note: Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not
possible when DC MAGN is selected.
WARNING! The drive starts after the set pre-
magnetizing time has passed even if the motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full
break-away torque is essential, always ensure that the
constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.

All parameters
TORQ BOOST Torque boost should be selected if a high break-away 4
torque is required.
The drive pre-magnetizes the motor with DC current before
the start. The pre-magnetizing time is defined by parameter
2103 DC MAGN TIME.
Torque boost is applied at start. Torque boost is stopped
when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when it is equal to
the reference value. See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST
CURR.
Note: Starting the drive connected to a rotating motor is not
possible when TORQ BOOST is selected.
WARNING! The drive starts after the set pre-
magnetizing time has passed although the motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications where a full
break-away torque is essential, always ensure that the
constant magnetizing time is long enough to allow
generation of full magnetization and torque.
SCAN START Frequency scanning flying start (starting the drive 6
connected to a rotating motor). Based on frequency
scanning (interval 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ…2007 MINIMUM
FREQ) to identify the frequency. If frequency identification
fails, DC magnetization is used (see selection DC MAGN).
SCAN + Combines scanning start (starting the drive connected to a 7
BOOST rotating motor) and torque boost. See selections SCAN
START and TORQ BOOST. If frequency identification fails,
torque boost is used.
2102 STOP Selects the motor stop function. COAST
FUNCTION
COAST Stop by cutting off the motor power supply. The motor 1
coasts to stop.
RAMP Stop along a ramp. See parameter group 22 2
ACCEL/DECEL.
2103 DC MAGN Defines the pre-magnetizing time. See parameter 2101 0.30 s
TIME START FUNCTION. After the start command, the drive
automatically pre-magnetizes the motor for the defined time.
0.00…10.00 s
Magnetizing time. Set this value long enough to allow full 1 = 0.01 s
motor magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor
excessively.
2104 DC HOLD CTL Enables motor heating function in which direct current (DC) NOT SEL
is injected into the motor to keep it warm in low
temperatures.
The amount of current to use for motor heating is defined in
parameter 2114 HEATING CURR REF [%].
NOT SEL Motor heating is disabled 0
MOT HEATING Motor heating is enabled and can be activated by parameter 3
2115. When motor heating is active, drive shows the alarm
20381) MOTOR HEATING.

All parameters
2106 DC CURR REF Defines the DC brake current. If parameter 2107 DC 30%
BRAKE TIME is not zero, the DC brake current is injected to
the motor during the stop.
If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to COAST, DC
braking is applied after the start command is removed. If
parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is set to RAMP, DC
braking is applied after the ramp.
0…100% Value in percent of the nominal motor current (parameter 1 = 1%
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR)
2107 DC BRAKE Defines the DC brake time. 0.0 s
TIME
0.0…250.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2108 START INHIBIT Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. If the drive is not OFF
actively started and running, the Start inhibit function
ignores a pending start command in any of the following
situations and a new start command is required:
• a fault is reset.
• Run enable signal activates while the start command is
active. See parameter 1601 RUN ENABLE.
• the control mode changes from local to remote.
• the external control mode switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or
from EXT2 to EXT1.
OFF Disabled 0
ON Enabled 1
2109 EMERG STOP Selects the source for the external emergency stop NOT SEL
SEL command.
The drive cannot be restarted before the emergency stop
command is reset.
Note: The installation must include emergency stop devices
and any other safety equipment that may be needed.
Pressing the stop key on the drive’s control panel does
NOT:
• generate an emergency stop of the motor
• separate the drive from dangerous potential.
NOT SEL Emergency stop function is not selected 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = stop along the emergency stop ramp. 1
See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME. 0 = emergency
stop command reset.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI. 0 = stop along the emergency stop -1
ramp. See parameter 2208 EMERG DEC TIME. 1 =
emergency stop command reset

All parameters
2110 TORQ BOOST Defines the maximum supplied current during torque boost. 100%
CURR See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.
15…300% Value in percent 1 = 1%
2112 ZERO SPEED Defines the delay for the Zero speed delay function. The 0.0 s
DELAY function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick
restarting is essential. During the delay the drive knows
accurately the rotor position.
No Zero speed delay With Zero speed delay

Speed Speed
Speed controller Speed controller

switched off: Motor remains live. Motor is
coasts to stop. decelerated to true 0
speed.
Zero speed Zero speed
t t
Delay
No Zero speed delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an internal
limit (called Zero speed), the speed controller is switched
off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the motor coasts
to standstill.
With Zero speed delay
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When the actual motor speed falls below an internal
limit (called Zero speed), the zero speed delay function
activates. During the delay the functions keeps the speed
controller live: The inverter modulates, motor is magnetized
and the drive is ready for a quick restart.
0.0 = NOT SEL Delay time. If parameter value is set to zero, Zero speed 1 = 0.1 s
0.0…60.0 s delay function is disabled.
2113 START DELAY Defines the start delay. 0.00 s
After the conditions for start have been fulfilled, the drive
waits until the delay has elapsed and then starts the motor.
Start delay can be used with all start methods. Enabling
start delay does not prevent modulation.
If start delay is zero, the delay is disabled. During the start
delay, alarm START DELAY is shown.
0.0…60.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.01 s
2114 HEATING Defines the amount of current to use for motor heating 0.0%
CURR REF [%] relative to the nominal current of the motor.
0.0…30.0 % Percent of heating current 1 = 0.1 %
2115 MOT. HEATING Selects the source for controlling motor heating. OFF
SEL
OFF Motor heating inactive. Can also be used to switch off the 0
injection during heating.

All parameters
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1
1 = Motor heating is On.
0 = Motor heating is Off.
COMM Serial communication as the control for motor heating. 7
ON Motor heating active (during stop) 8
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI. 0 = Motor heating On 1 = Motor -1
heating Off.
22 ACCEL/DECEL Acceleration and deceleration times
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal DI5
SEL that selects between the two ramp pairs,
acceleration/deceleration pair 1 and 2.
Ramp pair 1 is defined by parameters 2202…2204.
Ramp pair 2 is defined by parameters 2205…2207.
NOT SEL Ramp pair 1 is used. 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = ramp pair 2, 0 = ramp pair 1. 1
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for ramp pair 1/2 selection, 7
ie Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 10. The Control
word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the
word bits, see section DCU communication profile on page
307.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = ramp pair 2, 1 = ramp pair 1. -1

All parameters
2202 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 1, that is, the time required for 5.0 s
TIME 1 the speed to change from zero to the speed defined by
parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
• If the speed reference increases faster than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed follows the
acceleration rate.
• If the speed reference increases slower than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed follows the reference
signal.
• If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive
automatically prolongs the acceleration in order not to
exceed the drive operating limits.
Actual acceleration time depends on parameter 2204 RAMP
SHAPE 1 setting.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2203 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 1, that is, the time required for 5.0 s
TIME 1 the speed to change from the value defined by parameter
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ to zero.
• If the speed reference decreases slower than the set
deceleration rate, the motor speed follows the reference
signal.
• If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration
rate, the motor speed follows the deceleration rate.
• If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive
automatically prolongs the deceleration in order not to
exceed drive operating limits.
If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia
application, note that the ACS310 cannot be equipped with
a brake resistor.
Actual deceleration time depends on parameter 2204
RAMP SHAPE 1 setting.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s

All parameters
2204 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 1. 0.0 =
1 The function is deactivated during emergency stop. LINEAR
0.0 = LINEAR 0.0: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or 1 = 0.1 s
0.1…1000.0 s deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.1 … 1000.0 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal for
conveyors carrying fragile loads, or other applications where
a smooth transition is required when changing from one
speed to another. The S-curve consists of symmetrical
curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in
between.
A rule of thumb:
A suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the
acceleration ramp time is 1/5.
Speed
Linear ramp: Par. 2204 = 0 s
Max
S-curve ramp:
Par. 2204 > 0 s
t
Par. 2202 Par. 2204
2205 ACCELER Defines the acceleration time 2, that is, the time required for 60.0 s
TIME 2 the speed to change from zero to the speed defined by
parameter 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
See parameter 2202 ACCELER TIME 1.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2206 DECELER Defines the deceleration time 2, that is, the time required for 60.0 s
TIME 2 the speed to change from the value defined by parameter
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ to zero.
See parameter 2203 DECELER TIME 1.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2207 RAMP SHAPE Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp 2. 0.0 =
2 The function is deactivated during emergency stop. LINEAR
0.0 = LINEAR See parameter 2204 RAMP SHAPE 1. 1 = 0.1 s
0.1…1000.0 s
2208 EMERG DEC Defines the time within which the drive is stopped if an 1.0 s
TIME emergency stop is activated. See parameter 2109 EMERG
STOP SEL.
0.0…1800.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
2209 RAMP INPUT 0 Defines the control for forcing the speed to zero with the NOT SEL
currently used deceleration ramp (see parameters 2203
DECELER TIME 1 and 2206 DECELER TIME 2).
NOT SEL Not selected 0

All parameters
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = ramp input is forced to zero. Ramp 1
output ramps to zero according to the used ramp time.
COMM Fieldbus interface as the source for forcing ramp input to 7
zero, ie Control word 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 (with
ABB drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit 6). The Control
word is sent by the fieldbus controller through the
word bits, see sections DCU communication profile on page
307 and ABB drives communication profile on page 302.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = ramp input is forced to zero. -1
Ramp output ramps to zero according to the used ramp
time.
25 CRITICAL Speed (output frequency) bands within which the drive is not
SPEEDS allowed to operate.
2501 CRIT SPEED Activates/deactivates the critical speeds function. The OFF
SEL critical speed function avoids specific output frequency
ranges.
Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 18 to 23 Hz
and 46 to 52 Hz. To make the drive to jump over the
vibration frequency ranges:
• Activate the critical speeds function.
• Set the critical frequency ranges as in the figure below.
foutput (Hz)
1 Par. 2502 = 18 Hz
52 2 Par. 2503 = 23 Hz
46 3 Par. 2504 = 46 Hz
23 4 Par. 2505 = 52 Hz
18
freference (Hz)
1 2 3 4
OFF Inactive 0
ON Active 1
2502 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the minimum limit for critical output frequency range 0.0 Hz
LO 1
0.0…500.0 Hz Limit in Hz. The value cannot be above the maximum 1 = 0.1 Hz
(parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI).

All parameters
2503 CRIT SPEED 1 Defines the maximum limit for critical output frequency 0.0 Hz
HI range 1
0.0…500.0 Hz Limit in Hz. The value cannot be below the minimum 1 = 0.1 Hz
(parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO).
2504 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO. 0.0 Hz
LO
0.0…500.0 Hz See parameter 2502. 1 = 0.1 Hz
2505 CRIT SPEED 2 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI. 0.0 Hz
HI
2506 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO. 0.0 Hz
LO
2507 CRIT SPEED 3 See parameter 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI. 0.0 Hz
HI
26 MOTOR Motor control variables
CONTROL
2603 IR COMP Defines the output voltage boost at zero speed (IR Type
VOLT compensation). The function is useful in applications with a dependent
high break-away torque when vector control cannot be
applied.
To prevent overheating, set IR compensation voltage as low
as possible.
The figure below illustrates the IR compensation.
Typical IR compensation values:
PN (kW) 0.37 0.75 2.2 4.0 7.5
200…240 V units
IR comp (V) 8.4 7.7 5.6 8.4 N/A
380…480 V units
IR comp (V) 14 14 5.6 8.4 7
Motor
voltage
A A = IR compensated
B = No compensation
2603
B
f (Hz)
2604
0.0…100.0 V Voltage boost 1 = 0.1 V

All parameters
2604 IR COMP Defines the frequency at which the IR compensation is 0 V. 80%
FREQ See the figure for parameter 2603 IR COMP VOLT
Note: If parameter 2605 U/F RATIO is set to USER
DEFINED, this parameter is not active. The IR
compensation frequency is set by parameter 2610 USER
DEFINED U1.
0…100% Value in percent of the motor frequency 1 = 1%
2605 U/F RATIO Selects the voltage to frequency (U/f) ratio below the field SQUARE
weakening point. D
LINEAR Linear ratio for constant torque applications. 1
SQUARED Squared ratio for centrifugal pump and fan applications. 2
With squared U/f ratio the noise level is lower for most
operating frequencies.
USER Custom ratio defined by parameters 2610…2618. See 3
DEFINED section Custom U/f ratio on page 133.
2606 SWITCHING Defines the switching frequency of the drive. Higher 4 kHz
FREQ switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise. See
also parameter 2607 SWITCH FREQ CTRL and section
Switching frequency derating, I2N and ILD (= all currents)
on page 339.
In multimotor systems, do not change the switching
frequency from the default value.
4 kHz 1 = 1 kHz
8 kHz
12 kHz
16 kHz
2607 SWITCH FREQ Activates the switching frequency control. When active, the ON
CTRL selection of parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ is limited
when the drive internal temperature increases. See the
figure below. This function allows the highest possible
switching frequency at a specific operation point.
Higher switching frequency results in lower acoustic noise,
but higher internal losses.
fsw limit
16 kHz
Drive
temperature
4 kHz
T
80…100 °C * 100…120 °C *
* Temperature depends on the drive output frequency.

ON Active 1

All parameters
ON (LOAD) Switching frequency can adapt to loading instead of limiting 2
the output current. This allows maximum loading with all
switching frequency selections. The drive automatically
decreases the actual switching frequency if loading is too
high for the selected switching frequency.
2608 SLIP COMP Defines the slip gain for the motor slip compensation 0%
RATIO control. 100% means full slip compensation, 0% means no
slip compensation. Other values can be used if a static
speed error is detected despite the full slip compensation.
Example: 35 Hz constant speed reference is given to the
drive. Despite the full slip compensation (SLIP COMP
RATIO = 100%), a manual tachometer measurement from
the motor axis gives a speed value of 34 Hz. The static
speed error is 35 Hz - 34 Hz = 1 Hz. To compensate the
error, the slip gain should be increased.
0…200% Slip gain 1 = 1%
2609 NOISE Enables the noise smoothing function. Noise smoothing DISABLE
SMOOTHING distributes the acoustic motor noise over a range of
frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in
lower peak noise intensity. A random component with an
average of 0 Hz is added to the switching frequency set by
parameter 2606 SWITCHING FREQ.
Note: Parameter has no effect if parameter 2606
SWITCHING FREQ is set to 16 kHz.
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
2610 USER Defines the first voltage point of the custom U/f curve at the 19% of
DEFINED U1 frequency defined by parameter 2611 USER DEFINED F1. UN
See section Custom U/f ratio on page 133.
0…120% of UN V Voltage 1=1V
2611 USER Defines the first frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 10.0 Hz
DEFINED F1
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2612 USER Defines the second voltage point of the custom U/f curve at 38% of
DEFINED U2 the frequency defined by parameter 2613 USER DEFINED UN
F2. See section Custom U/f ratio on page 133.
2613 USER Defines the second frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 20.0 Hz
DEFINED F2
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2614 USER Defines the third voltage point of the custom U/f curve at the 47.5% of
DEFINED U3 frequency defined by parameter 2615 USER DEFINED F3. UN
See section Custom U/f ratio on page 133.
2615 USER Defines the third frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 25.0 Hz
DEFINED F3
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2616 USER Defines the fourth voltage point of the custom U/f curve at 76% of
DEFINED U4 the frequency defined by parameter 2617 USER DEFINED UN
F4. See section Custom U/f ratio on page 133.

All parameters
2617 USER Defines the fourth frequency point of the custom U/f curve. 40.0 Hz
DEFINED F4
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
2618 FW VOLTAGE Defines the voltage of the U/f curve when frequency is equal 95% of
to or exceeds the nominal motor frequency (9907 MOTOR UN
NOM FREQ). See section Custom U/f ratio on page 133.
2619 DC Enables or disables the DC voltage stabilizer. The DC DISABLE
STABILIZER stabilizer is used to prevent possible voltage oscillations in
the drive DC bus caused by motor load or weak supply
network. In case of voltage variation, the drive tunes the
frequency reference to stabilize the DC bus voltage and
therefore the load torque oscillation.
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
29 MAINTENANCE Maintenance triggers
TRIG
2901 COOLING FAN Defines the trigger point for the drive cooling fan run time 0.0 kh
TRIG counter. Value is compared to parameter 2902 COOLING
FAN ACT value.
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger is 1 = 0.1 kh
disabled.
2902 COOLING FAN Defines the actual value for the cooling fan run time counter. 0.0 kh
ACT When parameter 2901 COOLING FAN TRIG has been set
to a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual
value of the counter exceeds the value defined by
parameter 2901, a maintenance notice is displayed on the
panel.
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1 kh
2903 REVOLUTION Defines the trigger point for the motor revolution counter. 0 Mrev
TRIG Value is compared to parameter 2904 REVOLUTION ACT
value.
0…65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions. If parameter value is set to zero, the 1 =
trigger is disabled. 1 Mrev
2904 REVOLUTION Defines the actual value for the motor revolution counter. 0 Mrev
ACT When parameter 2903 REVOLUTION TRIG has been set to
a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual value
of the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter
2903, a maintenance notice is displayed on the panel.
0…65535 Mrev Millions of revolutions. Parameter is reset by setting it to 1=
zero. 1 Mrev
2905 RUN TIME Defines the trigger point for the drive run time counter. Value 0.0 kh
TRIG is compared to parameter 2906 RUN TIME ACT value.
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger is 1 = 0.1 kh
disabled.

All parameters
2906 RUN TIME Defines the actual value for the drive run time counter. 0.0 kh
ACT When parameter 2905 RUN TIME TRIG has been set to a
non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual value of
the counter exceeds the value defined by parameter 2905, a
maintenance notice is displayed on the panel.
0.0…6553.5 kh Time. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1 = 0.1 kh
2907 USER MWh Defines the trigger point for the drive power consumption 0.0 MWh
TRIG counter. Value is compared to parameter 2908 USER MWh
ACT value.
0.0…6553.5 Megawatt hours. If parameter value is set to zero, the trigger 1 =
MWh is disabled. 0.1 MWh
2908 USER MWh Defines the actual value of the drive power consumption 0.0 MWh
ACT counter. When parameter 2907 USER MWh TRIG has been
set to a non zero value, the counter starts. When the actual
value of the counter exceeds the value defined by
parameter 2907, a maintenance notice is displayed on the
panel.
0.0…6553.5 Megawatt hours. Parameter is reset by setting it to zero. 1=
MWh 0.1 MWh
30 FAULT Programmable protection functions
FUNCTIONS
3001 AI<MIN Defines the drive response if the analog input (AI) signal NOT SEL
FUNCTION drops below the fault limits and AI is used
• as the active reference source (group 11 REFERENCE
SELECT)
• as the process or external PID controllers' feedback or
setpoint source (group 40 PROCESS PID SET 1,
41 PROCESS PID SET 2 or 42 EXT / TRIM PID) and the
corresponding PID controller is active.
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the
fault limits.
NOT SEL Protection is inactive. 0
FAULT The drive trips on fault AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS and the motor 1
coasts to stop. Fault limit is defined by parameter 3021 AI1
FAULT LIMIT / 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT.
CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS and sets 2
the speed to the value defined by parameter 1208 CONST
SPEED 7. Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 AI1
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case the analog input signal is lost.
LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm AI1 LOSS / AI2 LOSS and 3
freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating at.
The speed is determined considering the average speed
and time. Alarm limit is defined by parameter 3021 AI1
operation in case the analog input signal is lost.

All parameters
3002 PANEL COMM Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel FAULT
ERR communication break.
Note: When either of the two external control locations are
active, and start, stop and/or direction are through the
control panel – 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS / 1002 EXT2
COMMANDS = 8 (KEYPAD) – the drive follows the speed
reference according to the configuration of the external
control locations, instead of the value of the last speed or
parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
FAULT Drive trips on fault PANEL LOSS and the motor coasts to 1
stop.
CONST SP 7 The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and sets the 2
speed to the speed defined by parameter 1208 CONST
SPEED 7.
operation in case of a panel communication break.
LAST SPEED The drive generates alarm PANEL LOSS and freezes the 3
speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed is
determined considering the average speed and time.
operation in case of a panel communication break.
3003 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 1 signal. NOT SEL
FAULT 1
DI1 External fault indication through digital input DI1. 1: Fault 1
trip (EXT FAULT 1). Motor coasts to stop. 0: No external
fault.
DI1(INV) External fault indication through inverted digital input DI1. 0: -1
Fault trip (EXT FAULT 1). Motor coasts to stop. 1: No
external fault.
3004 EXTERNAL Selects an interface for an external fault 2 signal. NOT SEL
FAULT 2
See parameter 3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1.
3005 MOT THERM Selects how the drive reacts when the motor FAULT
PROT overtemperature is detected.

All parameters
FAULT The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP when the 1
temperature exceeds 110 °C, and the motor coasts to stop.
Note: Because motor thermal protection has memory
retention, do not shut down the drive when a MOT
OVERTEMP fault occurs. Shutting down the drive does not
reset the fault. The drive resets the fault as soon as the
motor temperature has lowered enough.
ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMP when the motor 2
temperature exceeds 90 °C.
3006 MOT THERM Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal 500 s
TIME model, that is, the time within which the motor temperature
has reached 63% of the nominal temperature with steady
load.
For thermal protection according to UL requirements for
NEMA class motors, use the rule of thumb: Motor thermal
time = 35 · t6. t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor
manufacturer as the time the motor can safely operate at six
times its rated current.
Thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class
20 trip curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.
Motor load
Temp. rise
100%
63%
t
}
Par. 3006
256…9999 s Time constant 1=1s

All parameters
3007 MOT LOAD Defines the load curve together with parameters 3008 100%
CURVE ZERO SPEED LOAD and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ.
With the default value 100%, motor overload protection is
functioning when the constant current exceeds 127% of the
parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR value.
The default overloadability is at the same level as what
motor manufacturers typically allow below 30 °C (86 °F)
ambient temperature and below 1000 m (3300 ft) altitude.
When the ambient temperature exceeds 30 °C (86 °F) or
the installation altitude is over 1000 m (3300 ft), decrease
the parameter 3007 value according to the motor
manufacturer’s recommendation.
Example: If the constant protection level needs to be 115%
of the nominal motor current, set parameter 3007 value to
91% (= 115/127·100%).
Output current relative (%) to

9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
150
Par. 3007 100 =

127%
Par. 3008 50
f
Par. 3009
50.…150% Allowed continuous motor load relative to the nominal motor 1 = 1%
current
3008 ZERO SPEED Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 70%
LOAD LOAD CURVE and 3009 BREAK POINT FREQ.
25.…150% Allowed continuous motor load at zero speed in percent of 1 = 1%
the nominal motor current

All parameters
3009 BREAK POINT Defines the load curve together with parameters 3007 MOT 35 Hz
FREQ LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD.
Example: Thermal protection trip times when parameters
3006…3008 have default values.
IO = Output current
IN = Nominal motor current
fO = Output frequency
fBRK = Break point frequency
IO/IN A = Trip time
A
3.5
3.0 60 s
2.5 90 s
2.0
180 s
1.5 300 s
600 s
1.0 ∞
0.5
fO/fBRK
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
1…250 Hz Drive output frequency at 100% load 1 = 1 Hz

3010 STALL Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The NOT SEL
FUNCTION protection wakes up if the drive has operated in a stall
region (see the figure below) longer than the time set by
parameter 3012 STALL TIME.
Current (A)
Stall region
0.95 · User defined limit
User defined limit =

2003 MAX CURRENT f
Par. 3011

FAULT The drive trips on fault MOTOR STALL and the motor 1
coasts to stop.
ALARM The drive generates alarm MOTOR STALL. 2
3011 STALL Defines the frequency limit for the stall function. See 20.0 Hz
FREQUENCY parameter 3010 STALL FUNCTION.

All parameters
0.5…50.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
3012 STALL TIME Defines the time for the stall function. See parameter 3010 20 s
STALL FUNCTION.
10…400 s Time 1=1s
3016 SUPPLY Selects how the drive reacts to supply phase loss, ie when FAULT
PHASE DC voltage ripple is excessive.
FAULT The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE and the motor 0
coasts to stop when the DC voltage ripple exceeds 14% of
the nominal DC voltage.
LIMIT/ALARM Drive output current is limited and alarm INPUT PHASE 1
LOSS is generated when the DC voltage ripple exceeds
14% of the nominal DC voltage.
There is a 10 s delay between the activation of the alarm
and the output current limitation. The current is limited until
the DC voltage ripple drops under the ripple limit.
ALARM The drive generates alarm INPUT PHASE LOSS when the 2
DC ripple exceeds 14% of the nominal DC voltage.
3017 EARTH FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when an earth (ground) fault is ENABLE
detected in the motor or the motor cable.
Note: Disabling earth (ground) fault may void the warranty.
DISABLE No action 0
ENABLE The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT. 1
3018 COMM FAULT Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication NOT SEL
FUNC break. The time delay is defined by parameter 3019 COMM
FAULT TIME.
FAULT Protection is active. The drive trips on fault SERIAL 1 ERR 1
and coasts to stop.
CONST SP 7 Protection is active. The drive generates alarm IO COMM 2
and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter 1208
CONST SPEED 7.
operation in case of a communication break.
LAST SPEED Protection is active. The drive generates alarm IO COMM 3
and freezes the speed to the level the drive was operating
at. The speed is determined considering the average speed
and time.
operation in case of a communication break.
3019 COMM FAULT Defines the time delay for the fieldbus communication break 3.0 s
TIME supervision. See parameter 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
0.0…600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
3021 AI1 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input AI1. If parameter 3001 0.0%
LIMIT AI<MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT, the drive trips on fault
AI1 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set
level.
Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter
1301 MINIMUM AI1.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range 1 = 0.1%

All parameters
3022 AI2 FAULT Defines a fault level for analog input AI2. If parameter 3001 0.0%
LIMIT AI<MIN FUNCTION is set to FAULT, the drive trips on fault
AI2 LOSS when the analog input signal falls below the set
level.
Do not set this limit below the level defined by parameter
1304 MINIMUM AI2.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the full signal range 1 = 0.1%
3023 WIRING FAULT Selects how the drive reacts when incorrect input power and ENABLE
motor cable connection is detected (ie the input power cable
is connected to the motor connection of the drive).
Note: Disabling wiring fault (ground fault) may void the
warranty.
DISABLE No action 0
ENABLE The drive trips on fault OUTP WIRING. 1
3027 OPTION COM Enables the fault 1006 PAR EXT RO on detecting the ENABLE
LOSS disconnection of MREL-01 relay output extension module
from the drive.
DISABLE Prevents the fault 1006 PAR EXT RO even when MREL-01 0
is disconnected from the drive.
ENABLE MREL-01 is constantly monitored for disconnection and 1
indicated by the fault 1006 PAR EXT RO if external relay
outputs are configured.
31 AUTOMATIC Automatic fault reset. Automatic resets are possible only for
RESET certain fault types and when the automatic reset function is
activated for that fault type.
3101 NR OF TRIALS Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive 0
performs within the time defined by parameter 3102 TRIAL
TIME.
If the number of automatic resets exceeds the set number
(within the trial time), the drive prevents additional automatic
resets and remains stopped. The drive must be reset from
the control panel or from a source selected by parameter
1604 FAULT RESET SEL.
Example: Three faults have occurred during the trial time
defined by parameter 3102. Last fault is reset only if the
number defined by parameter 3101 is 3 or more.
Trial time
t X = Automatic reset
X X X
0…5 Number of the automatic resets 1=1

3102 TRIAL TIME Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See 30.0 s
parameter 3101 NR OF TRIALS.
1.0…600.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s
3103 DELAY TIME Defines the time that the drive waits after a fault before 0.0 s
attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 3101 NR OF
TRIALS. If delay time is set to zero, the drive resets
immediately.
0.0…120.0 s Time 1 = 0.1 s

All parameters
3104 AR Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for the DISABLE
OVERCURRE overcurrent fault. Automatically resets the fault
NT (OVERCURRENT) after the delay set by parameter 3103
DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
OVERVOLTAG intermediate link overvoltage fault. Automatically resets the
E fault (DC OVERVOLT) after the delay set by parameter
3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
UNDERVOLTA intermediate link undervoltage fault. Automatically resets
GE the fault (DC UNDERVOLT) after the delay set by parameter
3103 DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
3107 AR AI<MIN Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for fault AI<MIN DISABLE
(analog input signal under the allowed minimum level) faults
AI1 LOSS (0007) and AI2 LOSS (0008). Automatically
resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3103
DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1
WARNING! The drive may restart even after a long
stop if the analog input signal is restored. Ensure that
the use of this feature does not cause danger.
3108 AR EXTERNAL Activates/deactivates the automatic reset for faults EXT DISABLE
FLT FAULT 1 (0014) and EXT FAULT 2 (0015). Automatically
resets the fault after the delay set by parameter 3103
DELAY TIME.
DISABLE Inactive 0
ENABLE Active 1

All parameters
32 SUPERVISION Signal supervision. Supervision status can be monitored
with relay or transistor output. See parameter groups 14
RELAY OUTPUTS and 18 FREQ IN & TRAN OUT.
3201 SUPERV 1 Selects the first supervised signal. Supervision limits are 103
PARAM defined by parameters 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO and 3203
SUPERV 1 LIM HI.
Example 1: If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO < 3203 SUPERV 1
LIM HI
Case A = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
OVER. Relay energizes when value of the signal selected
with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM exceeds the supervision limit
defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI. The relay remains
active until the supervised value drops below the low limit
defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO.
Case B = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
UNDER. Relay energizes when value of the signal selected
with 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM drops below the supervision
limit defined by 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO. The relay remains
active until the supervised value rises above the high limit
defined by 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI.
Value of supervised parameter
HI par. 3203
LO par. 3202
t
Case A
Energized (1)
0 t
Case B
Energized (1)
0 t

All parameters
Example 2: If 3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO > 3203 SUPERV 1
LIM HI
The lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI remains active until
the supervised signal exceeds the higher limit 3202
SUPERV 1 LIM LO, making it the active limit. The new limit
remains active until the supervised signal drops below the
lower limit 3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI, making it the active
limit.
Case A = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
OVER. Relay is energized whenever the supervised signal
exceeds the active limit.
Case B = 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 value is set to SUPRV1
UNDER. Relay is de-energized whenever the supervised
signal drops below the active limit.
Value of supervised parameter Active limit
LO par. 3202
HI par. 3203
t
Case A
Energized (1)
0 t
Case B
Energized (1)
0 t
0, x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. For 1=1

example, 102 = 0102 SPEED. 0 = not selected.
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the low limit for the first supervised signal selected -
LO by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is below the limit.
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 -
PARAM setting.
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM Defines the high limit for the first supervised signal selected -
HI by parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is above the limit.
PARAM setting.
3204 SUPERV 2 Selects the second supervised signal. Supervision limits are 104
SUPERV 2 LIM HI. See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM.
x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. Eg 102 = 1 = 1
0102 SPEED.
3205 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the low limit for the second supervised signal -
LO selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM.
Supervision wakes up if the value is below the limit.

All parameters
PARAM setting.
3206 SUPERV 2 LIM Defines the high limit for the second supervised signal -
HI selected by parameter 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM.
Supervision wakes up if the value is above the limit.
PARAM setting.
3207 SUPERV 3 Selects the third supervised signal. Supervision limits are 105
SUPERV 3 LIM HI. See parameter 3201 SUPERV 1
PARAM.
x…x Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. For 1=1
example, 102 = 0102 SPEED.
3208 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the low limit for the third supervised signal selected -
LO by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is below the limit.
PARAM setting.
3209 SUPERV 3 LIM Defines the high limit for the third supervised signal selected -
HI by parameter 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM. Supervision wakes
up if the value is above the limit.
PARAM setting.
33 INFORMATION Firmware package version, test date etc.
3301 FIRMWARE Displays the version of the firmware package.
0000…FFFF For example, 241A hex
hex
3302 LOADING Displays the version of the loading package. type
PACKAGE dependent
2101…21FF 2101 hex = ACS310-03E-
hex 2102 hex = ACS310-03U-
3303 TEST DATE Displays the test date. 00.00
Date value in format YY.WW (year, week)
3304 DRIVE RATING Displays the drive current and voltage ratings. 0000 hex
0000…FFFF Value in format XXXY hex:
hex XXX = Nominal current of the drive in amperes. An “A”
indicates decimal point. For example if XXX is 9A7, nominal
current is 9.7 A.
Y = Nominal voltage of the drive:
1 = 1-phase 200…240 V
2 = 3-phase 200…240 V
4 = 3-phase 380…480 V
3305 PARAMETER Displays the version of the parameter table used in the
TABLE drive.
0000…FFFF Eg 400E hex
hex

All parameters
34 PANEL DISPLAY Selection of actual signals to be displayed on the panel
3401 SIGNAL1 Selects the first signal to be displayed on the control panel 103
PARAM in the Output mode.
Assistant control 3404 3405
panel
LOC 15.0Hz
0137 15.0 Hz
0138 3.7 A
0139 17.3 %
DIR 00:00 MENU
0, 101…178 Parameter index in group 01 OPERATING DATA. For 1=1

example, 102 = 0102 SPEED. If value is set to 0, no signal
is selected.
100 NOT SELECTED
3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Defines the minimum value for the signal selected by -
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM.
Display
value
3407
3406
Source
3402 3403 value
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404

OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT.
x…x Setting range depends on parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 -
PARAM setting.
3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Defines the maximum value for the signal selected by -
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See the figure for
parameter 3402 SIGNAL1 MIN.
OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is 9 (DIRECT).
PARAM setting.

All parameters
3404 OUTPUT1 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal (selected by DIRECT
FORM parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM).
+/-0 Signed/Unsigned value. Unit is selected by parameter 3405 0
+/-0.0 OUTPUT1 UNIT. 1
Example: PI (3.14159)
+/-0.00 2
3404 value Display Range
+/-0.000 3
+/-0 +3 -32768…+32767
+0 +/-0.0 + 3.1 4
+0.0 +/-0.00 + 3.14 5
+0.00 +/-0.000 + 3.142 6
+0.000 +0 3 0…65535 7
+0.0 3.1
+0.00 3.14
+0.000 3.142
BAR METER Bar graph 8

DIRECT Direct value. Decimal point location and units of measure 9
are the same as for the source signal.
Note: Parameters 3402, 3403 and 3405…3407 are not
effective.
3405 OUTPUT1 Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by Depends
UNIT parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. on the
Note: Parameter is not effective if parameter 3404 signal
OUTPUT1 DSP FORM setting is DIRECT. selected
with par.
Note: Unit selection does not convert values. 3401
NO UNIT No unit selected 0
A ampere 1
V volt 2
Hz hertz 3
% percent 4
s second 5
h hour 6
rpm revolutions per minute 7
kh kilohour 8
°C celsius 9
lb ft pounds per foot 10
mA milliampere 11
mV millivolt 12
kW kilowatt 13
W watt 14
kWh kilowatt hour 15
°F fahrenheit 16
hp horsepower 17
MWh megawatt hour 18

All parameters
m/s meters per second 19
m3/h cubic meters per hour 20
dm3/s cubic decimeters per second 21
bar bar 22
kPa kilopascal 23
GPM gallons per minute 24
PSI pounds per square inch 25
CFM cubic feet per minute 26
ft foot 27
MGD millions of gallons per day 28
inHg inches of mercury 29
FPM feet per minute 30
kb/s kilobytes per second 31
kHz kilohertz 32
ohm ohm 33
ppm pulses per minute 34
pps pulses per second 35
l/s liters per second 36
l/min liters per minute 37
l/h liters per hour 38
m3/s cubic meters per second 39
m3/m cubic meters per minute 40
kg/s kilograms per second 41
kg/m kilograms per minute 42
kg/h kilograms per hour 43
mbar millibar 44
Pa pascal 45
GPS gallons per second 46
gal/s gallons per second 47
gal/m gallons per minute 48
gal/h gallons per hour 49
ft3/s cubic feet per second 50
ft3/m cubic feet per minute 51
ft3/h cubic feet per hour 52
lb/s pounds per second 53
lb/m pounds per minute 54
lb/h pounds per hour 55
FPS feet per second 56
ft/s feet per second 57
inH2O inches of water 58

All parameters
in wg inches of water gauge 59
ft wg feet on water gauge 60
lbsi pounds per squared inch 61
ms millisecond 62
Mrev millions of revolutions 63
d days 64
inWC inches of water column 65
m/min meters per minute 66
Nm Newton meter 67
Km3/h thousand cubic meters per hour 68
min 69
m3 Reserved for solar pumps 70
m6 71
Reserved 72...116
%ref reference in percentage 117
%act actual value in percentage 118
%dev deviation in percentage 119
% LD load in percentage 120
% SP set point in percentage 121
%FBK feedback in percentage 122
Iout output current (in percentage) 123
Vout output voltage 124
Fout output frequency 125
Tout output torque 126
Vdc DC voltage 127
3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Sets the minimum display value for the signal selected by -
parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See parameter 3402
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
3407 OUTPUT1 Sets the maximum display value for the signal selected by -
MAX parameter 3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM. See parameter 3402
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.

All parameters
3408 SIGNAL2 Selects the second signal to be displayed on the control 104
PARAM panel in the Output mode. See parameter 3401 SIGNAL1
PARAM.
is selected.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
3411 OUTPUT2 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT
FORM parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM.
See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM. -
3412 OUTPUT2 Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by -
UNIT parameter 3408 SIGNAL2 PARAM.
See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT. -
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
3415 SIGNAL3 Selects the third signal to be displayed on the control panel 105
PARAM in the Output mode. See parameter 3401 SIGNAL1
PARAM.
is selected.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
3418 OUTPUT3 DSP Defines the format for the displayed signal selected by DIRECT
FORM parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM.

All parameters
See parameter 3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM. -
3419 OUTPUT3 Selects the unit for the displayed signal selected by -
UNIT parameter 3415 SIGNAL3 PARAM.
See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT. -
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
SIGNAL1 MIN.
PARAM setting.
35 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature measurement. See section Motor
MEAS temperature measurement through the standard I/O on
page 145.
3501 SENSOR Activates the motor temperature measurement function and NONE
TYPE selects the sensor type. See also parameter group 15
ANALOG OUTPUTS.
NONE The function is inactive. 0
1 x PT100 The function is active. The temperature is measured with 1
one Pt100 sensor. Analog output AO feeds constant current
through the sensor. The sensor resistance increases as the
motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the
sensor. The temperature measurement function reads the
voltage through analog input AI1/2 and converts it to
degrees centigrade.
2 x PT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using two 2
Pt100 sensors. See selection 1 x PT100.
3 x PT100 The function is active. Temperature is measured using three 3
Pt100 sensors. See selection 1 x PT100.

All parameters
PTC The function is active. The temperature is supervised using 4
one PTC sensor. Analog output AO feeds constant current
through the sensor. The resistance of the sensor increases
sharply as the motor temperature rises over the PTC
reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over the
resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the
voltage through analog input AI1/2 and converts it into
ohms. The figure below shows typical PTC sensor
resistance values as a function of the motor operating
temperature.
Temperature Resistance
Normal 0…1.5 kohm
Excessive > 4 kohm
ohm
4000
1330
550
100
THERM(0) The function is active. Motor temperature is monitored using 5

a PTC sensor (see selection PTC) connected to drive
through a normally closed thermistor relay connected to a
digital input. 0 = motor overtemperature.
THERM(1) The function is active. Motor temperature is monitored using 6
a PTC sensor (see selection PTC) connected to drive
through a normally open thermistor relay connected to a
digital input. 1 = motor overtemperature.
3502 INPUT Selects the source for the motor temperature measurement AI1
SELECTION signal.
AI1 Analog input AI1. Used when Pt100 or PTC sensor is 1
selected for the temperature measurement.
AI2 Analog input AI2. Used when Pt100 or PTC sensor is 2
selected for the temperature measurement
DI1 Digital input DI1. Used when parameter 3501 SENSOR 3
TYPE value is set to THERM(0)/THERM(1).

All parameters
3503 ALARM LIMIT Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement. 0
Alarm MOTOR TEMP indication is given when the limit is
exceeded. When parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE value is
set to THERM(0)/THERM(1): 1 = alarm.
x…x Alarm limit -
3504 FAULT LIMIT Defines the fault trip limit for motor temperature 0
measurement. The drive trips on fault MOT OVERTEMP
when the limit is exceeded. When parameter 3501
SENSOR TYPE value is set to THERM(0)/THERM(1): 1 =
fault.
x…x Fault limit -
3505 AO Enables current feed from analog output AO. Parameter DISABLE
EXCITATION setting overrides parameter group 15 ANALOG OUTPUTS
settings.
With PTC the output current is 1.6 mA.
With Pt100 the output current is 9.1 mA.
DISABLE Disabled 0
ENABLE Enabled 1
36 TIMED Time periods 1 to 4 and booster signal. See section Timed
FUNCTIONS functions on page 147.
3601 TIMERS Selects the source for the timed function enable signal. NOT SEL
ENABLE
NOT SEL Timed function is not selected. 0
DI1 Digital input DI. Timed function enable on the rising edge of 1
DI1.
ACTIVE Timed function is always enabled. 7
DI1 CMODE Timed function enable on the rising edge of DI1. Timed 11
function is in continuous mode, in which the start date can
be different from the stop date.
DI2 CMODE See selection DI1 CMODE. 12
CONT MODE Timed function enabled in continuous mode, in which the 17
start date can be different from the stop date.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. Timed function enable on the -1
falling edge of DI1.

All parameters
DI1(INV) CM Timed function enable on the falling edge of DI1. Timed -11
function is in continuous mode, in which the start date can
be different from the stop date.
DI2(INV) CM See selection DI1(INV) CM. -12
3602 START TIME 1 Defines the daily start time 1. The time can be changed in 00:00:00
2-second steps.
00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds.
23:59:58 Example: If parameter value is set to 07:00:00, timed
function 1 is activated at 7:00 (7 a.m).
3603 STOP TIME 1 Defines the daily stop time 1. The time can be changed in 00:00:00
2-second steps.
00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds.
23:59:58 Example: If parameter value is set to 18:00:00, timed
function 1 is deactivated at 18:00 (6 p.m).
3604 START DAY 1 Defines the start day 1. MONDAY
MONDAY 1
Example: If parameter value is set to MONDAY, timed
TUESDAY function 1 is active from Monday midnight (00:00:00). 2
WEDNESDAY 3
THURSDAY 4
FRIDAY 5
SATURDAY 6
SUNDAY 7
3605 STOP DAY 1 Defines the stop day 1. MONDAY
See parameter 3604 START DAY 1.
Example: If parameter is set to FRIDAY, timed function 1 is
deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58).
3606 START TIME 2 See parameter 3602 START TIME 1.
See parameter 3602 START TIME 1.
3607 STOP TIME 2 See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1.
See parameter 3603 STOP TIME 1.
3608 START DAY 2 See parameter 3604 START DAY 1.
3609 STOP DAY 2 See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1.
See parameter 3605 STOP DAY 1.

All parameters
3622 BOOSTER Selects the source for the booster activation signal. NOT SEL
SEL
NOT SEL No booster activation signal 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. -1
3623 BOOSTER Defines the time inside which the booster is deactivated 00:00:00
TIME after the booster activation signal is switched off.
00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds
23:59:58 Example: If parameter 3622 BOOSTER SEL is set to DI1
and 3623 BOOSTER TIME is set to 01:30:00, the booster is
active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after digital input DI is
deactivated.
Booster active
DI
Booster time
3626 TIMED FUNC 1 Selects the time periods for TIMED FUNC 1 SRC. Timed NOT SEL
SRC function can consist of 0…4 time periods and a booster.
NOT SEL No time periods selected 0
T1 Time period 1 1
T2 Time period 2 2

All parameters
T1+T2 Time periods 1 and 2 3
T3 Time period 3 4
T1+T2+T3 Time periods 1, 2 and 3 7
T4 Time period 4 8
T1+T2+T3+T4 Time periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 15
BOOSTER Booster 16
T1+B Booster and time period 1 17
T1+T2+B Booster and time periods 1 and 2 19
T1+T2+T3+B Booster and time periods 1, 2 and 3 23
T1+2+3+4+B Booster and time periods 1, 2, 3 and 4 31
ALTERNATING Alternating time period is enabled. All other time periods T1, 32
T2, T1+T2 and T3 are ignored (for the specific timed
function).
ALT+BOOSTE Alternating time period and booster timer are enabled 48
R simultaneously.
3627 TIMED FUNC 2 See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC.
SRC
See parameter 3626 TIMED FUNC 1 SRC.
SRC

All parameters
SRC
3630 ALTERNATING Defines the time interval for the timer to switch between 0.0 h
TIMER On (1) and Off (0) states (starting from the On state),
based on the selections ALTERNATING or ALT+BOOSTER
in the timer source parameters 3626...3629.
• ALTERNATING: Alternating time period is enabled. The
time periods T1, T2, T1+T2 and T3 are ignored, for the
specific timed function.
• ALT+BOOSTER: Alternating time period and booster
times are enabled simultaneously.
0.0...1000.0 h Time interval
37 USER LOAD Defines supervision of a user adjustable load curve (motor
CURVE torque as a function of frequency). The curve is defined by
five points. See section User load curve on page 150.
3701 USER LOAD C Defines supervision mode for the user adjustable load NOT SEL
MODE curve.
Motor torque (%)
Overload area
3706 3709
3712 3718
3715
3714 3717
Allowed operating area
3711
3705
Underload area
3708
3704 3707 3710 3713 3716
Output frequency (Hz)
NOT SEL Supervision not active 0
UNDERLOAD Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload 1
curve
OVERLOAD Supervision for the torque exceeding the overload curve 2
BOTH Supervision for the torque dropping below the underload 3
curve or exceeding the overload curve
3702 USER LOAD C Defines the action wanted during load supervision FAULT
FUNC
FAULT A fault is generated when the condition defined by 3701 1
USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than the time
set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.
ALARM An alarm is generated when the condition defined by 3701 2
USER LOAD C MODE has been valid longer than half of the
time set by 3703 USER LOAD C TIME.

All parameters
3703 USER LOAD C Defines the time limit for generating a fault. Half of this time 20 s
TIME is used as the limit for generating an alarm.
10…400 s Time 1=1s
3704 LOAD FREQ 1 Defines the frequency value of the first load curve definition 5 Hz
point. Must be smaller than 3707 LOAD FREQ 2.
0…500 Hz Frequency 1 = 1 Hz
3705 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the first underload curve 10%
LOW 1 definition point. Must be smaller than 3706 LOAD TORQ
HIGH 1.
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3706 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the first overload curve definition 300%
HIGH 1 point
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3707 LOAD FREQ 2 Defines the frequency value of the second load curve 25 Hz
definition point. Must be smaller than 3710 LOAD FREQ 3.
3708 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the second underload curve 15%
HIGH 2.
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3709 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the second overload curve 300%
HIGH 2 definition point
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3710 LOAD FREQ 3 Defines the frequency value of the third load curve definition 43 Hz
point. Must be smaller than 3713 LOAD FREQ 4.
3711 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the third underload curve 25%
HIGH 3.
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3712 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the third overload curve 300%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3713 LOAD FREQ 4 Defines the frequency value of the fourth load curve 50 Hz
definition point. Must be smaller than 3716 LOAD FREQ 5.
3714 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fourth underload curve 30%
HIGH 4.
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3715 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fourth overload curve 300%
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3716 LOAD FREQ 5 Defines the frequency value of the fifth load curve definition 500 Hz
point

All parameters
3717 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fifth underload curve 30%
HIGH 5.
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
3718 LOAD TORQ Defines the torque value of the fifth overload curve definition 300%
HIGH 5 point
0…600% Torque 1 = 1%
40 PROCESS PID Process PID (PID1) control parameter set 1. See section
SET 1 PID control on page 138.
4001 GAIN Defines the gain for the process PID controller. High gain 1.0
may cause speed oscillation.
0.1…100.0 Gain. When value is set to 0.1, the PID controller output 1 = 0.1
changes one-tenth as much as the error value. When value
is set to 100, the PID controller output changes one hundred
times as much as the error value.
4002 INTEGRATION Defines the integration time for the process PID1 controller. 60.0 s
TIME The integration time defines the rate at which the controller
output changes when the error value is constant. The
shorter the integration time, the faster the continuous error
value is corrected. Too short an integration time makes the
control unstable.
A = Error
B = Error value step
C = Controller output with gain = 1
D = Controller output with gain = 10
A
B
D (4001 = 10)
C (4001 = 1)
4002
0.0 = NOT SEL Integration time. If parameter value is set to zero, integration 1 = 0.1 s
0.1…3600.0 s (I-part of the PID controller) is disabled.

All parameters
4003 DERIVATION Defines the derivation time for the process PID controller. 0.0 s
TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error
value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the
speed controller output is boosted during the change. If the
derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI
controller, otherwise as a PID controller.
The derivation makes the control more responsive for
disturbances.
The derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. Filter time
constant is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
Error Process error value
100%
0%
t
PID output D-part of controller output
Gain
4001
t
4003
0.0…10.0 s Derivation time. If parameter value is set to zero, the 1 = 0.1 s

derivative part of the PID controller is disabled.
4004 PID DERIV Defines the filter time constant for the derivative part of the 1.0 s
FILTER process PID controller. Increasing the filter time smooths
the derivative and reduces noise.
0.0…10.0 s Filter time constant. If parameter value is set to zero, the 1 = 0.1 s
derivative filter is disabled.
4005 ERROR Selects the relationship between the feedback signal and NO
VALUE INV drive speed.
NO Normal: A decrease in feedback signal increases drive 0
speed. Error = Reference - Feedback
YES Inverted: A decrease in feedback signal decreases drive 1
speed. Error = Feedback - Reference
4006 UNITS Selects the unit for PID controller actual values. %
0…128 See parameter 3405 OUTPUT1 UNIT selections.
4007 UNIT SCALE Defines the decimal point location for PID controller actual 1
values.

All parameters
0…4 Example: PI (3.141593) 1=1
4007 value Entry Display
0 00003 3
1 00031 3.1
2 00314 3.14
3 03142 3.142
4 31416 3.1416
4008 0% VALUE Defines together with parameter 4009 100% VALUE the 0.0
scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values.
Units (4006)
Scale (4007) +1000%
4009
4008
Internal
0% 100% scale (%)
-1000%
x…x Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by
parameters 4006 UNITS and 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4009 100% VALUE Defines together with parameter 4008 0% VALUE the 100.0
scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values.
4010 SET POINT Selects the source for the process PID controller reference AI1
SEL signal.
KEYPAD Control panel 0
COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 8
COMM+AI1 Summation of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input 9
page 294.
COMM*AI1 Multiplication of fieldbus reference REF2 and analog input 10
page 294.
DI3U,4D(RNC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 11
zero. The reference is not saved if the control source is
changed from EXT1 to EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from
LOC to REM.

All parameters
DI3U,4D(NC) Digital input DI3: Reference increase. Digital input DI4: 12
Reference decrease. The program stores the active
reference (not reset by a stop command). The reference is
not saved if the control source is changed from EXT1 to
EXT2, from EXT2 to EXT1 or from LOC to REM.
AI1+AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 14
REF = AI1(%) + AI2(%) - 50%
AI1*AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 15
REF = AI(%) · (AI1(%) / 50%)
AI1-AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 16
REF = AI1(%) + 50% - AI2(%)
AI1/AI2 Reference is calculated with the following equation: 17
REF = AI1(%) · (50% / AI2 (%))
INTERNAL A constant value defined by parameter 4011 INTERNAL 19
SETPNT, 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2, 4037 INTERNAL
SETPNT3 or 4038 INTERNAL SETPNT4. See also
parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL.
DI4U,5D(NC) See selection DI3U,4D(NC). 31
4011 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as process PID controller 40
SETPNT reference, when parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is
set to INTERNAL.
4012 SETPOINT Defines the minimum value for the selected PID reference 0.0%
MIN signal source. See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL.
-500.0…500.0% Value in percent. 1 = 0.1%
Example: Analog input AI1 is selected as the PID reference
source (value of parameter 4010 is AI1). The reference
minimum and maximum correspond to the 1301 MINIMUM
AI1 and 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 settings as follows:
Ref Ref
MAX > MIN MIN > MAX
4013 4012
(MAX) (MIN)
4012 4013
(MIN) (MAX)
1301 1302 AI1 (%) 1301 1302 AI1 (%)
4013 SETPOINT Defines the maximum value for the selected PID reference 100.0%
MAX signal source. See parameters 4010 SET POINT SEL and
4012 SETPOINT MIN.
-500.0…500.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4014 FBK SEL Selects the process actual value (feedback signal) for the ACT1
process PID controller: The sources for the variables ACT1
and ACT2 are further defined by parameters 4016 ACT1
INPUT and 4017 ACT2 INPUT.
ACT1 ACT1 1

All parameters
ACT1-ACT2 Subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 2
ACT1+ACT2 Addition of ACT1 and ACT2 3
ACT1*ACT2 Multiplication of ACT1 and ACT2 4
ACT1/ACT2 Division of ACT1 and ACT2 5
MIN(ACT1,2) Selects the smaller of ACT1 and ACT2 6
MAX(ACT1,2) Selects the higher of ACT1 and ACT2 7
sqrt(ACT1-2) Square root of the subtraction of ACT1 and ACT2 8
sqA1+sqA2 Addition of the square root of ACT1 and the square root of 9
ACT2
sqrt(ACT1) Square root of ACT1 10
COMM FBK 1 Signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 value 11
COMM FBK 2 Signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 value 12
AVE(ACT1,2) Average of ACT1 and ACT2 13
4015 FBK Defines an extra multiplier for the value defined by 0.000
MULTIPLIER parameter 4014 FBK SEL. Parameter is used mainly in
applications where feedback value is calculated from
another variable (eg flow from pressure difference).
-32.768… Multiplier. If parameter value is set to zero, no multiplier is 1 = 0.001
32.767 used.
4016 ACT1 INPUT Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1). See also AI2
parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
AI1 Uses analog input 1 for ACT1 1
AI2 Uses analog input 2 for ACT1 2
CURRENT Uses current for ACT1 3
TORQUE Uses torque for ACT1 4
POWER Uses power for ACT1 5
COMM ACT 1 Uses value of signal 0158 PID COMM VALUE 1 for ACT1 6
COMM ACT 2 Uses value of signal 0159 PID COMM VALUE 2 for ACT1 7
4017 ACT2 INPUT Defines the source for actual value ACT2. See also AI2
parameter 4020 ACT2 MINIMUM.
See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT.

All parameters
4018 ACT1 Sets the minimum value for ACT1. 0%
MINIMUM Scales the source signal used as the actual value ACT1
(defined by parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT). For parameter
4016 values 6 (COMM ACT 1) and 7 (COMM ACT 2)
scaling is not done.
Par Source Source min. Source max.
4016
1 Analog input 1 1301 MINIMUM AI1 1302 MAXIMUM AI1
2 Analog input 2 1304 MINIMUM AI2 1305 MAXIMUM AI2
3 Current 0 2 · nominal current
4 Torque -2 · nominal torque 2 · nominal torque
5 Power -2 · nominal power 2 · nominal power
A = Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 minimum > ACT1

maximum)
ACT1 (%) ACT1 (%)
A
4019 4018
B
4018 4019
Source min. Source max. Source min. Source max.

Source signal Source signal
-1000…1000% Value in percent 1 = 1%

4019 ACT1 Defines the maximum value for variable ACT1 if an analog 100%
MAXIMUM input is selected as a source for ACT1. See parameter 4016
ACT1 INPUT. The minimum (4018 ACT1 MINIMUM) and
maximum settings of ACT1 define how the voltage/current
signal received from the measuring device is converted to a
percentage value used by the process PID controller.
See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
-1000…1000% Value in percent 1 = 1%
4020 ACT2 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM. 0%
MINIMUM
-1000…1000% See parameter 4018. 1 = 1%
4021 ACT2 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM. 100%
MAXIMUM
-1000…1000% See parameter 4019. 1 = 1%
4022 SLEEP Activates the sleep function and selects the source for the NOT SEL
SELECTION activation input. See section Sleep function for the process
PID (PID1) control on page 143.
NOT SEL No sleep function selected 0
DI1 The function is activated/deactivated through digital input 1
DI1.1 = activation, 0 = deactivation.
The internal sleep criteria set by parameters 4023 PID
SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP DEV are not effective.
The sleep start and stop delay parameters 4024 PID SLEEP
DELAY and 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY are effective.

All parameters
INTERNAL Activated and deactivated automatically as defined by 7
parameters 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL and 4025 WAKE-UP
DEV.
SUPRV1 The function is activated when parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 9
OVER PARAM stays over the high limit defined by parameter 3203
SUPERV 1 LIM HI.
OVER
OVER
DI1(INV) The function is activated/deactivated through inverted digital -1
input DI1. 1 = deactivation, 0 = activation.
SUPRV1 The function is activated when parameter 3201 SUPERV 1 -9
UNDER PARAM stays below the low limit defined by parameter 3202
SUPERV 1 LIM LO.
SUPRV2 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER. -10
UNDER
SUPRV3 See selection SUPRV1 UNDER. -11
UNDER

All parameters
4023 PID SLEEP Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor 0.0 Hz
LEVEL speed is below a set level (4023) longer than the sleep
delay (4024), the drive shifts to the sleeping mode: The
motor is stopped and the control panel shows alarm
message PID SLEEP.
Parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION must be set to
INTERNAL.
Reference Sleep boost time (4030)
Sleep boost step
(4031)
t
Selected process actual Wake-up delay
value (4026)
Wake-up level
deviation (4025)
t
Output
frequency
Control
tsd = Sleep delay panel:
(4024)
t < tsd tsd PID SLEEP
Sleep level
(4023)
Stop Start
t
0.0…500.0 Hz Sleep start level 1 = 0.1 Hz

4024 PID SLEEP Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter 60.0 s
DELAY 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL. When the motor speed falls below
the sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor speed
exceeds the sleep level, the counter is reset.
0.0…3600.0 s Sleep start delay 1 = 0.1 s

All parameters
4025 WAKE-UP DEV Defines the wake-up deviation for the sleep function. The 0
drive wakes up if the process actual value deviation from
the PID reference value exceeds the set wake-up deviation
(4025) longer than the wake-up delay (4026). Wake-up level
depends on parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV settings.
If parameter 4005 is set to 0:
Wake-up level = PID reference (4010) - Wake-up deviation
(4025).
If parameter 4005 is set to 1:
Wake-up level = PID reference (4010) + Wake-up deviation
(4025)
Wake-up level
when 4005 = 1
4025
PID reference
4025
Wake-up level
when 4005 = 0
t
See also figures for parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.

parameters 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY and 4007 UNIT
SCALE.
4026 WAKE-UP Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See 0.50 s
DELAY parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
0.00…60.00 s Wake-up delay 1 = 0.01 s
4027 PID 1 PARAM Defines the source from which the drive reads the signal SET 1
SET that selects between PID parameter set 1 and 2.
PID parameter set 1 is defined by parameters 4001…4026.
PID parameter set 2 is defined by parameters 4101…4126.
SET 1 PID SET 1 is active. 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = PID SET 2, 0 = PID SET 1. 1
SET 2 PID SET 2 is active. 7
TIMED FUNC 1 Timed PID SET 1/2 control. Timed function 1 inactive = PID 8
SET 1, timed function 1 active = PID SET 2. See parameter
group 36 TIMED FUNCTIONS.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = PID SET 2, 1 = PID SET 1. -1

All parameters
4028 PID OUT MIN Defines the minimum value of PID output. -100.0%
-1000.0… Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
1000.0%
4029 PID OUT MAX Defines the maximum value of PID output. 100.0%
-1000.0… Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
1000.0%
4030 SLEEP BOOST Defines the boost time for the sleep boost step. See 0.0 s
TIME parameter 4031 SLEEP BOOST STEP.
Reference
4030 SLEEP
4031 SLEEP BOOST TIME
BOOST STEP
0.0…3600.0 s Sleep boost time 1 = 0.1 s

4031 SLEEP BOOST When the drive is entering sleep mode, the reference (PID 0.0%
STEP setpoint) is increased by this percentage for the time
defined by parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME.
0.0…100.0% Sleep boost step 1 = 0.1%
4032 PID REF ACC Defines the time for the reference (PID setpoint) increase 0.0 s
TIME from 0 to 100%.
Note: Parameters 4032…4036 are active even if the
process PID set 2 (group 41 PROCESS PID SET 2) is used.
0.0…1800.0 s Acceleration time 1 = 0.1 s
4033 PID REF DEC Defines the time for the reference (PID setpoint) decrease 0.0 s
TIME from 100 to 0%
0.0…1800.0 s Deceleration time 1 = 0.1 s
4034 PID REF Freezes the input (reference, PID setpoint) of the process NOT SEL
FREEZE PID controller. This feature is useful when the reference is
based on a process actual value connected to an analog
input, and the sensor must be serviced without stopping the
process.
The input of the PID controller is frozen as long as the
selected digital input is ON for parameter values DI1…DI5
or OFF for parameter values DI1(INV)…DI5(INV).
See also parameter 4035.
DI1 Reference is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1. 1
DI1(INV) Reference is frozen on the falling edge of digital input DI1. -1

All parameters
4035 PID OUT Freezes the output of the process PID controller. This NOT SEL
FREEZE feature is useful when the reference is based on a process
actual value connected to an analog input, and the sensor
must be serviced without stopping the process.
The output of the PID controller is frozen as long as the
selected digital input is ON for parameter values DI1…DI5
or OFF for parameter values DI1(INV)…DI5(INV).
See also parameter 4034.
DI1 Output is frozen on the rising edge of digital input DI1. 1
DI1(INV) Output is frozen on the falling edge of digital input DI1. -1
4036 INTERNAL Selects a constant value as the process PID controller 40.0
SETPNT2 reference, which becomes active when parameter 4010
SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL and setpoint 2 is
selected with the input defined by parameter 4039 INT
SETPNT SEL.
x…x Unit and range depend on the unit and scale defined by -
SETPNT SEL.
SETPNT SEL.

All parameters
4039 INT SETPNT Selects the source for the selection of the internal setpoint NOT SEL
SEL used as the process PID controller reference when
parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL value is set to INTERNAL.
Example:
4010 SET POINT SEL = INTERNAL
4039 INT SETPNT SEL = DI2
Digital input DI2 = 1
-> 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2 is used as the reference.
NOT SEL 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used as the reference. 0
DI1 0 = 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used. 1 = 4036 INTERNAL 1
SETPNT2 is used.
DI1,2 Selects with digital inputs DI1 and DI2 which internal 7
setpoint is used as the reference. 1 = DI active, 0 = DI
inactive.
DI1 DI2 Internal setpoint selected
0 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT
1 0 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2

TIMED FUNC 1 0 = 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT is used. 1 = 4036 INTERNAL 15
SETPNT2 is used.
TIMED Selects with timed functions 1 and 2 which internal setpoint 19
FUN1&2 is used as the reference. 1 = timed function active,
0 = timed function inactive.
Timed Timed Internal setpoint selected
0 0 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT
41 PROCESS PID Process PID (PID1) control parameter set 2. See section
SET 2 PID control on page 138.
4101 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN.
4102 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME.
TIME

All parameters
4103 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME.
TIME
4104 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
FILTER
4105 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV.
VALUE INV
4106 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS.
4107 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4108 0% VALUE See parameter 4008 0% VALUE.
4110 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL.
SEL
4111 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT.
SETPNT
4112 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN.
MIN
4113 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX.
MAX
4114 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL.
4115 FBK See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER.
MULTIPLIER
4116 ACT1 INPUT See parameter 4016 ACT1 INPUT.
4118 ACT1 See parameter 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
MINIMUM
4119 ACT1 See parameter 4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM.
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
4122 SLEEP See parameter 4022 SLEEP SELECTION.
SELECTION
4123 PID SLEEP See parameter 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
LEVEL
4124 PID SLEEP See parameter 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY.
DELAY
4125 WAKE-UP DEV See parameter 4025 WAKE-UP DEV.
4126 WAKE-UP See parameter 4026 WAKE-UP DELAY.
DELAY
4128 PID OUT MIN See parameter 4028 PID OUT MIN.
4129 PID OUT MAX See parameter 4029 PID OUT MAX.
4130 SLEEP BOOST See parameter 4030 SLEEP BOOST TIME.
TIME
4131 SLEEP BOOST See parameter 4031 SLEEP BOOST STEP.
STEP

All parameters
4136 INTERNAL See parameter 4036 INTERNAL SETPNT2.
SETPNT2
SETPNT3
SETPNT4
4139 INT SETPNT See parameter 4039 INT SETPNT SEL.
SEL
42 EXT / TRIM PID External/Trim PID (PID2) control. See section PID control
on page 138.
4201 GAIN See parameter 4001 GAIN.
4202 INTEGRATION See parameter 4002 INTEGRATION TIME.
TIME
4203 DERIVATION See parameter 4003 DERIVATION TIME.
TIME
4204 PID DERIV See parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
FILTER
4205 ERROR See parameter 4005 ERROR VALUE INV.
VALUE INV
4206 UNITS See parameter 4006 UNITS.
4207 UNIT SCALE See parameter 4007 UNIT SCALE.
4210 SET POINT See parameter 4010 SET POINT SEL.
SEL
4211 INTERNAL See parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT.
SETPNT
4212 SETPOINT See parameter 4012 SETPOINT MIN.
MIN
4213 SETPOINT See parameter 4013 SETPOINT MAX.
MAX
4214 FBK SEL See parameter 4014 FBK SEL.
4215 FBK See parameter 4015 FBK MULTIPLIER.
MULTIPLIER
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
MINIMUM
MAXIMUM
4228 ACTIVATE Selects the source for the external PID function activation NOT SEL
signal. Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT
SEL.

All parameters
NOT SEL No external PID control activation selected 0
DI1 Digital input DI1. 1 = active, 0 = inactive. 1
DRIVE RUN Activation at drive start. Start (drive running) = active. 7
ON Activation at drive power-up. Power-up (drive powered) = 8
active.
TIMED FUNC 1 Activation by a timed function. Timed function 1 active = PID 9
control active. See parameter group 36 TIMED
FUNCTIONS.
DI1(INV) Inverted digital input DI1. 0 = active, 1 = inactive. -1
4229 OFFSET Defines the offset for the external PID controller output. 0.0%
When PID controller is activated, controller output starts
from the offset value. When PID controller is deactivated,
controller output is reset to the offset value.
Parameter 4230 TRIM MODE must be set to NOT SEL.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
4230 TRIM MODE Activates the trim function and selects between the direct NOT SEL
and proportional trimming. With trimming it is possible to
combine a corrective factor to the drive reference. See
section Reference trimming on page 123.
NOT SEL No trim function selected 0
PROPORTION Active. The trimming factor is proportional to the rpm/Hz 1
AL reference before trimming (REF1).
DIRECT Active. The trimming factor is relative to a fixed maximum 2
limit used in the reference control loop (maximum speed,
frequency or torque).
4231 TRIM SCALE Defines the multiplier for the trimming function. See section 0.0%
Reference trimming on page 123.
-100.0…100.0% Multiplier 1 = 0.1%
4232 CORRECTION Selects the trim reference. See section Reference trimming PID2REF
SRC on page 123.
PID2REF PID2 reference selected by parameter 4210 (ie signal 0129 1
PID 2 SETPNT value)
PID2OUTPUT PID2 output, ie signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT value 2

All parameters
44 PUMP Set-up of pump protection.
PROTECTION
4401 INLET PROT Enables, and selects the mode of, the primary supervision NOT SEL
CTRL of pump/fan inlet pressure.
Note: Inlet protection is active only when the active
reference is PID.
NOT SEL Primary inlet pressure supervision not used 0
ALARM Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the 1
control panel display.
PROTECT Detection of low inlet pressure generates an alarm on the 2
control panel display. The output of the PI controller is
ramped down (according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC
TIME) to the forced reference (set by parameter 4408
INLET FORCED REF). The drive reverts to the original
reference if the pressure subsequently exceeds the
supervision level.
The following diagram describes the inlet pressure
supervision function.
Measured inlet
pressure
4407
4403
4405
t
EXT2 reference
(from PID1OUT) 4417
4408
t
FAULT Detection of low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault. 3

4402 AI MEASURE Selects the analog input for pump/fan inlet pressure NOT SEL
INLET supervision.
NOT SEL No analog input selected 0
AI1 Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through analog input AI1 1
AI2 See selection AI1. 2
4403 AI IN LOW Sets the supervision limit for the primary inlet pressure 0.00%
LEVEL measurement. If the value of the selected input falls below
this limit, the action defined by parameter 4401 INLET
PROT CTRL is taken after the delay set by parameter 4407
INLET CTRL DLY expires.
0.00…100.00% The range corresponds to 0…10 V or 0…20 mA on the 1 = 0.01%
analog input. With a bipolar input, the absolute input value is
considered.
4404 VERY LOW Enables, and selects the mode of, the secondary inlet NOT SEL
CTRL pressure supervision function. The function uses the analog
input selected by parameter 4402 AI MEASURE INLET.
NOT SEL Secondary inlet pressure supervision not used 0

All parameters
STOP Detection of very low inlet pressure stops the drive. The 1
drive starts again if the pressure exceeds the supervision
level.
FAULT Detection of very low inlet pressure trips the drive on a fault. 2
4405 AI IN VERY Supervision level for the secondary inlet pressure 0.00%
LOW monitoring function. See parameter 4401 INLET PROT
CTRL.
0.00…100.00% Supervision level 1 = 0.01%
4406 DI STATUS Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch NOT SEL
INLET at the pump/fan inlet. The “normal” state is 1 (active). If the
selected input switches to 0 (inactive), the action defined by
parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is executed after the
delay set by parameter 4407 INLET CTRL DLY expires.
NOT SEL No digital input selected 0
DI1 Pump/fan inlet pressure monitored through digital input DI1 1
4407 INLET CTRL Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 60.0 s
DLY 4401 INLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of low inlet
pressure
0.0…1800.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
4408 INLET This reference is used after detection of low inlet pressure. 0.0%
FORCED REF See parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL.
operation using this reference.
-100.0… Forced reference 1 = 0.1%
100.0%
4409 OUTLET PROT Enables, and selects the mode of, the primary supervision NOT SEL
CTRL of pump/fan outlet pressure.
Note: Outlet protection is active only when the active
reference is PID.
NOT SEL Primary outlet pressure supervision not used 0
ALARM Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the 1
control panel display.

All parameters
PROTECT Detection of high outlet pressure produces an alarm on the 2
control panel display. The output of the PI controller is
ramped down (according to parameter 4417 PID OUT DEC
TIME) to the forced reference (set by parameter 4416
OUTLET FORCED REF). The drive reverts to the original
reference if the pressure subsequently falls below the
supervision level.
The following diagram describes the outlet pressure
supervision function.
Measured outlet
pressure
4415
4413
4411
EXT2 reference
(from PID1OUT)
4417
4416
t
FAULT Detection of high outlet pressure trips the drive on a fault. 3

4410 AI MEAS Selects the analog input for pump/fan outlet pressure NOT SEL
OUTLET supervision.
NOT SEL No analog input selected 0
AI1 Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through analog input 1
AI1
AI2 See selection AI1. 2
4411 AI OUT HI Sets the supervision limit for the primary outlet pressure 100.00%
LEVEL measurement. If the value of the selected analog input
exceeds this limit, the action defined by parameter 4409
OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay set with
parameter 4415 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires.
4412 VERY HIGH Enables, and selects the mode of, the secondary outlet NOT SEL
CTRL pressure supervision function. The function uses the analog
input selected by parameter 4410 AI MEAS OUTLET.
NOT SEL Secondary outlet pressure monitoring not used 0
STOP Detection of very high outlet pressure stops the drive. The 1
drive starts again if the pressure falls below the supervision
level.
FAULT Detection of very high outlet pressure trips the drive on a 2
fault.
4413 AI OUT VERY Supervision level for secondary outlet pressure monitoring 100.00%
HIGH function. See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL.

All parameters
4414 DI STATUS Selects the digital input for connection of a pressure switch NOT SEL
OUTLET at the pump/fan outlet. The “normal” state is 1 (active). If the
selected input switches to 0 (inactive), the action defined by
parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken after a delay
set by parameter 4415 OUTLET CTRL DLY expires.
NOT SEL No digital input selected. 0
DI1 Pump/fan outlet pressure monitored through digital input 1
DI1
4415 OUTLET CTRL Sets the delay after which the action defined by parameter 60.0 s
DLY 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL is taken on detection of high
outlet pressure.
0.0…1800.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
4416 OUTLET This reference is used after detection of high outlet 0.0%
FORCED REF pressure. See parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL.
operation using this reference.
-100.0… Forced reference 1 = 0.1%
100.0%
4417 PID OUT DEC PI controller ramp-down time. See selections PROTECT for 60.0 s
TIME parameter 4401 INLET PROT CTRL and PROTECT for
parameter 4409 OUTLET PROT CTRL.
0.0…1800.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
4418 APPL Parameters 4418 APPL PROFILE CTL to 4420 PROF NOT SEL
PROFILE CTL LIMIT ON DLY provide the Application profile protection
feature, based on long-term monitoring of an internal status
signal. If the selected signal exceeds (and remains above)
the supervision limit for a longer time than the set delay
(parameter 4420 PROF LIMIT ON DLY), the internal status
signal “PROFILE HIGH” is set to 1. The signal can be
directed to a relay output (see parameter group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS).
CONTROL Signal 0126 PID 1 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to 1
DEV1 parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM. Monitoring the
deviation between the reference and the actual value gives
an indication of the general condition of the pump, piping
and valves.
CONTROL Signal 0127 PID 2 OUTPUT is monitored and compared to 2
DEV2 parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM. Monitoring the
deviation between the reference and the actual value gives
an indication of the general condition of the pump, piping
and valves.
APPL OUTPUT Signal 0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT is monitored and 3
compared to parameter 4419 PROFILE OUTP LIM. The
signal constantly remaining at 100% may indicate a leak in
the output piping.

All parameters
4419 PROFILE Supervision limit for the Application profile protection 100.0%
OUTP LIM
-500.0…500.0% Supervision limit 1 = 0.1%
4420 PROF LIMIT Delay time for the Application profile protection 0.00 h
ON DLY
0.00…100.00 h Delay time 1 = 0.01 h
4421 PIPEFILL Enables the Precharge function, which calculates reference NOT SEL
ENABLE steps.
NOT SEL Not enabled 0
DI1 When DI1 is active (1), Precharge is active when the drive is 1
started. If DI1 becomes inactive (0) before Precharge is
finished, normal PID control is enabled.
ACTIVE Precharge is active at every start-up. 7
DI1(INV) When DI1 is inactive (0), Precharge is active when the drive -1
is started. If DI1 becomes active (1) before Precharge is
finished, normal PID control is enabled.
4422 PIPEFILL Defines the speed step used in Precharge. The PID 0.0%
STEP reference ramp time is specified by parameter 4032 PID
REF ACC TIME.
The speed step is added to the reference after the time
defined by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE DELAY has
elapsed and the change in feedback defined by parameter
4423 REQ ACT CHANGE has not been reached.
0.0…100.0% Speed step in percent of the maximum speed output 1 = 0.1%
4423 REQ ACT Defines the requested change in process feedback during 0.0%
CHANGE the time that is set by parameter 4424 ACT CHANGE
DELAY.
If the requested change in the feedback is not reached,
4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed reference.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum speed 1 = 0.1%
4424 ACT CHANGE Defines the time that is waited after the feedback value is 0.0 s
DELAY compared with the old feedback value.
If parameter 4423 REQ ACT CHANGE is measured in the
feedback value, the speed reference stays as it is. If REQ
ACT CHANGE is not seen in the feedback value, the value
of parameter 4422 PIPEFILL STEP is added to the speed
reference.
0.1…6000.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s

All parameters
4425 PID ENABLE Defines the level when Precharge is disabled and PID is 0.1%
DEV enabled. When the level is reached, PID is enabled. PID is
executed as parameterized. If reference ramp times are set,
they are used.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent of the maximum feedback. 1 = 0.1%
4426 PIPEFILL Defines the maximum time Precharge is allowed to operate. 0 = NOT
TIMEOUT If this time elapses, PID is preset and PID is allowed to run SEL
as it is parameterized – with or without reference ramps.
0 = NOT SEL 0: NOT SEL 1=1s
1…60000 s 1…60000 s: Max. Precharge operating time
45 ENERGY SAVING Set-up of calculation and optimization of energy savings.
Note: The values of saved energy parameters 0174 SAVED
KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177
SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 are derived
from subtracting the drive's energy consumed from the
direct-on-line (DOL) consumption calculated on the basis of
parameter 4508 PUMP POWER. As such, the accuracy of
the values is dependent on the accuracy of the power
estimate entered in that parameter.
4501 ENERGY Enables or disables the energy optimizer, which optimizes OFF
OPTIMIZER the flux so that the total energy consumption and motor
noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the
nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be
improved by 1…10% depending on load torque and speed.
OFF Disabled 0
ON Enabled 1
4502 ENERGY Price of energy per kWh. Used for reference when energy 0.00
PRICE savings are calculated. See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, (Currency)
0175 SAVED MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177
SAVED AMOUNT 2 and 0178 SAVED CO2 (reduction in
carbon dioxide emissions in tn).
0.00…655.35 Price of energy per kWh 1 = 0.01
(Currency)
4507 CO2 CONV Conversion factor for converting energy into CO2 emissions 0.5
FACTOR (kg/kWh or tn/MWh). Used for multiplying the saved energy tn/MWh
in MWh to calculate the value of parameter 0178 SAVED
CO2 (reduction in carbon dioxide emissions in tn).
0.0…10.0 Conversion factor 1 = 0.1
tn/MWh tn/MWh
4508 PUMP POWER Pump power when connected directly to supply (DOL). 100.0%
Used for reference when energy savings are calculated.
See parameters 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED MWH,
0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2 and
0178 SAVED CO2.
It is possible to use this parameter as the reference power
also for other applications than pumps. The reference power
can also be some other constant power than a motor
connected directly on-line.
0.0…1000.0% Pump power in percent of nominal motor power 1 = 0.1%
4509 ENERGY Resets energy calculators 0174 SAVED KWH, 0175 SAVED DONE
RESET MWH, 0176 SAVED AMOUNT 1, 0177 SAVED AMOUNT 2
and 0178 SAVED CO2.

All parameters
DONE Reset not requested (normal operation). 0
RESET Reset energy counters, The value reverts automatically to 1
DONE.
46 PUMP CLEANING Set-up of pump cleaning.
4601 PUMP CLEAN Defines how the Pump cleaning function is triggered. The NOT SEL
TRIG pump cleaning sequence consists of forward and reverse
“steps”.
Forward
4602 t
4603
Reverse
4607 4605 4604 4606 4604 4605 4604
4608
WARNING! Before enabling the Pump cleaning
function, ensure it is safe to perform the pump cleaning
sequence with the connected equipment.
Notes:
The Pump cleaning function overrides parameter 1003
DIRECTION.
The Pump cleaning function observes the maximum forward
and reverse frequencies (parameters 2007 MINIMUM
FREQ and 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ).
The Pump cleaning function always uses acceleration time
2 (parameter 2205) and deceleration time 2 (parameter
2206).
The drive must be ready and its Run enable signal must be
present before the pump cleaning sequence can start.
NOT SEL No triggering source defined. 0
DI1 Trigger on the rising edge of digital input DI1 1
DI1/SUP1OVR Enable on the rising edge of digital input DI1 or SUPRV1 7
OVER (parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1). See
parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
DI2/SUP1OVR See selection DI1/SUP1OVR. 8

All parameters
SUPRV1 Trigger on SUPRV1 OVER (parameter 1401 RELAY 12
OVER OUTPUT 1). See parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
DRIVE START Trigger when the drive receives a start command 13
TIMER TRIG Pump cleaning sequence is started periodically at intervals 14
defined by parameter 4607 TRIG TIME.
DI1(INV) Trigger on the falling edge of digital input DI1 -1
DI1(INV)S1O Enable on the falling edge of digital input DI1, trigger on -7
SUPRV1 OVER (parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1). See
parameter group 32 SUPERVISION.
DI2(INV)S1O See selection DI1(INV)S1O. -8
4602 FWD STEP Defines the forward step frequency for the pump cleaning 0.0%
sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency
(parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ).
0.0…100.0% Forward step frequency 1 = 0.1%
4603 REV STEP Defines the reverse step frequency for the pump cleaning 0.0%
sequence in percent of the nominal motor frequency
(parameter 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ).
0.0…100.0% Reverse step frequency 1 = 0.1%
4604 OFF TIME Defines the length of the interval between forward and 0.0 s
reverse steps in the pump cleaning sequence in seconds.
0.0…1000.0 s Off time (step interval) 1 = 0.1 s
4605 FWD TIME Defines the duration of each forward step in the pump 0.0 s
cleaning sequence in seconds.
0.0…1000.0 s Forward step duration 1 = 0.1 s
4606 REV TIME Defines the duration of each reverse step in the pump 0.0 s
cleaning sequence in seconds.
0.0…1000.0 s Reverse step duration 1 = 0.1 s
4607 TRIG TIME Defines the time for setting TIMER TRIG of parameter 4601 0.0 h
PUMP CLEAN TRIG.
0.0…200.0 h Trigger time in hours 1 = 0.1 h
4608 COUNT Number of steps to be performed in the pump cleaning 0
sequence.
0…100 Number of steps 1=1
52 PANEL COMM Communication settings for the control panel port on the
drive
5201 STATION ID Defines the address of the drive. Two units with the same 1
address are not allowed on-line.
1…247 Address 1=1

All parameters
5202 BAUD RATE Defines the transfer rate of the link. 9.6 kbit/s
9.6 kbit/s 9.6 kbit/s 1=
19.2 kbit/s 19.2 kbit/s 0.1 kbit/s
38.4 kbit/s 38.4 kbit/s

5203 PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s). The same setting 8 NONE 1
must be used in all on-line stations.
8 NONE 1 8 data bits, no parity bit, one stop bit 0
8 NONE 2 8 data bits, no parity bit, two stop bits 1
8 EVEN 1 8 data bits, even parity indication bit, one stop bit 2
8 ODD 1 8 data bits, odd parity indication bit, one stop bit 3
5204 OK Number of valid messages received by the drive. During 0
0…65535 Number of messages 1=1
5205 PARITY Number of characters with a parity error received from the 0
ERRORS Modbus link. If the number is high, check that the parity
settings of the devices connected on the bus are the same.
0…65535 Number of characters 1=1
5206 FRAME Number of characters with a framing error received by the 0
ERRORS Modbus link. If the number is high, check that the
communication speed settings of the devices connected on
the bus are the same.
5207 BUFFER Number of characters which overflow the buffer, ie number 0
OVERRUNS of characters which exceed the maximum message length,
128 bytes.
5208 CRC ERRORS Number of messages with a CRC (cyclic redundancy check) 0
error received by the drive. If the number is high, check
CRC calculation for possible errors.
53 EFB PROTOCOL Embedded fieldbus link settings. See chapter Fieldbus
control with the embedded fieldbus on page 287.
5301 EFB Contains the identification and program revision of the
PROTOCOL ID protocol.
Note: You can reset this parameter only with parameter
9802 COMM PROT SEL.
0000…FFFF Format XXYY hex, where XX = protocol ID and
hex YY = program revision of the protocol.
5302 EFB STATION Defines the address of the device. Two units with the same 1
ID address are not allowed on-line.
0…65535 Address 1=1

All parameters
5303 EFB BAUD Defines the transfer rate of the link. 9.6 kbit/s
RATE
1.2 kbit/s 1.2 kbit/s 1=
2.4 kbit/s 2.4 kbit/s 0.1 kbit/s

5304 EFB PARITY Defines the use of parity and stop bit(s) and the data length. 8 NONE 1
The same setting must be used in all on-line stations.
8 NONE 1 No parity bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 0
8 NONE 2 No parity bit, two stop bits, 8 data bits 1
8 EVEN 1 Even parity indication bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 2
8 ODD 1 Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit, 8 data bits 3
5305 EFB CTRL Selects the communication profile. See section ABB DRV
PROFILE Communication profiles on page 302. LIM
ABB DRV LIM ABB drives limited profile 0
DCU PROFILE DCU profile 1
ABB DRV ABB drives profile 2
FULL
5306 EFB OK Number of valid messages received by the drive. During 0
5307 EFB CRC Number of messages with an CRC (cyclic redundancy 0
ERRORS check) error received by the drive. If the number is high,
check CRC calculation for possible errors.
5308 EFB UART Number of messages with a character error received by the 0
ERRORS drive
5309 EFB STATUS Status of the EFB protocol IDLE
IDLE EFB protocol is configured, but not receiving any messages. 0
EXECUT INIT EFB protocol is initializing. 1
TIME OUT A time out has occurred in the communication between the 2
network master and the EFB protocol.
CONFIG EFB protocol has a configuration error. 3
ERROR
OFF-LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT 4
addressed to this drive.
ON-LINE EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to 5
this drive.

All parameters
RESET EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset. 6
LISTEN ONLY EFB protocol is in listen-only mode. 7
40005.
0…65535 Parameter index 1=1
40006.
40007.
40008.
40009.
40010.
40011.
40012.
5318 EFB PAR 18 For Modbus: Sets an additional delay before the drive 0
begins transmitting response to the master request.
0…65535 Delay in milliseconds 1=1
Control word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Control word.
0000…FFFF Control word
hex
Status word. Read only copy of the Fieldbus Status word.
0000…FFFF Status word
hex
5321 MDB DATA IN Modbus register 40013 (read-only). 0
1 Supported only by STD MODBUS.
0...9999 Parameter index 1=1
5322 MDB DATA IN Modbus register 40014 (read-only). 0
2 Supported only by STD MODBUS.

All parameters
5323 MDB DATA Modbus register 40080 (write-only). 0
OUT 1 Supported only by STD MODBUS.
64 LOAD Load analyzing function for peak value and amplitude. See
ANALYZER section Load analyzer on page 153.
6401 PVL SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for peak value 103
0102 SPEED.
6402 PVL FILTER Defines the filter time for peak value logging 0.1 s
TIME
0.0…120.0 s Filter time 1 = 0.1 s
6403 LOGGERS Defines the source for the reset of the peak value logger NOT SEL
RESET and amplitude logger 2. Resetting always resets both
loggers.
NOT SEL No reset selected 0
DI1 Reset loggers on the rising edge of DI1. 1

All parameters
RESET Reset loggers. Parameter is set to NOT SEL. 7
DI1(INV) Reset loggers on the falling edge of DI1. -1
6404 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the signal logged for amplitude logger 2 103
0102 SPEED.
6405 AL2 SIGNAL Defines the base value from which the percentage -
BASE distribution is calculated. Representation and default value
depends on the signal selected with parameter 6404 AL2
SIGNAL.
- - -
6406 PEAK VALUE Detected peak value of the signal selected with parameter -
6401 PVL SIGNAL
- - -
6407 PEAK TIME 1 Date of the peak value detection -
0…65535 d Day on which the peak value was detected. 1=1d
Format: Date if the real time clock is operating. / The
6408 PEAK TIME 2 Time of the peak value detection -
00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds 1=2s
23:59:58
6409 CURRENT AT Current at the moment of the peak value -
PEAK
0.0…6553.5 A 1 = 0.1 A
6410 UDC AT PEAK DC voltage at the moment of the peak value -
0…65535 V 1=1V
6411 FREQ AT Output frequency at the moment of the peak value -
PEAK
0.0…6553.5 Hz 1 = 0.1 Hz
6412 TIME OF Last reset date of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 -
RESET 1
0…65535 d Day of the last reset. 1=1d
Format: Date if the real time clock is operating. / The
6413 TIME OF Last reset time of the peak logger and amplitude logger 2 -
RESET 2

All parameters
00:00:00… hours:minutes:seconds 1=2s
23:59:58
6414 AL1RANGE0T Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current -
O10 I2N) 0…10% distribution
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6415 AL1RANGE10 Amplitude logger 1 (current in percent of nominal current -
TO20 I2N) 10…20% distribution
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
TO I2N) over 90% distribution
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6424 AL2RANGE0T Amplitude logger 2 (selection with parameter 6404) 0…10% -
O10 distribution
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6425 AL2RANGE10 Amplitude logger 2 (selection with parameter 6404) -
TO20 10…20% distribution
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%

All parameters
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
6433 AL2RANGE90 Amplitude logger 2 (selection with parameter 6404) over -
TO 90% distribution
0.0…100.0% 1 = 0.1%
81 PFC CONTROL Set-up of Pump-Fan Control (PFC) mode. See section PFC
and SPFC control on page 155.
8103 REFERENCE Sets a percentage value that is added to the process 0.0%
STEP 1 reference. Applies only when at least one auxiliary (constant
speed) motor is running.
Example: The drive operates three parallel pumps that
maintain water pressure in a pipe.
Parameter 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant
pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe.
The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water
consumption levels.
As water consumption increases, first one constant speed
pump operates, then, the second.
As flow increases, the pressure at the output end of the pipe
drops relative to the pressure measured at the input end. As
auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow, the adjustments
below correct the reference to more closely match the
output pressure.
When the first auxiliary pump operates, increase the
reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
When two auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference
with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2.
When three auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference
with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 + parameter 8105
REFERENCE STEP 3.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
STEP 2 reference. Applies only when at least two auxiliary (constant
speed) motors are running.
See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.

All parameters
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
STEP 3 reference. Applies only when at least three auxiliary
(constant speed) motors are running.
See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%
8109 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor. E: 50.0 Hz
1 The first auxiliary motor starts if: U: 60.0 Hz
• no auxiliary motors are running
• drive output frequency exceeds limit 8109 + 1 Hz
• output frequency stays above a relaxed limit (8109 - 1 Hz)
for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D.
After the first auxiliary motor starts, output frequency
decreases by value (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW
FREQ 1).
In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor drops to
compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor.
See the figure, where:
A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
B = Output frequency increase during the start delay.
C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as
frequency increases (1 = On).
Note: 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between
8112 LOW FREQ 1 and (2008 MAXIMUM FREQ) -1.
f (Hz)
8115
fMAX
(8109)+1
8109
A
8112
B A
fMIN
t
C
1
0 t
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8110 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary E: 50.0 Hz
2 motor. See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description U: 60.0 Hz
of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor starts if:
• one auxiliary motor is running
• output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8110 -
1 Hz) for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D.
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz

All parameters
8111 START FREQ Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary E: 50.0 Hz
3 motor. See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description U: 60.0 Hz
of the operation.
The third auxiliary motor starts if:
• two auxiliary motors are running
• output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8111 -
1 Hz) for at least time 8115 AUX MOT START D.
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8112 LOW FREQ 1 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor. E: 25.0 Hz
The first auxiliary motor stops if: U: 30.0 Hz
• only one (the first) auxiliary motor is running
• drive output frequency drops below limit 8112 - 1 Hz.
• output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8112 +
1 Hz) for at least time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
After the first auxiliary motor stops, output frequency
increases by value (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW
FREQ 1).
In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor increases
to compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor.
See the figure, where:
A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
B = Output frequency decrease during the stop delay.
C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as
frequency decreases (1 = On).
Grey path = Shows hysteresis – if time is reversed, the path
backwards is not the same. For details on the path for
starting, see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1.
Note: 8112 LOW FREQ 1 value must be between
(2007 MINIMUM FREQ) + 1 HZ and 8109 START FREQ 1
f (Hz)
8109
fMAX
A
8112 A
(8112)-1
fMIN
B
t
8116
C
1
0 t
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz

All parameters
8113 LOW FREQ 2 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary E: 25.0 Hz
motor. See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of U: 30.0 Hz
the operation.
The second auxiliary motor stops if:
• two auxiliary motors are running
• drive output frequency drops below limit 8113 - 1 Hz
1 Hz) for at least time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8114 LOW FREQ 3 Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary E: 25.0 Hz
motor. See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of U: 30.0 Hz
the operation.
The third auxiliary motor stops if:
• three auxiliary motors are running
• drive output frequency drops below limit 8114 - 1 Hz
1 Hz) for at least time 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
0.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
8115 AUX MOT Sets the start delay for the auxiliary motors. 5.0 s
START D The output frequency must remain above the start
frequency limit (parameter 8109, 8110 or 8111) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor starts.
See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the
operation.
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s
8116 AUX MOT Sets the stop delay for the auxiliary motors. 3.0 s
STOP D The output frequency must remain below the low frequency
limit (parameter 8112, 8113 or 8114) for this time period
before the auxiliary motor stops.
See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the
operation.
0.0…3600.0 s Delay time 1 = 0.1 s

All parameters
8117 NR OF AUX Sets the number of auxiliary motors. Each auxiliary motor 1
MOT requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send
start/stop signals.
The Autochange function, if used, requires an additional
relay output for the speed regulated motor.
The following describes the set-up of the required relay
outputs.
Relay outputs
As noted above, each auxiliary motor requires a relay
output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals. The
following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and
relays.
The drive provides one relay output RO 1. An external relay
output module can be added to provide relay outputs
RO 2 … RO 4.
Note: If five auxiliary motors are needed (Autochange
disabled), use transistor output TO (parameter 1805 DO
SIGNAL) in addition to relay outputs RO 1 … RO 4. In relay
order (= auxiliary motor order), TO is set between RO 1 and
RO 2 (see page 271). Transistor output must be set to
digital mode, ie parameter 1804 TO MODE is set to 0
(DIGITAL). Note that maximum voltage at TO is 30 V DC.
Parameters 1401…1403 and 1410 define, respectively, how
relays RO 1 … RO 4 are used – the parameter value 31
(PFC) defines the relay as used for PFC.
The drive assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending
order. If the Autochange function is disabled, the first
auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a
parameter setting = 31 (PFC), and so on.
If the Autochange function is used, the assignments rotate.
Initially, the speed regulated motor is the one connected to
the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 (PFC), the first
auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay
with a parameter setting = 31 (PFC), and so on. The fourth
auxiliary motor uses the same reference step, low
frequency and start frequency values as the third auxiliary
motor.
0…4 (5 with TO) Number of auxiliary motors 1=1

All parameters
Standard PFC mode
Relay logic
PFC with Autochange mode

All parameters
The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for
some typical settings in the relay output parameters
(1401…1403 and 1410), where the settings are either = 31
(PFC), or = X (anything but 31), and where the Autochange
function is disabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0).
Parameter setting Relay assignment
1 1 1 1 8 Autochange disabled
4 4 4 4 1 RO 1 RO 2 RO 3 RO 4
0 0 0 1 1
1 2 3 0 7
31 X X X 1 Aux. X X X
31 31 X X 2 Aux. Aux. X X
31 31 31 X 3 Aux. Aux. Aux. X
X 31 31 X 2 X Aux. Aux. X
31 31 X X 1* Aux. Aux. X X
* = One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use.
One motor is in “sleep” when the other is rotating.
If five auxiliary motors are needed, use the transistor output
(parameter 1805 DO SIGNAL) as an additional relay output.
In relay order, TO is set between RO 1 and RO 2. The table
below shows the PFC motor assignments for some typical
settings when TO is in use.
1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange disabled
4 8 4 4 4 1 RO 1 TO RO 2 RO 3 RO 4
0 0 0 0 1 1
1 5 2 3 0 7
31 X X X X 1 Aux. X X X X
31 31 X X X 2 Aux. Aux. X. X X
31 31 31 X X 3 Aux. Aux. Aux. X X
31 31 31 31 X 4 Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. X
31 31 31 31 31 5 Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux.
31 31 31 31 X 4* Aux. Aux. Aux. Aux. X
* = One additional relay output for the PFC that is in use.
One motor is in “sleep” when the other is rotating.
The table below shows the PFC motor assignments for
some typical settings in the relay output parameters
(1401…1403 and 1410), where the settings are either = 31
(PFC), or = X (anything but 31), and where the Autochange
function is enabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV > 0).
1 1 1 1 8 Autochange enabled
4 4 4 4 1 RO 1 RO 2 RO 3 RO 4
0 0 0 1 1
1 2 3 0 7
31 31 X X 1 PFC PFC X X
31 31 31 X 2 PFC PFC PFC X
X 31 31 X 1 X PFC PFC X
31 31 X X 0** PFC PFC X X
** = No auxiliary motors, but the Autochange function is in
use. Working as a standard PID-control.

All parameters
8118 AUTOCHNG Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the 0.0 = NO
INTERV interval between changes. T SEL
The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when
the speed regulated motor is running.
See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of
the Autochange function.
The drive always coasts to stop when Autochange is
performed. Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120
INTERLOCKS > 0.
WARNING! When enabled, the Autochange function
requires the interlocks (8120 INTERLOCKS > 0)
enabled. During Autochange the power output is interrupted
and the drive coasts to stop, preventing damage to the
contacts.
Relay logic
PFC with Autochange mode

-0.1 = TEST -0.1: Test mode. Forces the interval to value 36…48 s. 1 = 0.1 h
MODE 0.0: Disables the Autochange function.
0.0 = NOT SEL 0.1…336 h: The operating time interval (the time when the
0.1…336.0 h start signal is on) between automatic motor changes.

All parameters
8119 AUTOCHNG Sets an upper limit, as a percent of output capacity, for the 50.0%
LEVEL Autochange logic. When the output from the PID/PFC
control block exceeds this limit, Autochange is prevented.
For example, use this parameter to deny Autochange when
the pump-fan system is operating near maximum capacity.
Autochange overview
The purpose of the Autochange operation is to equalize
duty time between multiple motors used in a system. At
each Autochange operation, a different motor takes a turn
connected to the drive output – the speed regulated motor.
The starting order of the other motors rotates.
The Autochange function requires:
• external switch gear for changing the drive’s output power
connections
• parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS > 0.
Autochange is performed when:
• the running time since the previous Autochange reaches
the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV
• the PFC input is below the level set by this parameter,
8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
Note: The drive always coasts to stop when Autochange is
performed.
In an Autochange, the Autochange function does all of the
following (see the figure):
• Initiates a change when the running time, since the last
Autochange, reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV, and
PFC input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
• Stops the speed regulated motor.
• Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor.
• Increments the starting order counter, to change the
starting order for the motors.
• Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated
motor.
• Switches off the above motor’s contactor, if the motor was
running. Any other running motors are not interrupted.
• Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated
motor. The Autochange switch gear connects this motor
to the drive power output.
• Delays motor start for time 8122 PFC START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation.
• Switches the above motor on, but only if the new speed
regulated motor had been running (as a constant speed
motor) – This step keeps an equal number of motors
running before and after Autochange.
• Continues with normal PFC operation.

All parameters
PID output
4PFC A
100%
2PFC
8119
3PFC
3PFC
4PFC
2PFC
1PFC
t
8122
8118 8118
B
A = Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL – Autochange
not allowed
B = Autochange occurs
1PFC, etc. = PID output associated with each motor.
Starting order counter
The operation of the starting-order counter:
• The relay output parameter definitions (1401…1403 and
1410) establish the initial motor sequence. (The lowest
parameter number with a value 31 (PFC) identifies the
relay connected to 1PFC, the first motor, and so on.)
• Initially, 1PFC = speed regulated motor, 2PFC = 1st
auxiliary motor, etc.
• The first Autochange shifts the sequence to: 2PFC =
speed regulated motor, 3PFC = 1st auxiliary motor, …,
1PFC = last auxiliary motor.
• The next Autochange shifts the sequence again, and so
on.
• If the Autochange cannot start a needed motor because
all inactive motors are interlocked, the drive displays an
alarm (2015 PFC I LOCK).
• When the drive power supply is switched off, the counter
preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in
permanent memory. When power is restored, the
Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in
memory.
• If the PFC relay configuration is changed (or if the PFC
enable value is changed), the rotation is reset according
to parameters 1401…1403 and 1410.

All parameters
Output
frequency
No aux. 1 aux. 2 aux.
motors motor motors
fMAX
Area
Autochange
is allowed PID output
8119 100%
0.0…100.0% Value in percent 1 = 0.1%

8120 INTERLOCKS Defines operation of the Interlock function. When the DI3
Interlock function is enabled:
• an interlock is active when its command signal is absent
• an interlock is inactive when its command signal is
present.
• the drive does not start if a start command occurs when
the speed regulated motor’s interlock is active – the
control panel displays an alarm (2015 PFC I LOCK).
Wire each Interlock circuit as follows:
• Wire a contact of the motor’s On/Off switch to the
Interlock circuit – the drive’s PFC logic can then
recognize that the motor is switched off and start the next
available motor.
• Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay (or other
protective device in the motor circuit) to the Interlock input
– the drive’s PFC logic can then recognize that a motor
fault is activated and stop the motor.
NOT SEL Disables the Interlock function. All digital inputs are 0
available for other purposes.
Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0 (The
Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is
disabled.)

All parameters
DI1 Enables the Interlock function and assigns a digital input 1
(starting with DI1) to the interlock signal for each PFC relay.
These assignments are defined in the following table and
depend on:
• the number of PFC relays (number of parameters
1401…1403 and 1410 with value = 31 [PFC])
• the Autochange function status (disabled if 8118
AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.0, and otherwise enabled).
No. of Autochange disabled Autochange enabled
PFC (Parameter 8118) (Parameter 8118)
relays
0 DI1: Speed reg motor Not allowed
DI2…DI5: Free
1 DI1: Speed reg motor DI1: First PFC relay
DI2: First PFC relay DI2…DI5: Free
DI3…DI5: Free
DI2: First PFC relay DI2: Second PFC relay
DI3: Second PFC relay DI3…DI5: Free
DI4…DI5: Free
DI3: Second PFC relay DI3: Third PFC relay
DI4: Third PFC relay DI4…DI5: Free
DI5…DI5: Free
DI4: Third PFC relay DI4: Fourth PFC relay
DI5: Fourth PFC relay DI5: Free
5 Not allowed DI1: First PFC relay
DI2: Second PFC relay
DI3: Third PFC relay
DI4: Fourth PFC relay
DI5: Fifth PFC relay

All parameters
depend on:
relays
0 DI1: Free Not allowed
DI2: Speed reg motor
DI3…DI5: Free
1 DI1: Free DI1: Free
DI2: Speed reg motor DI2: First PFC relay
DI4…DI5: Free
DI4: Second PFC relay DI4…DI5: Free
DI5…DI5: Free
DI5: Third PFC relay DI5: Free
4 Not allowed DI1: Free
DI2: First PFC relay
DI5: Fourth PFC relay
5 Not allowed Not allowed

All parameters
DI3 Enables the Interlocks function and assigns a digital input 3
depend on:
relays
0 DI1…DI2: Free Not allowed
DI4…DI5: Free
1 DI1…DI2: Free DI1…DI2: Free
DI5…DI5: Free
DI5: Second PFC relay DI5: Free
3 Not allowed DI1…DI2: Free
4…5 Not allowed Not allowed

depend on:
relays
DI5: Free
DI5: First PFC relay DI5: Free

All parameters
depend on:
No. Autochange disabled Autochange enabled
relays
8121 REG BYPASS Selects Regulator by-pass control. When enabled, NO

CTRL Regulator by-pass control provides a simple control
mechanism without a PID regulator.
Use Regulator by-pass control only in special applications.
fOUT
fMAX
8110
8109
8113
8112
fMIN
4014
A B C (%)
A = No auxiliary motors running
B = One auxiliary motor running
C = Two auxiliary motors running

All parameters
Example: In the diagram below, the pumping station’s outlet
flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow (A).
Mains 3~
3 Con-
3
3 Drive P1 tactors
P2 3
M
P3 3 3~ Outlet
3 P1 pipe 1
A
Sewage M
tank 3~ Outlet
P2 pipe 2
Inlet pipe
M
3~ Outlet
P3 pipe 3
NO Disables Regulator by-pass control. The drive uses the 0

normal PFC reference 1106 REF2 SELECT.
YES Enables Regulator by-pass control. 1
The process PID regulator is bypassed. Actual value of PID
is used as the PFC reference (input). (Normally 1106 REF2
SELECT is used as the PFC reference.)
The drive uses the feedback signal defined by 4014 FBK
SEL (or 4114) for the PFC frequency reference.
The first figure for parameter 8121 shows the relation
between the control signal 4014 FBK SEL (or 4114) and the
speed regulated motor’s frequency in a three-motor system.
8122 PFC START Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the 0.50 s
DELAY system. Using the delay, the drive works as follows:
• Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor,
connecting the motor to the drive power output.
• Delays motor start for time 8122 PFC START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Starts auxiliary motors. See parameter 8115 AUX MOT
START D for delay.
WARNING! Motors equipped with star-delta starters
require a PFC start delay.
After the drive relay output switches a motor on, the star-
delta starter must switch to the star-connection and then
back to the delta-connection before the drive applies power.
So, the PFC start delay must be longer than the time setting
of the star-delta starter.
0.01…10.00 s Delay time 1 = 0.01 s

All parameters
8123 PFC ENABLE Selects PFC control or SPFC control. When enabled, PFC NOT SEL
control or SPFC control does the following:
• Switches in, or out, auxiliary constant speed motors as
output demand increases or decreases. Parameters 8109
START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch
points in terms of the drive output frequency.
• Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down, as
auxiliary motors are added, and adjusts the speed
regulated motor output up, as auxiliary motors are taken
off line.
• Provides Interlock functions, if enabled.
NOT SEL Disabled 0
ACTIVE PFC control enabled 1
SPFC ACTIVE SPFC control enabled. Soft pump and fan control is used for 2
alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are
desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started.
SPFC + SPFC control with autochange enabled. Autochange with 3
AUTOCHANG soft pump and fan control (SPFC) is active only when
E auxiliary motors are not running. The speed regulated motor
alternates according to the autochange logic.
8124 ACC IN AUX Sets the PFC acceleration time for a zero-to-maximum 0.0 = NO
STOP frequency ramp. This PFC acceleration ramp: T SEL
• applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary
motor is switched off
• replaces the acceleration ramp defined in group 22
ACCEL/DECEL
• applies only until the output of the regulated motor
increases by an amount equal to the output of the
switched off auxiliary motor. Then the acceleration ramp
defined in group 22 ACCEL/DECEL applies.

All parameters
fOUT
A
B
8125 8124 t
Aux.
motor
1
t
0
A = speed regulated motor accelerating using group 22
ACCEL/DECEL parameters (2202 or 2205).
B = speed regulated motor decelerating using group 22
ACCEL/DECEL parameters (2203 or 2206).
At aux. motor start, speed regulated motor decelerates
using 8125 DEC IN AUX START.
At aux. motor stop, speed regulated motor accelerates
using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.
0.0 = NOT SEL 0.0: Not selected 1 = 0.1 s
0.1…1800.0 s 0.1…1800 s: Activates this function using the value entered
as the acceleration time.
8125 DEC IN AUX Sets the PFC deceleration time for a maximum-to-zero 0.0 = NO
START frequency ramp. This PFC deceleration ramp: T SEL
• applies to the speed regulated motor when an auxiliary
motor is switched on.
• replaces the deceleration ramp defined in group 22
ACCEL/DECEL
• applies only until the output of the regulated motor
decreases by an amount equal to the output of the
auxiliary motor. Then the deceleration ramp defined in
group 22 ACCEL/DECEL applies.
See the figure for parameter 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.
0.0 = NOT SEL 0.0: Not selected 1 = 0.1 s
0.1…1800.0 s 0.1…1800 s: Activates this function using the value entered
as the deceleration time.
8126 TIMED Sets the Autochange using a timed function. See parameter NOT SEL
AUTOCHNG 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
TIMED FUNC 1 Enables Autochange when timed function 1 is active. 1

All parameters
8127 MOTORS Sets the actual number of PFC controlled motors (maximum 2
7 motors: 1 speed regulated, 3 connected direct-on-line and
3 spare motors).
This value includes also the speed regulated motor.
This value must be compatible with the number of relays
allocated to PFC if the Autochange function is used.
If Autochange function is not used, the speed regulated
motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to PFC
but it needs to be included in this value.
1…7 Number of PFC motors 1=1
8128 AUX START Sets the start order of the auxiliary motors. EVEN
ORDER RUNTIME
EVEN Time sharing is active. Evens out the cumulative run time of 1
RUNTIME the auxiliary motors. The start order depends on the run
times: The auxiliary motor whose cumulative run time is
shortest is started first, then the motor whose cumulative
run time is the second shortest etc. When the demand
drops, the first motor to be stopped is the one whose
cumulative run time is longest.
RELAY The start order is fixed to be the order of the relays. 2
ORDER
98 OPTIONS External serial communication activation
9802 COMM PROT Activates the external serial communication and selects the STD
SEL interface. MODBUS
Note: Before activating embedded fieldbus communication,
set parameter 1611 PARAMETER VIEW to LONG VIEW
(3).
NOT SEL No communication 0
STD MODBUS Embedded fieldbus, EIA-485 interface (I/O terminals 1
23…26). See chapter Fieldbus control with the embedded
fieldbus on page 287.
MODBUS Embedded fieldbus. Interface: RS-232 (ie control panel 10
RS232 connector). See chapter Fieldbus control with the
embedded fieldbus on page 287.
99 START-UP DATA Language selection. Definition of motor set-up data.
9901 LANGUAGE Selects the display language used on the Assistant control ENGLISH
panel.
Note: With the ACS-CP-D Assistant control panel, the
following languages are available: English (0), Chinese (1),
Korean (2) and Japanese (3).
ENGLISH British English 0
ENGLISH (AM) American English 1
DEUTSCH German 2
ITALIANO Italian 3
ESPAÑOL Spanish 4
PORTUGUES Portuguese 5
NEDERLANDS Dutch 6
FRANÇAIS French 7
DANSK Danish 8

All parameters
SUOMI Finnish 9
SVENSKA Swedish 10
RUSSKI Russian 11
POLSKI Polish 12
TÜRKÇE Turkish 13
CZECH Czech 14
MAGYAR Hungarian 15
ELLINIKA Greek 16
9902 APPLIC Selects the application macro. See chapter Application ABB
MACRO macros on page 101. STANDA
RD
ABB Standard macro for constant speed applications 1
STANDARD
3-WIRE 3-wire macro for constant speed applications 2
ALTERNATE Alternate macro for start forward and start reverse 3
applications
MOTOR POT Motor potentiometer macro for digital signal speed control 4
applications
HAND/AUTO Hand/Auto macro to be used when two control devices are 5
connected to the drive:
• Device 1 communicates through the interface defined by
external control location EXT1.
• Device 2 communicates through the interface defined by
external control location EXT2.
EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time. Switching between
EXT1/2 through digital input.
PID CONTROL PID control. For applications in which the drive controls a 6
process value, eg pressure control by the drive running the
pressure boost pump. Measured pressure and the pressure
reference are connected to the drive.
PFC PFC (Pump and fan control) macro for pump alternation 7
CONTROL applications
SPFC SPFC (Soft pump and fan control) macro for pump 15
CONTROL alternation applications where lower pressure peaks are
desirable when a new auxiliary motor is started.
AC500 AC500 PLC macro. See section AC500 Modbus macro on 21
MODBUS page 113.
LOAD FD SET FlashDrop parameter values as defined by the FlashDrop 31
file. Parameter view is selected by parameter 1611
PARAMETER VIEW.
FlashDrop is an optional device for fast copying of
parameters to unpowered drives. FlashDrop allows easy
customization of the parameter list, eg selected parameters
can be hidden. For more information, see MFDT-01
FlashDrop user’s manual (3AFE68591074 [English]).
USER S1 User 1 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that 0
LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are
suitable for the application.

All parameters
USER S1 Save User 1 macro. Stores the current parameter settings -1
SAVE and the motor model.
USER S2 User 2 macro loaded into use. Before loading, check that -2
LOAD the saved parameter settings and the motor model are
suitable for the application.
USER S2 Save User 2 macro. Stores the current parameter settings -3
SAVE and the motor model.
9905 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor voltage. Must be equal to the 200 V
VOLT value on the motor rating plate. The drive cannot supply the units:
motor with a voltage greater than the input power voltage. 230 V
Note that the output voltage is not limited by the nominal 400 V
motor voltage but increased linearly up to the value of the E units:
input voltage. 400 V
Output voltage 400 V
U units:
Input voltage 460 V
9905
Output frequency
9907
WARNING! Never connect a motor to a drive which is
connected to power line with voltage level higher than
the rated motor voltage.
200 V units: Voltage. 1=1 V
115…345 V Note: The stress on the motor insulations is always
400 V E units: dependent on the drive supply voltage. This also applies to
200…600 V the case where the motor voltage rating is lower than the
400 V U units: rating of the drive and the supply of the drive.
230…690 V
9906 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the I2N
CURR value on the motor rating plate.
0.2…2.0 · I2N Current 1 = 0.1 A
9907 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor frequency, ie the frequency at E: 50.0 Hz
FREQ which the output voltage equals the nominal motor voltage: U: 60.0 Hz
Field weakening point = Nom. frequency · Supply voltage /
Motor nom. voltage
10.0…500.0 Hz Frequency 1 = 0.1 Hz
9908 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor speed. Must be equal to the Type
SPEED value on the motor rating plate. dependent
50…18000 rpm Speed 1 = 1 rpm
9909 MOTOR NOM Defines the nominal motor power. Must equal the value on PN
POWER the motor rating plate.
0.2…3.0 · PN kW Power 1=
0.1 kW /
0.1 hp

All parameters
9914 PHASE Inverts two phases in the motor cable. This changes the NO
INVERSION direction of the motor rotation without having to exchange
the positions of two motor cable phase conductors at the
drive output terminals or at the motor connection box.
NO Phases not inverted 0
YES Phases inverted 1

Fieldbus control with the embedded fieldbus 287
13
Fieldbus control with the
embedded fieldbus
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network using embedded fieldbus.
System overview
The drive is connected to an external control system through embedded fieldbus. The
embedded fieldbus supports Modbus RTU protocol. Modbus is a serial,
asynchronous protocol. Transaction is half-duplex.
The embedded fieldbus can be connected with either RS-232 (control panel
connector X2) or EIA-485 (I/O terminals 23…26). The maximum length of the
communication cable with RS-232 is restricted to 3 meters.
RS-232 is designed for a point-to-point application (a single master controlling one
slave). EIA-485 is designed for a multipoint application (a single master controlling
one or more slaves).
Note: The RS-232 connection is supported from software version 4.02A onwards.

288 Fieldbus control with the embedded fieldbus
Fieldbus
controller
Fieldbus
Other
Drive devices
RS-232
panel connector
Embedded fieldbus
(Modbus) connection
through either RS-232 or
EIA-485 EIA-485
I/O terminals 23…26
Data flow
Control word (CW)
References Process I/O (cyclic)
Status word (SW)
Actual values
Service messages (acyclic)
Parameter R/W
Note: The RS-232 connection is supported from software version 4.02A onwards.
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other
available sources, eg digital and analog inputs.

Setting up communication through the embedded Modbus

Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, install the fieldbus according to
instructions given in section Connecting the embedded fieldbus on page 54.
The communication through the fieldbus link is initialized by setting parameter 9802
COMM PROT SEL to STD MODBUS or MODBUS RS232. The communication
parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL must also be adjusted. See the table
below.
Parameter Alternative Setting for Function/Information
settings fieldbus control
COMMUNICATION INITIALIZATION
9802 COMM PROT NOT SEL STD MODBUS Initializes embedded fieldbus
SEL STD MODBUS (with EIA-485) communication.
MODBUS RS232 MODBUS RS232
(with RS-232)
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION

1611 PARAMETER FLASHDROP LONG VIEW Selects the long view.
VIEW SHORT VIEW
LONG VIEW
5302 EFB STATION 0…65535 Any Defines the station ID address
ID of the EIA-485/RS-232 link. No
two stations on line may have
the same address.
5303 EFB BAUD 1.2 kbit/s Defines the communication
RATE 2.4 kbit/s speed of the EIA-485/RS-232
4.8 kbit/s link.
9.6 kbit/s
19.2 kbit/s
38.4 kbit/s
57.6 kbit/s
76.8 kbit/s
5304 EFB PARITY 8 NONE 1 Selects the parity setting. The
8 NONE 2 same settings must be used in
8 EVEN 1 all on-line stations.
8 ODD 1
5305 EFB CTRL ABB DRV LIM Any Selects the communication
PROFILE DCU PROFILE profile used by the drive. See
section Communication
ABB DRV FULL profiles on page 302.
5310 EFB PAR 10 0…65535 Any Selects an actual value to be
… … mapped to Modbus register
5317 EFB PAR 17 400xx.
After the configuration parameters in group 53 EFB PROTOCOL have been set, the
Drive control parameters on page 291 must be checked and adjusted when
necessary.

The new settings take effect when the drive is next powered up, or when parameter
5302 EFB STATION ID setting is cleared and reset.

Drive control parameters

After the Modbus communication has been set up, the drive control parameters listed
in the table below should be checked and adjusted when necessary.
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the Modbus
interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The
Function/Information column gives a description of the parameter.
Parameter Setting for Function/Information Modbus register
fieldbus address
control
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU
1001 EXT1 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 40031 bits
COMMANDS bits 0…1 (START/STOP) when 0…1
EXT1 is selected as the active
control location.
1002 EXT2 COMM Enables 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 40031 bits
COMMANDS bits 0…1 (START/STOP) when 0…1
EXT2 is selected as the active
control location.
1003 DIRECTION FORWARD Enables rotation direction control 40031 bit 2
REVERSE as defined by parameters 1001
and 1002. The direction control is
REQUEST explained in section Reference
handling on page 297.
1102 EXT1/EXT2 COMM Enables EXT1/EXT2 selection 40001 40031 bit 5
SEL through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 11
bit 5 (with ABB drives profile 5319
EFB PAR 19 bit 11).
1103 REF1 COMM Fieldbus reference REF1 is used 40002 for REF1
SELECT COMM+AI1 when EXT1 is selected as the
active control location. See section
COMM*AI1 Fieldbus references on page 294
for information on the alternative
settings.
1106 REF2 COMM Fieldbus reference REF2 is used 40003 for REF2
SELECT COMM+AI1 when EXT2 is selected as the
COMM*AI1 active control location. See section
Fieldbus references on page 294
for information on the alternative
settings.
OUTPUT SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU
1401 RELAY COMM Enables relay output RO control by 40134 for signal 0134
OUTPUT 1 COMM(-1) signal 0134 COMM RO WORD.
1501 AO1 135 Directs the contents of fieldbus 40135 for signal 0135
CONTENT reference 0135 COMM VALUE 1
SEL to analog output AO.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS ABB DRV DCU
1601 RUN COMM Enables the control of the inverted 40001 bit 3 40031 bit 6
ENABLE Run enable signal (Run disable)
through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1
EFB PAR 19 bit 3).

Parameter Setting for Function/Information Modbus register

fieldbus address
control
1604 FAULT COMM Enables fault reset through 40001 bit 7 40031 bit 4
RESET SEL fieldbus 0301 FB CMD WORD 1
EFB PAR 19 bit 7).
1606 LOCAL COMM Local control mode lock signal - 40031 bit
LOCK through 0301 FB CMD WORD 1 14
bit 14
1607 PARAM DONE Saves parameter value changes 41607
SAVE SAVE... (including those made through
fieldbus control) to permanent
memory.
1608 START COMM Inverted Start enable 1 (Start - 40032 bit
ENABLE 1 disable) through 0302 FB CMD 18
WORD 2 bit 18
1609 START COMM Inverted Start enable 2 (Start - 40032 bit
ENABLE 2 disable) through 0302 FB CMD 19
WORD 2 bit 19
LIMITS ABB DRV DCU
2201 ACC/DEC COMM Acceleration/deceleration ramp - 40031 bit
1/2 SEL pair selection through 0301 FB 10
CMD WORD 1 bit 10
2209 RAMP COMM Ramp input to zero through 0301 40001 bit 6 40031 bit
INPUT 0 FB CMD WORD 1 bit 13 (with ABB 13
drives profile 5319 EFB PAR 19 bit
6)
COMMUNICATION FAULT FUNCTIONS ABB DRV DCU
3018 COMM NOT SEL Determines drive action in case 43018
FAULT FUNC FAULT fieldbus communication is lost.
CONST SP
7
LAST
SPEED
3019 COMM 0.1…60.0 s Defines the time between 43019
FAULT TIME communication loss detection and
the action selected with parameter
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
PID CONTROLLER REFERENCE SIGNAL SOURCE SELECTION ABB DRV DCU
4010/ SET POINT COMM PID control reference (REF2) 40003 for REF2
4110/ SEL COMM+AI1
4210 COMM*AI1

Fieldbus control interface

The communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16-bit input
and output data words (with ABB drives profile) and 32-bit input and output words
(with DCU profile).
 Control word and Status word

The Control word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The Control word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive
switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control
word.
The Status word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the
fieldbus controller.
 References
References (REF) are 16-bit signed integers. A negative reference (eg reverse
direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s complement from the
corresponding positive reference value. The contents of each reference word can be
used as the frequency or process reference.
 Actual values
Actual values (ACT) are 16-bit words containing selected values of the drive.

Fieldbus references
 Reference selection and correction
Fieldbus reference (called COMM in signal selection contexts) is selected by setting a
reference selection parameter – 1103 or 1106 – to COMM, COMM+AI1 or
COMM*AI1. When 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM, the
fieldbus reference is forwarded as such without correction. When parameter 1103 or
1106 is set to COMM+AI1 or COMM*AI1, the fieldbus reference is corrected using
analog input AI1 as shown in the following examples.
Setting When COMM > 0 When COMM < 0
COM COMM(%) · (MAX-MIN) + MIN COMM(%) · (MAX-MIN) - MIN
M+AI1 + (AI(%) -50%) · (MAX-MIN) + (AI(%) -50%) · (MAX-MIN)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
COMM
Max limit REF (%) -100% -50% 0%
50 0
Min limit
AI = 100%
AI = 100%
25 -25
AI = 50% AI = 50%
AI = 0% Min limit Max limit AI = 0%

0 -50
0% 50% 100% COMM
REF (%)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
COMM
REF (%) -100% -50% 0%
50 0
Max limit Min limit
-10
40
AI = 100%
AI = 100%
25 -25
AI = 50% AI = 50%
AI = 0% Min limit Max limit AI = 0%
10 -40
0 COMM -50
0% 50% 100% REF (%)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX / 1108 REF2 MAX.
Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN / 1107 REF2 MIN.

Setting When COMM > 0 When COMM < 0

COM COMM(%) · (AI(%) / 50%) · (MAX-MIN) + COMM(%) · (AI(%) / 50%) · (MAX-MIN) -
M*AI1 MIN MIN
Corrected
reference (Hz)
COMM
Max limit REF (%) -100% -50% 0%
50 Min limit 0
AI = 0%
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
25 -25
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
AI = 0% Min limit Max limit
0 -50
0% 50% 100% COMM
REF (%)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
COMM
REF (%) -100% -50% 0%
50 0
Max limit Min limit AI = 0%
40 -10
AI = 100%
25 -25
AI = 50%
AI = 100%
Min limit Max limit AI = 50%
10 AI = 0%
-40
0 COMM -50
0% 50% 100% REF (%)
Corrected
reference (Hz)
Maximum limit is defined by parameter 1105 REF1 MAX / 1108 REF2 MAX.
Minimum limit is defined by parameter 1104 REF1 MIN / 1107 REF2 MIN.

 Fieldbus reference scaling

Fieldbus references REF1 and REF2 are scaled as shown in the following table.
Note: Any correction of the reference (see section Reference selection and
correction on page 296) is applied before scaling.
Reference Range Reference Scaling Remarks
type
REF1 -32767 Frequency -20000 = -(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
… 0=0 1104/1105. Actual motor
+32767 +20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by
(20000 corresponds to 100%) 2007/2008.
REF2 -32767 Frequency -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
… 0=0 1107/1108. Actual motor
+32767 +10000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by
(10000 corresponds to 100%) 2007/2008.
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
reference 0=0 4012/4013 (PID set1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 4112/4113 (PID set2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
Note: The settings of parameters 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN have no
effect on the reference scaling.

 Reference handling
The control of rotation direction is configured for each control location (EXT1 and
EXT2) using the parameters in group 10 START/STOP/DIR. Fieldbus references are
bipolar, ie they can be negative or positive. The following diagrams illustrate how
group 10 parameters and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce the
reference REF1/REF2.
Direction determined by Direction determined by digital
the sign of COMM command, eg digital input,
control panel
Par. 1003 Resultant Resultant
DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2
FORWARD
Max. ref. Max. ref.
Fieldbus Fieldbus
ref. 1/2 ref. 1/2
-100% 100% -100% 100%
-163% 163% -163% 163%
–[Max.ref.] –[Max.ref.]

DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2
REVERSE
Max. ref. Max. ref.
-163% 163% -163% 163%

Fieldbus -100% 100% Fieldbus -100% 100%
ref. 1/2 ref. 1/2
–[Max.Ref.] –[Max.Ref.]

DIRECTION = REF1/2 REF1/2 Direction
REQUEST Command:
FORWARD
Max. ref. Max. ref.
-163%
Fieldbus -100% Fieldbus
ref. 1/2 ref. 1/2
100% -100% 100%
163% -163% 163%
–[Max. ref.] –[Max. ref.]

Direction
Command:
REVERSE
 Actual value scaling

The scaling of the integers sent to the master as Actual values depends on the
selected function. See chapter Actual signals and parameters on page 163.

Modbus mapping
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the drive.
Function Code Additional information
Hex (dec)
Read Coil 01 (01) Reads discrete output status. The individual bits of the control word
Status are mapped to coils 1...16. Relay outputs are mapped sequentially
beginning with Coil 33 (eg, RO1 = Coil 33).
Read Discrete 02 (02) Reads discrete input status. The individual bits of the status word
Input Status are mapped to inputs 1...16 or 1...32, depending on the active
profile. Terminal inputs are mapped sequentially beginning with
input 33 (eg, DI1 = Input 33).
Read Multiple 03 (03) Reads the contents of registers in a slave device.
Holding Parameter sets, control, status and reference values are mapped
Registers as holding registers.
Read Multiple 04 (04) Reads multiple input registers. The 2 analog input channels are
Input mapped as input registers 1 and 2.
Registers
Force Single 05 (05) Writes a single discrete output. The individual bits of the control
Coil word are mapped to Coils 1...16. Relay outputs are mapped
sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (eg, RO1 = Coil 33).
Write Single 06 (06) Writes to a single register in a slave device.
Holding Parameter sets, control, status and reference values are mapped
Register as holding registers.
Diagnostics 08 (08) Provides a series of tests for checking the communication between
the master and the slave devices, or for checking various internal
error conditions within the slave.
The following subcodes are supported:
00 Return Query Data: The data passed in the request data field is
to be returned in the response. The entire response message
should be identical to the request.
01 Restart Communications Option: The slave device serial line
port must be initialized and restarted, and all of its communication
event counters cleared. If the port is currently in Listen Only Mode,
no response is returned. If the port is not currently in Listen Only
Mode, a normal response is returned before the restart.
04 Force Listen Only Mode: Forces the addressed slave device to
Listen Only Mode. This isolates it from the other devices on the
network, allowing them to continue communicating without
interruption from the addressed remote device. No response is
returned. The only function that is processed after this mode is
entered is the Restart Communications Option function (subcode
01).
Force Multiple 0F (15) Writes multiple discrete outputs. The individual bits of the control
Coils word are mapped to Coils 1...16. Relay outputs are mapped
sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (eg, RO1 = Coil 33).
Write Multiple 10 (16) Writes to the registers (1 to approximately 120 registers) in a slave
Holding device.
Registers Parameter sets, control, status and reference values are mapped
as holding registers.
Read/Write 17 (23) Performs a combination of one read operation and one write
Multiple operation (function codes 03 and 10) in a single Modbus
Holding transaction. The write operation is performed before the read
Registers operation.

 Register mapping
The drive parameters, Control/Status word, references and actual values are mapped
to the area 4xxxx so that:
• 40001…40099 are reserved for drive control/status, reference and actual values.
• 40101…49999 are reserved for drive parameters 0101…9999. (Eg 40102 is
parameter 0102). In this mapping, the thousands and hundreds correspond to the
group number, while the tens and ones correspond to the parameter number
within a group.
The register addresses that do not correspond with drive parameters are invalid.
If there is an attempt to read or write invalid addresses, the Modbus interface returns
an exception code to the controller. See Exception codes on page 301.

The following table gives information on the contents of the Modbus addresses
40001…40012 and 40031…40034.
Modbus register Access Information
40001 Control Word R/W Control word. Supported only by ABB drives profile, ie
when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV
LIM or ABB DRV FULL. Parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19
shows a copy of the Control word in hexadecimal
format.
40002 Reference 1 R/W External reference REF1. See section Fieldbus
references on page 294.
40003 Reference 2 R/W External reference REF2. See section Fieldbus
references on page 294.
40004 Status Word R Status word. Supported only by ABB drives profile, ie
when 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE setting is ABB DRV
LIM or ABB DRV FULL. Parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20
shows a copy of the Control word in hexadecimal
format.
40005 Actual 1…8 R Actual value 1…8. Use parameter 5310… 5317 to
… select an actual value to be mapped to Modbus register
40012 40005…40012.
40013 MDB DATA IN 1...2 R Modbus Data IN 1 and 2. Use parameter 5321 and 5322
... to select an actual value to be mapped to Modbus
40014 register 40013 and 40014. Supported only by STD
MODBUS.
40031 Control Word LSW R/W 0301 FB CMD WORD 1, ie the least significant word of
the DCU profile 32-bit Control word.
Supported only by DCU profile, ie when 5305 EFB
CTRL PROFILE setting is DCU PROFILE.
40032 Control Word MSW R/W 0302 FB CMD WORD 2, ie the most significant word of
the DCU profile 32-bit Control word.
40033 Status Word LSW R 0303 FB STS WORD 1, ie the least significant word of
the DCU profile 32-bit Status word.
40034 ACS310 STATUS R 0304 FB STS WORD 2, ie the most significant word of
WORD MSW the DCU profile 32-bit Status word.
40080 MB Data OUT W Modbus Data OUT 1...10. Use parameter 5323...5332
... 1...10 to select an actual value to be mapped to Modbus
40089 register 40080...40089. Supported only by STD
MODBUS.
Note: Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile, ie modified
values are not automatically stored to permanent memory. Use parameter 1607
PARAM SAVE to save all changed values.

 Function codes
Supported function codes for the holding 4xxxx register are:
Code Function name Additional information
Hex
(dec)
03 Read 4X Register Reads the binary contents of registers (4X references) in a slave
(03) device.
06 Preset single 4X Presets a value into a single register (4X reference). When
(06) register broadcast, the function presets the same register reference in all
attached slaves.
10 Preset multiple 4X Presets values into a sequence of registers (4X references). When
(16) registers broadcast, the function presets the same register references in all
attached slaves.
17 Read/Write 4X Performs a combination of one read operation and one write
(23) registers operation (function codes 03 and 10) in a single Modbus
transaction. Write operation is performed before the read
operation.
Note: In the Modbus data message, register 4xxxx is addressed as xxxx -1. For
example register 40002 is addressed as 0001.
 Exception codes
Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The drive
supports the standard Modbus exception codes listed in the following table.
Code Name Description
01 Illegal Function Unsupported command
02 Illegal Data Address Address does not exist or is read/write protected.
03 Illegal Data Value Incorrect value for the drive:
• Value is outside minimum or maximum limits.
• Parameter is read-only.
• Message is too long.
• Parameter write is not allowed when start is active.
• Parameter write is not allowed when factory macro is
selected.

Communication profiles
The embedded fieldbus supports three communication profiles:
• DCU communication profile (DCU PROFILE)
• ABB drives limited communication profile (ABB DRV LIM)
• ABB drives full communication profile (ABB DRV FULL).
The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, and it is the
internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus
environment. The ABB drives limited is based on the PROFIBUS interface. ABB
drives full profile supports two Control word bits not supported by the (ABB DRV LIM)
implementation.
Modbus Embedded fieldbus

network EIA-485/RS-232 Drive
ABB DRV LIM /
ABB DRV FULL
ABB drives profile DCU profile
Data conversion
Actual values selected
by parameter.
5310…5317
DCU PROFILE
DCU profile Control/Status word DCU profile
Data conversion
for REF1/2
Actual values selected
by parameter.
5310…5317
 ABB drives communication profile

Two implementations of the ABB drives communication profile are available: ABB
drives full and ABB drives limited. The ABB drives communication profile is active
when parameter 5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE is set to ABB DRV FULL or ABB DRV
LIM. The Control word and Status word for the profile are described below.
The ABB drives communication profiles can be used through both EXT1 and EXT2.
The Control word commands are in effect when parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS
or 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS (whichever control location is active) is set to COMM.

The table below and the state diagram on page 306 describe the Control word
content for the ABB drives profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states
shown in the diagram.
ABB drives profile Control word, parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19
Bit Name Value Comments
0 OFF1 CONTROL 1 Enter READY TO OPERATE.
0 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (2203/2206).
Enter OFF1 ACTIVE; proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are active.
1 OFF2 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF2 inactive).
0 Emergency OFF, drive coast to stop.
Enter OFF2 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON INHIBITED.
2 OFF3 CONTROL 1 Continue operation (OFF3 inactive).
0 Emergency stop, drive stops within time defined by par.
2208. Enter OFF3 ACTIVE; proceed to SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED.
WARNING: Ensure motor and driven machine can be
stopped using this stop mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 Enter OPERATION ENABLED. (Note: The Run enable
OPERATION signal must be active; see parameter 1601. If par. 1601 is
set to COMM, this bit also activates the Run enable signal.)
0 Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION INHIBITED.
4 Note: Bit 4 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL profile.
RAMP_OUT_ 1 Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: OUTPUT
ZERO (ABB DRV ENABLED.
FULL) 0 Force Ramp function generator output to zero.
Drive ramps to stop (current and DC voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.
0 Halt ramping (Ramp function generator output held).
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 Normal operation. Enter OPERATING.
ZERO 0 Force Ramp function generator input to zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 Fault reset if an active fault exists. Enter SWITCH-ON
INHIBITED. Effective if par. 1604 is set to COMM.
0 Continue normal operation.
8… Not in use
9
10 Note: Bit 10 is supported only by ABB DRV FULL.
REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
(ABB DRV FULL) 0 Control word =/ 0 or Reference =/ 0: Retain last Control word
and Reference.
Control word = 0 and Reference = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
Reference and deceleration/acceleration ramp are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 Select external control location EXT2. Effective if par. 1102
is set to COMM.
0 Select external control location EXT1. Effective if par. 1102
is set to COMM.

ABB drives profile Control word, parameter 5319 EFB PAR 19

Bit Name Value Comments
12 MOTOR_HEAT 1 Start motor heating.
0 Stop motor heating. See parameter 2115, option COMM.
13… Reserved
15
The table below and the state diagram on page 306 describe the Status word content
for the ABB drives profile. The upper case boldface text refers to the states shown in
the diagram.
ABB drives profile (EFB) Status word, parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON
0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON
1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE
0 OFF1 ACTIVE
2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED
0 OPERATION INHIBITED
3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT. See chapter Fault tracing on page 311.
0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive
0 OFF2 ACTIVE
5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive
0 OFF3 ACTIVE
6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBITED
0 Switch-on inhibit not active
7 ALARM 1 Alarm. See chapter Fault tracing on page 311.
0 No alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals reference value (= is
within tolerance limits, ie the difference between the output
frequency and the frequency reference is less than or equal
to 4/1%* of the nominal motor frequency).
* Asymmetric hysteresis: 4% when frequency enters the
reference area, 1% when frequency exits the reference
area.
0 Actual value differs from reference value (= is outside
tolerance limits).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL

ABB drives profile (EFB) Status word, parameter 5320 EFB PAR 20
Bit Name Value STATE/Description
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter value exceeds the supervision high
limit. Bit value is 1 until the supervised parameter value falls
below the supervision low limit. See parameter group 32
SUPERVISION.
0 Supervised parameter value falls below the supervision low
limit. Bit value is 0 until the supervised parameter value
exceeds the supervision high limit. See parameter group 32
SUPERVISION.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location EXT2 selected
0 External control location EXT1 selected
12 EXT RUN 1 External Run enable signal received
ENABLE
0 No external Run enable received
13 MOTOR_HEAT 1 Motor heating is On
0 Motor heating is Off
14… Reserved
15

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of Control word (CW) and
Status word (SW) bits for the ABB drives profile.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit 1=0)
OFF3 OFF2 FAULT (SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit 4=0)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)**
n(f)=0 / I=0
From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
INPUT POWER OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
OFF1
(SW Bit1=0)
ACTIVE
n(f)=0 / I=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)
A B* C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON
(CW Bit3 =0) (CW xxxx x1*xx xxxx x110)
OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2 =0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON
OPERATION INHIBITED (CW= xxxx x1*xx xxxx x111)
B* C* D* READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0)* (CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)
OPERATION
C D (SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1*xx xxx1* 1111
ie Bit4=1)*
State
State change RFG OUTPUT
ENABLED*
Path described in example D
CW = Control word B*
(CW Bit6=0)
(CW=xxxx x1*xx xx11* 1111
SW = Status word ie Bit5=1)
RFG = Ramp function generator
RFG: ACCELERATOR
I = Par. 0104 CURRENT ENABLED
f = Par. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
C
n = Speed (CW=xxxx x1*xx x111* 1111
* Supported only by ABB DRV FULL ie Bit6=1)
profile. OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
** State transition also occurs if the fault
is reset from any other source (eg digital D
input).

 DCU communication profile

Because the DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, two
different signals are needed for both the control (0301 and 0302) and status (0303
and 0304) words.
The following tables describe the Control word content for the DCU profile.
DCU profile Control word, parameter 0301 FB CMD WORD 1
Bit Name Value Information
0 STOP 1 Stop according to either the stop mode parameter (2102) or
the stop mode requests (bits 7 and 8).
Note: Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in
a stop command.
0 No operation
1 START 1 Start
Note: Simultaneous STOP and START commands result in
a stop command.
0 No operation
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction. The direction is defined by using the
XOR operation on bit 2 and 31 (= sign of the reference)
values.
0 Forward direction.
3 LOCAL 1 Enter the local control mode.
0 Enter external control mode.
4 RESET -> 1 Reset.
other No operation
5 EXT2 1 Switch to external control EXT2.
0 Switch to external control EXT1.
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Activate Run disable.
0 Activate Run enable.
7 STPMODE_R 1 Stop along currently active deceleration ramp (bit 10). Bit 0
value must be 1 (= STOP).
0 No operation
8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency stop. But does not cause an EMERGENCY
STOP alarm.
Bit 0 value must be 1 (=STOP).
0 No operation
9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast to stop. Bit 0 value must be 1 (= STOP).
0 No operation
10 RAMP_2 1 Use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 2 (defined by
parameters 2205…2207).
0 Use acceleration/deceleration ramp pair 1 (defined by
parameters 2202…2204).
11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Force ramp output to zero.
0 No operation
12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Halt ramping (Ramp function generator output held).
0 No operation


13 RAMP_IN_0 1 Force ramp input to zero.
0 No operation
14 REQ_LOCALLO 1 Enable local lock. Entering the local control mode is
C disabled (LOC/REM key of the panel).
0 No operation
15 Reserved

16 FBLOCAL_CTL 1 Fieldbus local mode for Control word requested.
Example: If the drive is in remote control and the
start/stop/direction command source is DI for external
control location 1 (EXT1): by setting bit 16 to value 1, the
start/stop/direction is controlled by the fieldbus command
word.
0 No fieldbus local mode
17 FBLOCAL_REF 1 Fieldbus local mode Control word for reference requested.
See example in bit 16 FBLOCAL_CTL.
0 No fieldbus local mode
18 START_DISABL 1 No Start enable
E1 0 Enable start. Effective if parameter 1608 setting is COMM.
19 START_DISABL 1 No Start enable
E2 0 Enable start. Effective if parameter 1609 setting is COMM.
20… Reserved
21
22 MOTOR_HEAT 1 Start motor heating
0 Stop motor heating. See parameter 2115 option COMM.
23… Reserved
26
27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed reference request.
This is an internal control bit. Only for supervision.
0 No operation
28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed reference request.
0 No operation
29 LINK_ON 1 Master detected on fieldbus link.
0 Fieldbus link is down.
30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit. Not supported by STD MODBUS.
0 No start inhibit.
31 Reserved

The following tables describe the Status word content for the DCU profile.
DCU profile Status word, parameter 0303 FB STS WORD 1
0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.
0 Drive is not ready.
1 ENABLED 1 External Run enable signal received.
0 No external Run enable signal received.
2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command.
0 Drive has not received start command.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating.
0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed.
0 Drive has not reached zero speed.
5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating.
0 Drive is not accelerating.
6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating.
0 Drive is not decelerating.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint. Actual value equals reference
value (ie is within tolerance limits).
0 Drive has not reached setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by group 20 LIMITS settings.
0 Operation is within group 20 LIMITS settings.
9 SUPER1 OVER 1 A supervised parameter (group 32 SUPERVISION) is
outside its limits.
0 All supervised parameters are within limits.
10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction.
0 Drive reference is in forward direction.
11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.
0 Drive is running in forward direction.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode.
0 Control is not in control panel local mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode
0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode.
0 Control is in EXT1 mode.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state.
0 Drive is not in a fault state.

DCU profile Status word, parameter 0304 FB STS WORD 2

16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on.
0 No alarms are on.
17 NOTICE 1 A maintenance request is pending.
0 No maintenance request
18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked.)
0 Direction lock is OFF.
19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked.)
0 Local mode lock is OFF.
20 CTL_MODE 1 N/A
0 Drive is in scalar control mode.
21 Reserved
22 MOTOR_HEAT 1 Motor heating is On
0 Motor heating is Off
23… Reserved
25
26 REQ_CTL 1 Control word requested from fieldbus
0 No operation
27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested from fieldbus
0 Reference 1 is not requested from fieldbus.
28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested from fieldbus
0 Reference 2 is not requested from fieldbus.
29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested from fieldbus
0 External PID reference 2 is not requested from
fieldbus.
30 ACK_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit from fieldbus
0 No start inhibit from fieldbus
31 Reserved

Fault tracing 311
14
Fault tracing
The chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It also lists all alarm and
fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. Read
the safety instructions in chapter Safety on page 15 before you work on the
drive.
Alarm and fault indications

Fault is indicated with a red LED. See section LEDs on page 333.
An alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal drive status.
Using the information given in this chapter most alarm and fault causes can be
identified and corrected. If not, contact an ABB representative.
The four digit code number in parenthesis after the fault is for the fieldbus
communication. See chapter Fieldbus control with the embedded fieldbus on page
287.
How to reset
RESET
EXIT
The drive can be reset either by pressing the keypad key (Basic control panel) or
RESET
(Assistant control panel), through digital input or fieldbus, or by switching the
supply voltage off for a while. The source for the fault reset signal is selected by

312 Fault tracing
parameter 1604 FAULT RESET SEL. When the fault has been removed, the motor
can be restarted.
Fault history
When a fault is detected, it is stored in the fault history. The latest faults are stored
together with the time stamp.
Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 and 0413 PREVIOUS
FAULT 2 store the most recent faults. Parameters 0404…0409 show drive operation
data at the time the latest fault occurred. The Assistant control panel provides
additional information about the fault history. See section Fault logger mode on page
94 for more information.

Fault tracing 313
Alarm messages generated by the drive

CODE ALARM CAUSE WHAT TO DO
2001 OVERCURRENT Output current limit Check motor load.
0308 bit 0 controller is active. Check acceleration time (2202 and
(programmable fault 2205).
function 1610) Check motor and motor cable
(including phasing).
Check ambient conditions. Load
capacity decreases if installation site
ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C.
See section Derating on page 338.
2002 OVERVOLTAGE DC overvoltage Check deceleration time (2203 and
0308 bit 1 controller is active. 2206).
(programmable fault Check input power line for static or
function 1610) transient overvoltage.
2003 UNDERVOLTAGE DC undervoltage Check input power supply.

0308 bit 2 controller is active.
(programmable fault
function 1610)
2004 DIR LOCK Change of direction is Check parameter 1003 DIRECTION
0308 bit 3 not allowed. settings.
2005 IO COMM Fieldbus Check status of fieldbus

0308 bit 4 communication break communication. See chapter
Fieldbus control with the embedded
(programmable fault fieldbus on page 287.
function 3018, 3019)
Check fault function parameter
settings.
Check connections.
Check if master can communicate.
2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input AI1 signal Check fault function parameter
0308 bit 5 has fallen below limit settings.
(programmable fault defined by parameter Check for proper analog control
function 3001, 3021) 3021 AI1 FAULT signal levels.
LIMIT. Check connections.
0308 bit 6 has fallen below limit settings.
(programmable fault defined by parameter Check for proper analog control
function 3001, 3022) 3022 AI2 FAULT signal levels.
LIMIT. Check connections.

314 Fault tracing

2008 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected Check panel connection.
0308 bit 7 as active control Check fault function parameters.
location for drive has
(programmable ceased Check control panel connector.
fault function 3002) communicating. Refit control panel in mounting
platform.
If drive is in external control mode
(REM) and is set to accept start/stop,
direction commands or references
through control panel:
Check group 10 START/STOP/DIR
and 11 REFERENCE SELECT
settings.
2009 DEVICE Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions. See also
OVERTEMP temperature is section Derating on page 338.
0308 bit 8 excessive. Alarm limit Check air flow and fan operation.
is 120 °C. Check motor power against drive
power.
2010 MOTOR TEMP Motor temperature is Check motor ratings, load and
0308 bit 9 too high (or appears to cooling.
(programmable fault be too high) due to Check start-up data.
function excessive load, Check fault function parameters.
3005…3009 / 3503) insufficient motor
power, inadequate
cooling or incorrect
start-up data.
Measured motor Check value of alarm limit.
temperature has Check that actual number of sensors
exceeded alarm limit corresponds to value set by
set by parameter 3503 parameter 3501 SENSOR TYPE.
ALARM LIMIT.
Let motor cool down. Ensure proper
motor cooling: Check cooling fan,
clean cooling surfaces, etc.
2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings.
0308 bit 11 stall region due to eg Check fault function parameters.
(programmable fault excessive load or
function insufficient motor
3010…3012) power.
2013 AUTORESET Automatic reset alarm Check parameter group 31

1)
0308 bit 12 AUTOMATIC RESET settings.
2014 AUTOCHANGE PFC Autochange See parameter group 81 PFC
1)
0308 bit 13 function is active. CONTROL, section PFC control
macro on page 110 and section
SPFC control macro on page 111.
2015 PFC I LOCK PFC Interlocks are Drive cannot start
0308 bit 14 active. • any motor (when Autochange is
used)
• the speed regulated motor (when
Autochange is not used).
See parameter group 81 PFC
CONTROL.
2018 PID SLEEP Sleep function has See parameter groups 40 PROCESS
1)
0309 bit 1 entered sleeping PID SET 1… 41 PROCESS PID SET
mode. 2.

Fault tracing 315

2021 START ENABLE 1 No Start enable 1 Check parameter 1608 START
MISSING signal received ENABLE 1 settings.
0309 bit 4 Check digital input connections.
Check fieldbus communication
settings.
2022 START ENABLE 2 No Start enable 2 Check parameter 1609 START
MISSING signal received ENABLE 2 settings.
0309 bit 5 Check digital input connections.
Check fieldbus communication
settings.
2023 EMERGENCY Drive has received Check that it is safe to continue
STOP emergency stop operation.
0309 bit 6 command and ramps Return emergency stop push button
to stop according to to normal position.
ramp time defined by
parameter 2208
EMERG DEC TIME.
2025 FIRST START Motor identification Wait until drive indicates that motor
0309 bit 8 magnetization is on. identification is completed.
This alarm belongs to
normal start-up
procedure.
2026 INPUT PHASE Intermediate circuit DC Check input power line fuses.
LOSS voltage is oscillating Check for input power supply
0309 bit 9 due to missing input imbalance.
(programmable fault power line phase or Check fault function parameters.
function 3016) blown fuse.
Alarm is generated
when DC voltage
ripple exceeds 14% of
nominal DC voltage.
2027 USER LOAD Condition defined by See parameter group 37 USER
CURVE 3701 USER LOAD C LOAD CURVE.
0309 bit 10 MODE has been valid
longer than half of the
time set by 3703
USER LOAD C TIME.
2028 START DELAY Start delay in progress See parameter 2113 START DELAY.
0309 bit 11
2030 INLET LOW Pressure at pump/fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet
0309 bit 13 inlet too low side of the pump/fan.
Check piping for leaks.
See parameter group 44 PUMP
PROTECTION.
2031 OUTLET HIGH Pressure at pump/fan Check piping for blocks.
0309 bit 14 outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP
PROTECTION.
2032 PIPE FILL Pipe fill in progress See parameters 4421…4426.
0309 bit 15

316 Fault tracing

2033 INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump/fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet
0310 bit 0 inlet too low side of the pump/fan.
Check piping for leaks.
PROTECTION.
2034 OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump/fan Check piping for blocks.
HIGH outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP
0310 bit 1 PROTECTION.
20381) MOTOR HEATING Motor heating is See parameter 2115 MOT. HEATING
active. SEL.
1)
Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions (eg parameter 1401
RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM)), this alarm is not indicated by a relay
output.

Fault tracing 317
Alarms generated by the Basic control panel

The Basic control panel indicates control panel alarms with a code, A5xxx.
ALARM CODE CAUSE WHAT TO DO
5001 Drive is not responding. Check panel connection.
5002 Incompatible Contact your local ABB representative.
communication profile
5010 Corrupted panel parameter Retry parameter upload.
backup file Retry parameter download.
5011 Drive is controlled from Change drive control to the local control mode.
another source.
5012 Direction of rotation is Enable change of direction. See parameter
locked. 1003 DIRECTION.
5013 Panel control is disabled Start from the panel is not possible. Reset the
because start inhibit is emergency stop command or remove the 3-wire
active. stop command before starting from the panel.
See section 3-wire macro on page 105 and
parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS, 1002
EXT2 COMMANDS and 2109 EMERG STOP
SEL.
5014 Panel control is disabled Reset drive fault and retry.
because of drive fault.
5015 Panel control is disabled Deactivate the local control mode lock and retry.
because the local control See parameter 1606 LOCAL LOCK.
mode lock is active.
5018 Parameter default value is Contact your local ABB representative.
not found.
5019 Writing non-zero Only parameter reset is allowed.
parameter value is
prohibited.
5020 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative.
group does not exist or
parameter value is
inconsistent.
5021 Parameter or parameter Contact your local ABB representative.
group is hidden.
5022 Parameter is write Parameter value is read-only and cannot be
protected. changed.
5023 Parameter change is not Stop drive and change parameter value.
allowed, when drive is
running.
5024 Drive is executing a task. Wait until task is completed.
5025 Software is being uploaded Wait until upload/download is complete.
or downloaded.
5026 Value is at or below Contact your local ABB representative.
minimum limit.
5027 Value is at or above Contact your local ABB representative.
maximum limit.
5028 Invalid value Contact your local ABB representative.

318 Fault tracing

5029 Memory is not ready. Retry.
5030 Invalid request Contact your local ABB representative.
5031 Drive is not ready for Check input power supply.
operation, eg due to low
DC voltage.
5032 Parameter error Contact your local ABB representative.
5040 Parameter download error.
Selected parameter set is Perform upload function before download.
not in current parameter
backup file.
5041 Parameter backup file Contact your local ABB representative.
does not fit into memory.
5042 Parameter download error.
Selected parameter set is Perform upload function before download.
not in current parameter
backup file.
5043 No start inhibit
5044 Parameter backup file Check that file is compatible with drive.
restoring error
5050 Parameter upload aborted Retry parameter upload.
5051 File error Contact your local ABB representative.
5052 Parameter upload has Retry parameter upload.
failed.
5060 Parameter download Retry parameter download.
aborted
5062 Parameter download has Retry parameter download.
failed.
5070 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative.
write error
5071 Panel backup memory Contact your local ABB representative.
read error
5080 Operation is not allowed Switch to the local control mode.
because the drive is not in
the local control mode.
5081 Operation is not allowed Check cause of fault and reset fault.
because of active fault.
5083 Operation is not allowed Check parameter 1602 PARAMETER LOCK
because parameter lock is setting.
on.
5084 Operation is not allowed Wait until task is completed and retry.
because drive is
performing a task.
5085 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive types
source to destination drive are same, ie ACS310. See the type designation
has failed. label of the drive.
5086 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive type
source to destination drive designations are the same. See type
has failed. designation labels of the drives.

Fault tracing 319

5087 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive
source to destination drive information are same. See parameters in group
has failed because 33 INFORMATION.
parameter sets are
incompatible.
5088 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative.
because of drive memory
error.
5089 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative.
because of CRC error.
5090 Download has failed Contact your local ABB representative.
because of data
processing error.
5091 Operation has failed Contact your local ABB representative.
because of parameter
error.
5092 Parameter download from Check that source and destination drive
source to destination drive information are same. See parameters in group
has failed because 33 INFORMATION.
parameter sets are
incompatible.

320 Fault tracing
Fault messages generated by the drive

CODE FAULT CAUSE WHAT TO DO
0001 OVERCURRENT Output current has Check motor load.
(2310) exceeded trip level. Check acceleration time (2202 and
0305 bit 0 2205).
Check motor and motor cable
(including phasing).
Check ambient conditions. Load
capacity decreases if installation site
ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C.
See section Derating on page 338.
0002 DC OVERVOLT Excessive Check that overvoltage controller is on
(3210) intermediate circuit DC (parameter 2005 OVERVOLT CTRL).
voltage. DC Check input power line for static or
0305 bit 1 overvoltage trip limit is transient overvoltage.
420 V for 200 V drives
and 840 V for 400 V Check deceleration time (2203, 2206).
drives.
0003 DEV OVERTEMP Drive IGBT Check ambient conditions. See also
(4210) temperature is section Derating on page 338.
0305 bit 2 excessive. Fault trip Check air flow and fan operation.
limit is 135 °C. Check motor power against drive
power.
0004 SHORT CIRC Short circuit in motor Check motor and motor cable.
(2340) cable(s) or motor
0305 bit 3
0006 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC Check that undervoltage controller is
(3220) voltage is not sufficient on (parameter 2006 UNDERVOLT
due to missing input CTRL).
0305 bit 5 power line phase, Check input power supply and fuses.
blown fuse, rectifier
bridge internal fault or
too low input power.
(8110) has fallen below limit settings.
0305 bit 6 defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal
3021 AI1 FAULT levels.
(programmable fault LIMIT.
function 3001, 3021) Check connections.
(8110) has fallen below limit settings.
defined by parameter Check for proper analog control signal
0305 bit 7 3022 AI2 FAULT levels.
(programmable fault LIMIT.
function 3001, 3022) Check connections.

Fault tracing 321

0009 MOT OVERTEMP Motor temperature is Check motor ratings, load and cooling.
(4310) too high (or appears to Check start-up data.
be too high) due to
0305 bit 8 excessive load, Check fault function parameters.
(programmable fault insufficient motor
function power, inadequate
3005…3009 / 3504) cooling or incorrect
start-up data.
Measured motor Check value of fault limit.
temperature has Check that actual number of sensors
exceeded fault limit set corresponds to value set by parameter
by parameter 3504 3501 SENSOR TYPE.
FAULT LIMIT. Let motor cool down. Ensure proper
motor cooling: Check cooling fan,
clean cooling surfaces, etc.
0010 PANEL LOSS Control panel selected Check panel connection.
(5300) as active control Check fault function parameters.
0305 bit 9 location for drive has Check control panel connector.
ceased Refit control panel in mounting
(programmable fault communicating.
function 3002) platform.
If drive is in external control mode
(REM) and is set to accept start/stop,
direction commands or references
through control panel:
Check group 10 START/STOP/DIR
and 11 REFERENCE SELECT
settings.
0012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in Check motor load and drive ratings.
(7121) stall region due to eg Check fault function parameters.
excessive load or
0305 bit 11 insufficient motor
(programmable fault power.
function
3010…3012)
0014 EXT FAULT 1 External fault 1 Check external devices for faults.
(9000) Check parameter 3003 EXTERNAL
0305 bit 13 FAULT 1 setting.
(programmable
fault function 3003)
0015 EXT FAULT 2 External fault 2 Check external devices for faults.
(9001) Check parameter 3004 EXTERNAL
0305 bit 14 FAULT 2 setting.
(programmable
fault function 3004)
0016 EARTH FAULT Drive has detected Check motor.
(2330) earth (ground) fault in Check motor cable. Motor cable length
motor or motor cable. must not exceed maximum
0305 bit 15
(programmable fault specifications. See section Motor
function 3017) connection data on page 348.
Note: Disabling earth fault (ground
fault) may void the warranty.

322 Fault tracing

0018 THERM FAIL Drive internal fault. Contact your local ABB
(5210) Thermistor used for representative.
drive internal
0306 bit 1 temperature
measurement is open
or short circuited.
0021 CURR MEAS Drive internal fault. Contact your local ABB
(2211) Current measurement representative.
0306 bit 4 is out of range.
0022 SUPPLY PHASE Intermediate circuit DC Check input power line fuses.
(3130) voltage is oscillating Check for input power supply
0306 bit 5 due to missing input imbalance.
power line phase or Check fault function parameters.
blown fuse.
Trip occurs when DC
voltage ripple exceeds
14% of nominal DC
voltage.
0024 OVERSPEED Motor is turning faster Check minimum/maximum frequency
(7310) than highest allowed settings.
0306 bit 7 speed due to Check adequacy of motor braking
incorrectly set torque.
minimum/maximum
speed.
Operating range limits
are set by parameters
2007 MINIMUM FREQ
and 2008 MAXIMUM
FREQ.
0026 DRIVE ID Internal drive ID fault Contact your local ABB
(5400) representative.
0306 bit 9
0027 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration Contact your local ABB
(630F) file error representative.
0306 bit 10
0028 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus Check status of fieldbus
(7510) communication break communication. See chapter Fieldbus
0306 bit 11 control with the embedded fieldbus on
page 287.
(programmable fault Check fault function parameter
function 3018, 3019) settings.
Check connections.
Check if master can communicate.
0029 EFB CON FILE Configuration file Contact your local ABB
(6306) reading error representative.
0306 bit 12
0030 FORCE TRIP Trip command See appropriate communication
(FF90) received from fieldbus module manual.
0306 bit 13

Fault tracing 323

0031 EFB 1 Error from the See chapter Fieldbus control with the
(FF92) embedded fieldbus embedded fieldbus on page 287.
(EFB) protocol
0307 bit 0 application. The
0032 EFB 2 meaning is protocol
(FF93) dependent.
0307 bit 1
0033 EFB 3
(FF94)
0307 bit 2
0034 MOTOR PHASE Motor circuit fault due Check motor and motor cable.
(FF56) to missing motor Check motor thermistor relay (if used).
0306 bit 4 phase or motor
thermistor relay (used
in motor temperature
measurement) fault.
0035 OUTP WIRING Incorrect input power Check input power connections.
(FF95) and motor cable
connection (ie, input
0306 bit 15 power cable is
(programmable fault connected to drive
function 3023) motor connection).
The fault can be
erroneously declared if
the drive is faulty or
the input power is a
delta grounded system
and the motor cable
capacitance is large.
0036 INCOMPATIBLE Loaded software is not Contact your local ABB
SW compatible. representative.
(630F)
0307 bit 3
0038 USER LOAD Condition defined by See parameter group 37 USER LOAD
CURVE 3701 USER LOAD C CURVE.
(FF6B) MODE has been valid
longer than the time
0307 bit 4 set by 3703 USER
LOAD C TIME.
0039 UNKNOWN Option module not Check connections.
EXTENSION supported by the drive
(7086) firmware is connected
0307 bit 5 to the drive.
0040 INLET VERY LOW Pressure at pump/fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet
(8A81) inlet too low side of the pump/fan.
0307 bit 6 Check piping for leaks.
PROTECTION.
0041 OUTLET VERY Pressure at pump/fan Check piping for blocks.
HIGH outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP
(8A83) PROTECTION.
0307 bit 7

324 Fault tracing

0042 INLET LOW Pressure at pump/fan Check for a closed valve on the inlet
(8A80) inlet too low side of the pump/fan.
0307 bit 8 Check piping for leaks.
PROTECTION.
0043 OUTLET HIGH Pressure at pump/fan Check piping for blocks.
(8A82) outlet too high See parameter group 44 PUMP
0307 bit 9 PROTECTION.
0101 SERF CORRUPT
(FF55)
0307 bit 14
0103 SERF MACRO
(FF55)
0307 bit 14
0201 DSP T1
OVERLOAD
(6100) Drive internal error Write down fault code and contact
0307 bit 13 your local ABB representative.
0202 DSP T2
OVERLOAD
(6100)
0307 bit 13
0203 DSP T3
OVERLOAD
(6100)
0307 bit 13
0204 DSP STACK
ERROR
(6100)
0307 bit 12
0206 CB ID ERROR
(5000)
0307 bit 11
1000 PAR HZRPM Incorrect frequency Check parameter settings. Check that
(6320) limit parameter setting following applies:
0307 bit 15 • 2007 MINIMUM FREQ <
2008 MAXIMUM FREQ
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907
MOTOR NOM FREQ and 2008
MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR
NOM FREQ are within range.
1001 PAR PFC REF NEG Incorrect PFC Check parameter group 81 PFC
(6320) parameters CONTROL settings. Check that
following applies:
0307 bit 15
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 0 when
8123 is ACTIVE or SPFC ACTIVE.

Fault tracing 325

1003 PAR AI SCALE Incorrect analog input Check parameter group 13 ANALOG
(6320) AI signal scaling INPUTS settings. Check that following
applies:
0307 bit 15
• 1301 MINIMUM AI1 <
1302 MAXIMUM AI1
• 1304 MINIMUM AI2 <
1305 MAXIMUM AI2.
1004 PAR AO SCALE Incorrect analog output Check parameter group 15 ANALOG
(6320) AO signal scaling OUTPUTS settings. Check that
following applies:
0307 bit 15
• 1504 MINIMUM AO1 <
1505 MAXIMUM AO1.
1006 PAR EXT RO Incorrect extension Check parameter settings. Check that
(6320) relay output following applies:
parameters • MREL relay output extension
0307 bit 15
module is connected to the drive.
• 1402…1403 RELAY OUTPUT 2 …
RELAY OUTPUT 3 and 1410
RELAY OUTPUT 4 have non-zero
values.
See MREL-01 relay output extension
module user's manual
(3AUA0000035974 [English]).
1012 PAR PFC IO 1 I/O configuration for Check parameter settings. Following
(6320) PFC not complete must apply:
0307 bit 15 • There are enough relays
parameterized for PFC.
• No conflict exists between
parameter group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS, parameter 8117 NR OF
AUX MOT and parameter 8118
AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1013 PAR PFC IO 2 I/O configuration for Check parameter settings. Following
(6320) PFC not complete must apply:
0307 bit 15 • The actual number of PFC motors
(parameter 8127 MOTORS)
matches the PFC motors in
parameter group 14 RELAY
OUTPUTS and parameter 8118
AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1014 PAR PFC IO 3 I/O configuration for See parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS
(6320) PFC not complete. and 8127 MOTORS.
The drive is unable to
0307 bit 15 allocate a digital input
(interlock) for each
PFC motor.
1015 PAR USER Incorrect voltage to Check parameter 2610 USER
DEFINED U/F frequency DEFINED U1…2617 USER DEFINED
(6320) (U/f) ratio voltage F4 settings.
0307 bit 15 setting.

326 Fault tracing

1016 PAR USER LOAD C Incorrect user load Check parameter settings. Following
(6320) curve parameter must apply:
setting • 3704 LOAD FREQ 1 <
0307 bit 15
3707 LOAD FREQ 2 <
3710 LOAD FREQ 3 <
3713 LOAD FREQ 4 <
3716 LOAD FREQ 5
• 3705 LOAD TORQ LOW 1 <
3706 LOAD TORQ HIGH 1
3718 LOAD TORQ HIGH 5.
1017 PAR SETUP 1 It is not allowed to use Disable frequency output or frequency
(6320) frequency input signal input:
and frequency output • change transistor output to digital
0307 bit 15 signal simultaneously. mode (value of parameter 1804 TO
MODE = DIGITAL), or
• change frequency input selection to
other value in parameter groups
11 REFERENCE SELECT,
40 PROCESS PID SET 1,
41 PROCESS PID SET 2 and
42 EXT / TRIM PID.

Fault tracing 327
Embedded fieldbus faults

Embedded fieldbus faults can be traced by monitoring group 53 EFB PROTOCOL
parameters. See also fault/alarm SERIAL 1 ERR.
 No master device
If there is no master device on line, parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES and 5307
EFB CRC ERRORS values remain unchanged.
What to do:
• Check that the network master is connected and properly configured.
• Check the cable connection.
 Same device address

If two or more devices have the same address, parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS
value increases with every read/write command.
What to do:
• Check the device addresses. No two devices on line may have the same address.
 Incorrect wiring
If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one device is connected to
terminal B on another device), parameter 5306 EFB OK MESSAGESS value remains
unchanged and parameter 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS increases.
What to do:
• Check the EIA-485/RS-232 interface connection.

328 Fault tracing

Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 329
15
Maintenance and hardware
diagnostics
The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions and LED indicator
descriptions.
Maintenance intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Interval Instruction
Reforming of capacitors Every year when See Capacitors on page 331.
stored
Check of dustiness, corrosion Every year
and temperature
Replacement of the cooling fan Every three years See Cooling fan on page 330.
(frame sizes R1…R4)
Check and tightening of the Every six years See Power connections on page 332.
power terminals
Replacement of the battery in Every ten years See Changing the battery in the
the Assistant control panel Assistant control panel on page 332.
Consult your local ABB Service representative for more details on the maintenance.
On the Internet, go to http://www.abb.com/drives and select Drive Services –
Maintenance and Field Services.

330 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics
Cooling fan
The life span of the cooling fan depends on the drive usage and ambient
temperature. Automatic fan On/Off control increases the life span (see parameter
1612 FAN CONTROL).
When the Assistant control panel is in use, the Notice handler assistant informs when
the definable value of the operating hour counter is reached (see parameter 2901
COOLING FAN TRIG). This information can also be passed to the relay output (see
group 14 RELAY OUTPUTS) regardless of the used panel type.
Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings. If the drive
is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once
these symptoms start appearing. Replacement fans are available from ABB. Do not
use other than ABB specified spare parts.
 Replacing the cooling fan (frame sizes R1…R4)

Only frame sizes R1…R4 include a fan; frame size R0 has natural cooling.
WARNING! Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page

15. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment.
1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line. Wait for five minutes to let the
drive DC capacitors discharge. Ensure by measuring with a multimeter
(impedance at least 1 Mohm) that there is no voltage present.
2. Remove the hood if the drive has the NEMA 1 option.
3. Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with, for example, a screwdriver.
4. Free the fan cable from the clip in the drive frame.
5. Lift the holder from the hinges.
3
5

6. Disconnect the fan cable. The figure below on the right shows the location of the
fan cable connector in frame size R2. The inside views in different frame sizes are
not identical, but the fan cable connector is always on the control board that is
against the front of the drive.
7. Free the fan cable from the clip in the fan holder.
8. Remove the fan from the holder.
9. Install the new fan in reverse order.

10. Restore power.
Capacitors
 Reforming the capacitors
The capacitors must be reformed if the drive has been stored for a year. See section
Type designation label on page 26 for how to find out the manufacturing time from the
serial number. For information on reforming the capacitors, refer to Guide for
capacitor reforming in ACS50, ACS55, ACS150, ACS310, ACS350, ACS355,

ACS550 and ACH550 (3AFE68735190 [English]), available on the Internet (go to

http://www.abb.com and enter the code in the Search field).
Power connections
WARNING! Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety on page

15. Ignoring the instructions can cause physical injury or death, or
damage to the equipment.
1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line. Wait for five minutes to let the
drive DC capacitors discharge. Ensure by measuring with a multimeter
(impedance at least 1 Mohm) that there is no voltage present.
2. Check the tightness of the power cable connections. Use the tightening torques
given in section Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables on page
346.
3. Restore power.
Control panel
 Cleaning the control panel
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could
scratch the display window.
 Changing the battery in the Assistant control panel

A battery is only used in Assistant control panels that have the clock function
available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during
power interruptions.
The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use
a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel. Replace the
battery with type CR2032.
Note: The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive functions, except the
clock.

LEDs
There is a green and a red LED on the front of the drive. They are visible through the
panel cover but invisible if a control panel is attached to the drive. The Assistant
control panel has one LED. The table below describes the LED indications.
Where LED off LED lit and steady LED blinking
On the front of No power Green Power supply on Green Drive in an alarm
the drive. the board OK state
If a control panel
is attached to the Red Drive in a fault Red Drive in a fault state.
drive, switch to state. To reset To reset the fault,
remote control the fault, press switch off the drive
(otherwise a fault RESET from the power.
is generated), control panel or
and then remove switch off the
the panel to be drive power.
able to see the
LEDs.
At the top left Panel has no Green Drive in a normal Green Drive in an alarm
corner of the power or no state state
Assistant control drive
panel connection. Red Drive in a fault Red -
state. To reset
the fault, press
RESET from the
control panel or
switch off the
drive power.


Technical data 335
16
Technical data
The chapter contains the technical specifications of the drive, for example, the
ratings, sizes and technical requirements as well as provisions for fulfilling the
requirements for CE and other marks.

336 Technical data
Ratings
Note: When choke is not used, input current is effected by supply network and
impedance.
Use the table in Fuses and alternate short-circuit protection (page 340) to correctly
size the input cabling as well as input fuses or MMP for branch circuit protection.
Sizing will be determined by the actual input current which is dependent on the input
line voltage and the input choke selection and rated motor current. If motor rated
current is below I2N, I1N is reduced relatively.
Type Input without Input with Output Frame
choke or choke or 5% size
reactor reactor
ACS310- I1N I1N I1N I1N I LD I2N I2max PN
(480 V) (480 V)
x = E/U 1) A A A A A A A kW hp
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 6.1 - 4.5 - 2.3 2.4 4.0 0.37 0.5 R0
01x-04A7-2 11.4 - 8.1 - 4.5 4.7 7.9 0.75 1 R1
01x-06A7-2 16.1 - 11.0 - 6.5 6.7 11.4 1.1 1.5 R1
01x-07A5-2 16.8 - 12.0 - 7.2 7.5 12.6 1.5 2 R2
01x-09A8-2 21.0 - 15.0 - 9.4 9.8 16.5 2.2 3 R2
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A6-2 4.7 - 2.6 - 2.4 2.6 4.2 0.37 0.5 R0
03x-03A9-2 6.7 - 3.6 - 3.5 3.9 6.1 0.55 0.75 R0
03x-05A2-2 8.4 - 4.8 - 4.7 5.2 8.2 0.75 1 R1
03x-07A4-2 13.0 - 7.2 - 6.7 7.4 11.7 1.1 1.5 R1
03x-08A3-2 13.2 - 8.2 - 7.5 8.3 13.1 1.5 2 R1
03x-10A8-2 15.7 - 11.0 - 9.8 10.8 17.2 2.2 3 R2
03x-14A6-2 23.9 - 14.0 - 13.3 14.6 23.3 3 3 R2
03x-19A4-2 27.3 - 18.0 - 17.6 19.4 30.8 4 5 R2
03x-26A8-2 45.0 - 27.0 - 24.4 26.8 42.7 5.5 7.5 R3
03x-34A1-2 55.0 - 34.0 - 31.0 34.1 54.3 7.5 10 R4
03x-50A8-2 76.0 - 47.0 - 46.2 50.8 80.9 11.0 15 R4
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A3-4 2.4 2.0 1.3 1.1 1.2 1.3 2.1 0.37 0.5 R0
03x-02A1-4 4.0 3.3 2.0 1.7 1.9 2.1 3.3 0.55 0.75 R0
03x-02A6-4 4.5 3.8 2.5 2.1 2.4 2.6 4.2 0.75 1 R1
03x-03A6-4 6.6 5.5 3.5 2.9 3.3 3.6 5.8 1.1 1.5 R1
03x-04A5-4 7.6 6.3 3.8 3.2 4.1 4.5 7.2 1.5 2 R1
03x-06A2-4 10.6 8.8 5.3 4.4 5.6 6.2 9.8 2.2 3 R1
03x-08A0-4 12.8 10.7 6.8 5.7 7.3 8.0 12.8 3 3 R1
03x-09A7-4 15.0 12.5 8.6 7.2 8.8 9.7 15.4 4 5 R1
03x-13A8-4 20.7 17.2 12.3 10.3 12.5 13.8 21.9 5.5 7.5 R3

Technical data 337
Type Input without Input with Output Frame

choke or choke or 5% size
reactor reactor
ACS310- I1N I1N I1N I1N I LD I2N I2max PN
(480 V) (480 V)
x = E/U 1) A A A A A A A kW hp
03x-17A2-4 24.3 20.3 13.0 10.8 15.6 17.2 27.3 7.5 10 R3
03x-25A4-4 34.0 28.3 20.0 16.7 23.1 25.4 40.4 11 15 R3
03x-34A1-4 57.2 47.7 27.0 22.5 31.0 34.1 54.3 15 20 R4
03x-41A8-4 67.1 55.9 34.9 29.1 38.0 41.8 66.5 18.5 25 R4
03x-48A4-4 73.7 61.4 41.6 34.7 44.0 48.4 77.0 22.0 30 R4
1)
E = EMC filter connected (metal EMC filter screw installed),
U = EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), U.S. parameterization.
00578903.xls J
 Definitions
Input
I1N continuous rms input current (for dimensioning cables, fuses, or MMPs) with I2N
motor current at rated speed and power. If motor rated current is below I2N, I1N is
reduced relatively.
I1N (480 V) continuous rms input current (for dimensioning cables, fuses, or MMPs) for
drives with 480 V with I2N motor current at rated speed and power. If motor rated
current is below I2N, I1N is reduced relatively.
Output
I LD continuous output current at max ambient temperature of +50 °C.
10% overloadability for one minute every ten minutes.
I2N maximum continuous output current at ambient temperature of +40 °C.
No overloadability, derating 1% for every additional 1 °C up to 50 °C.
I2max maximum instantaneous output current. Available for two seconds every ten
minutes at start-up, or as long as allowed by the drive temperature.
PN typical motor power. The kilowatt ratings apply to most IEC 4-pole motors. The
horsepower ratings apply to most NEMA 4-pole motors. Drive should be selected
based on motor current relative to loading capacity (ILD or I2N).
R0…R4 ACS310 is manufactured in frame sizes R0…R4. Some instructions and other
information that only concern certain frame sizes are marked with the symbol of
the frame size (R0…R4).

338 Technical data
 Sizing
Drive sizing is based on the rated motor current and power. To achieve the rated
motor power given in the table, the rated current of the drive must be higher than or
equal to the rated motor current. The rated power of the drive must also be higher
than or equal to compared to the rated motor power. The power ratings are the same
regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range.
In multimotor systems, the drive output current rating ILD must be equal to or greater
than the calculated sum of the input currents of all motors.
Note:
• The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · PN. If the limit is
exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function
protects the input bridge of the drive against overload.
• The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F) for I2N and 50 °C
(122 °F) for ILD.
 Derating
I2N: The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds
40 °C (104 °F) or if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters (3300 ft) or the switching
frequency is changed from 4 kHz to 8, 12 or 16 kHz.
ILD : The load capacity decreases if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters (3300 ft) or the
switching frequency is changed from 4 kHz to 8, 12 or 16 kHz.
Temperature derating, I2N

In the temperature range +40 °C…+50 °C (+104 °F…+122 °F), the rated output
current (I2N) is decreased by 1% for every additional 1 °C (1.8 °F). The output current
is calculated by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating factor.
Example: If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F), the derating factor is
100% - 1 % · 10 °C = 90% or 0.90. The output current is then 0.90 · I2N.
°C
Altitude derating, I2N and ILD (= all currents)
In altitudes 1000…2000 m (3300…6600 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1% for
every 100 m (330 ft).

Technical data 339
Switching frequency derating, I2N and ILD (= all currents)

Derate according to the switching frequency used (see parameter 2606 SWITCHING
FREQ) as follows:
Switching Drive voltage rating
frequency
UN = 200…240 V UN = 380…480 V
4 kHz No derating No derating
8 kHz Derate I2N and ILD to 90%. Derate I2N and ILD to 75% for R0 or to 80% for
R1…R4.
12 kHz Derate I2N and ILD to 80%. Derate I2N and ILD to 50% for R0 or to 65% for
R1…R4 and derate maximum ambient
temperature to 30 °C (86 °F).
16 kHz Derate I2N and ILD to 75%. Derate I2N and ILD to 50% and derate maximum
ambient temperature to 30 °C (86 °F).

340 Technical data
Fuses and alternate short-circuit protection

 Fuses
The rated fuse currents given in the table are the maximums for the mentioned
fuse types. If smaller fuse ratings are used, check that the fuse rms current rating is
larger than the rated I1N current given in section Ratings on page 336. If 150% output
power is needed, multiply current I1N by 1.5. See also section Selecting the power
cables on page 36.
Check that the operating time of the fuse is below 0.5 seconds. The operating
time depends on the fuse type, the supply network impedance as well as the cross-
sectional area, material and length of the supply cable. In case the 0.5 seconds
operating time is exceeded with the gG or T fuses, ultra rapid (aR) fuses reduces in
most cases the operating time to an acceptable level.
Note:
• Do not use larger fuses when the input power cable is selected according to this
table.
• Choose the correct fuse size according to the actual input current which depends
on the input line voltage and the input choke selection.
• You can use other fuse types if they meet the current rating of the fuse in the table
and also if the melting curve of the other fuses does not exceed the melting curve
of the fuse in the table.
 Alternate short-circuit protection

In accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC), the following ABB type E
manual motor protectors can be used as an alternate to the recommended fuses as a
means of branch circuit protection:
• MS132 and S1-M3-25
• MS451-xxE
• MS495-xxE.
When the correct ABB type E manual motor protector is selected from the table and
used for branch circuit protection, the drive is suitable for use in a circuit capable of
delivering not more than 65 kA RMS symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum
rated voltage. See the appropriate ratings in the following table.
IP20 open type and IP21 UL type 1 ACS310 can use ABB type E manual motor
protectors for branch circuit protection. See the MMP rating table for the minimum
enclosure volume of IP20 open type ACS310 mounted in an enclosure.

Technical data 341
 Fuses and MMPs

Type Fuses MMPs
ACS310- gG UL Class T or Frame I1N Min. Encl.
CC (600 V) MMP Type E 3,4)
Vol.6)
x = E/U1)A min max AA2) A dm3 in3
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 10 6 10 R0 6.1 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
01x-04A7-2 16 10 20 R1 11.4 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
01x-06A7-2 16 15 25 R1 16.1 MS451-20E 18.9 1152
01x-07A5-2 20 15 30 R2 16.8 MS451-20E - -
01x-09A8-2 25 15 35 R2 21.0 MS451-25E - -
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A6-2 10 3 10 R0 4.7 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-03A9-2 10 6 10 R0 6.7 MS132-10 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-05A2-2 10 6 15 R1 8.4 MS132-10 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-07A4-2 16 10 15 R1 13.0 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-08A3-2 16 10 15 R1 13.2 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-10A8-2 16 15 20 R2 15.7 MS451-20E - -
03x-14A6-2 25 15 30 R2 23.9 MS451-25E - -
03x-19A4-2 25 20 35 R2 27.3 MS451-32E - -
03x-26A8-2 63 30 60 R3 45.0 MS451-50E - -
03x-34A1-2 80 35 80 R4 55.0 MS495-63E - -
03x-50A8-2 100 50 100 R4 76.0 MS495-90E - -
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V) (MMP ratings for 480Y/277V only)
03x-01A3-4 10 2 10 R0 2.0 MS132-2.5 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-02A1-4 10 2 10 R0 3.3 MS132-4.0 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-02A6-4 10 3 10 R1 3.8 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-03A6-4 10 3 10 R1 5.5 MS132-6.3 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-04A5-4 16 6 15 R1 6.3 MS132-10 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-06A2-4 16 6 15 R1 8.8 MS132-10 & S1-M3-255) 18.9 1152
03x-08A0-4 16 6 20 R1 11.0 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-09A7-4 20 10 25 R1 12.0 MS451-16E 18.9 1152
03x-13A8-4 25 10 30 R3 17.0 MS451-20E - -
03x-17A2-4 35 15 35 R3 20.0 MS451-25E - -
03x-25A4-4 50 20 50 R3 28.0 MS451-32E - -
03x-34A1-4 80 25 80 R4 48.0 MS451-50E - -
03x-41A8-4 100 30 100 R4 56.0 MS495-63E - -
03x-48A4-4 100 35 100 R4 61.0 MS495-63E - -
00578903.xls.J
1)
U = EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), U.S parameterization.
2)
minimum fuse size can be used with input choke according to table in Rating section
3)
All manual motor protections listed are type E self-protected up to 65kA.
See ABB publication AC1010 for complete technical data on ABB type E manual motor protectors
4)
Manual motor protectors may require adjusting the trip limit from the factory setting at or above the drive
input. Amps to avoid nuisance tripping. If the manual motor protector is set to the maximum current trip level
and nuisance tripping is occurring, then select the next size MMP. (MS132-10 is the highest size in MS132
frame size to meet type E at 65kA, the next size up is the MS451-16E)

342 Technical data
5)
Requires the use of S1-M3-25 line side feeder terminal with the manual motor protector to meet type E self
protection class.
6)
For all drives, the enclosure must be sized to accommodate the specific thermal considerations of the
applications as well as provide free space for cooling. See section, Free space requirements on page 344.
For UL only: The minimum enclosure volume is specified in the UL listing for drive frames R0 and R1 when
applied with the ABB type E MMP shown in the table. ACS310 drives are intended to be mounted in an
enclosure unless a NEMA 1 kit is added.
For ratings marked with *-* the minimum size is determined by the thermal requirements of the drive and any
other equipment in the enclosure.
 Size of copper conductor in cablings

Cable dimensioning for rated currents (I1N) is shown in the table below.
Type Size of copper conductor in cablings
ACS310- Supply Motor PE
(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)
x = E/U 1) mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14
01x-04A7-2 2.5 14 0.75 18 2.5 14
01x-06A7-2 2.5 10 1.5 14 2.5 10
01x-07A5-2 2.5 10 1.5 14 2.5 10
01x-09A8-2 6 10 2.5 12 6 10
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
03x-02A6-2 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-03A9-2 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-05A2-2 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-07A4-2 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-08A3-2 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-10A8-2 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-14A6-2 6.0 10 6 10 6.0 10
03x-19A4-2 6.0 10 6 10 6.0 10
03x-26A8-2 10.0 8 10 8 10.0 8
03x-34A1-2 16.0 6 16 6 16.0 6
03x-50A8-2 25.0 2 25 2 16.0 4
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A3-4 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-02A1-4 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-02A6-4 2.5 14 1.5 14 2.5 14
03x-03A6-4 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-04A5-4 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-06A2-4 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-08A0-4 2.5 12 1.5 14 2.5 12
03x-09A7-4 2.5 12 2.5 12 2.5 12
03x-13A8-4 6.0 10 6 10 6.0 10
03x-17A2-4 6.0 8 6 8 6.0 8
03x-25A4-4 10.0 8 10 8 10.0 8

Technical data 343
Type Size of copper conductor in cablings

ACS310- Supply Motor PE
(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)
x = E/U 1) mm2 AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG
03x-34A1-4 16.0 6 16 6 16.0 6
03x-41A8-4 25.0 4 16 4 16.0 4
03x-48A4-4 25.0 4 25 4 16.0 4
1)
U = EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), U.S parameterization.
Dimensions, weights and free space requirements

 Dimensions and weights
Frame Dimensions and weights
size IP20 (cabinet) / UL open
H1 H2 H3 W D Weight
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb
R0 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 70 2.76 161 6.34 1.2 2.6
R1 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 70 2.76 161 6.34 1.4 3.1
R2 169 6.65 202 7.95 239 9.41 105 4.13 165 6.50 1.8 4.0
R3 169 6.65 202 7.95 236 9.29 169 6.65 169 6.65 2.9 6.4
R4 181 7.13 202 7.95 244 9.61 260 10.24 169 6.65 5.1 11.2
00578903.xls G
Frame Dimensions and weights

size IP20 / NEMA 1
H4 H5 W D Weight
mm in mm in mm in mm in kg lb
R0 257 10.12 280 11.02 70 2.76 169 6.65 1.6 3.5
R1 257 10.12 280 11.02 70 2.76 169 6.65 1.8 4.0
R2 257 10.12 282 11.10 105 4.13 169 6.65 2.2 4.9
R3 260 10.24 299 11.77 169 6.65 177 6.97 3.5 7.7
R4 270 10.63 320 12.60 260 10.24 177 6.97 5.7 12.6
00578903.xls G
Symbols
IP20 (cabinet) / UL open
H1 height without fastenings and clamping plate
H2 height with fastenings, without clamping plate
H3 height with fastenings and clamping plate
IP20 / NEMA 1
H4 height with fastenings and connection box
H5 height with fastenings, connection box and hood

344 Technical data
 Free space requirements

Frame Free space required
size Above Below On the sides
mm in mm in mm in
R0…R4 75 3 75 3 0 0
00578903.xls G

Technical data 345
Losses, cooling data and noise

 Losses and cooling data
Frame size R0 has natural convection cooling. Frame sizes R1…R4 are provided
with an internal fan. The air flow direction is from bottom to top.
The table below specifies the heat dissipation in the main circuit at nominal load and
in the control circuit with minimum load (I/O and panel not in use) and maximum load
(all digital inputs in the on state and the panel, fieldbus and fan in use). The total heat
dissipation is the sum of the heat dissipation in the main and control circuits.
Type Heat dissipation Air flow
ACS310- Main circuit Control circuit
x = E/U1) Rated I LD Min Max
W BTU/Hr W BTU/Hr W BTU/Hr m3/h ft3/min
1-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V)
01x-02A4-2 19 65 6.1 21 22.7 78 - -
01x-04A7-2 38 130 9.5 32 26.4 90 24 14
01x-06A7-2 60 205 9.5 32 26.4 90 24 14
01x-07A5-2 62 212 11 36 27.5 94 21 12
01x-09A8-2 83 283 11 36 27.5 94 21 12
3-phase UN = 200…240 V (200, 208, 220, 230, 240 V
03x-02A6-2 19 65 6.1 21 23 78 - -
03x-03A9-2 31 106 6.1 21 23 78 - -
03x-05A2-2 38 130 9.5 32 26 90 24 14
03x-07A4-2 60 205 9.5 32 26 90 24 14
03x-08A3-2 62 212 9.5 32 26 90 21 12
03x-10A8-2 83 283 11 36 28 94 21 12
03x-14A6-2 112 383 11 36 28 94 52 31
03x-19A4-2 152 519 11 36 28 94 52 31
03x-26A8-2 250 854 17 57 35 120 71 42
03x-34A1-2 270 922 33 110 58 200 96 57
03x-50A8-2 430 1469 33 110 58 200 96 57
3-phase UN = 380…480 V (380, 400, 415, 440, 460, 480 V)
03x-01A3-4 11 38 6.6 23 24 83 - -
03x-02A1-4 16 55 6.6 23 24 83 - -
03x-02A6-4 21 72 9.8 33 29 98 13 8
03x-03A6-4 31 106 9.8 33 29 98 13 8
03x-04A5-4 40 137 9.8 33 29 98 13 8
03x-06A2-4 61 208 9.8 33 29 98 19 11
03x-08A0-4 74 253 14 48 33 110 24 14
03x-09A7-4 94 321 14 48 33 110 24 14

346 Technical data
Type Heat dissipation Air flow

ACS310- Main circuit Control circuit
x = E/U1) Rated I LD Min Max
W BTU/Hr W BTU/Hr W BTU/Hr m3/h ft3/min
03x-13A8-4 130 444 12 41 31 110 52 31
03x-17A2-4 173 591 12 41 31 110 52 31
03x-25A4-4 266 908 17 57 35 120 71 42
03x-34A1-4 350 1195 33 110 58 200 96 57
03x-41A8-4 440 1503 33 110 58 200 96 57
03x-48A4-4 530 1810 33 110 58 200 96 57
00578903.xls G
1)
U = EMC filter disconnected (plastic EMC filter screw installed), U.S parameterization,
 Noise
Frame Noise level
size dBA
R0 <30
R1 50…62
R2 50…62
R3 50…62
R4 <62
00578903.xls D
Terminal and lead-through data for the power cables

Frame Max. cable U1, V1, W1, U2, V2, W2 PE
size diameter for
NEMA 1
U1, V1, W1, Max. terminal size Tightening Max. clamp size Tightening
U2, V2, W2 flexible/rigid torque solid or stranded torque
mm in mm2 AWG N·m lbf·in mm 2
AWG N·m lbf·in
R0 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R1 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R2 16 0.63 4.0/6.0 10 0.8 7 25 3 1.2 11
R3 29 1.14 10.0/16.0 6 1.7 15 25 3 1.2 11
R4 35 1.38 25.0/35.0 2 2.5 22 25 3 1.2 11
00578903.xls G

Technical data 347
Terminal and lead-through data for the control cables

Conductor size Tightening
torque
Solid or stranded Stranded, with ferrule Stranded, with ferrule
without plastic sleeve with plastic sleeve
Min/Max Min/Max Min/Max Min/Max Min/Max Min/Max
2
mm AWG mm2 AWG mm2 AWG N·m lbf·in
0.14/1.5 26/16 0.25/1.5 23/16 0.25/1.5 23/16 0.4 3.5

348 Technical data
Electric power network specification

Voltage (U1) 200/208/220/230/240 V AC 1-phase for 200 V AC drives
200/208/220/230/240 V AC 3-phase for 200 V AC drives
380/400/415/440/460/480 V AC 3-phase for 400 V AC drives
±10% variation from converter nominal voltage is allowed as default.
Short-circuit capacity Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input power
connection as defined in IEC 60439-1 is 100 kA. The drive is suitable
for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA rms
symmetrical amperes at the drive maximum rated voltage.
Frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5%, maximum rate of change 17%/s
Imbalance Max. ±3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Motor connection data

Motor type AC induction motor
Voltage (U2) 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Short-circuit protection The motor output is short-circuit proof by IEC 61800-5-1 and
(IEC 61800-5-1, UL 508C.
UL 508C)
Frequency 0…500 Hz
Frequency resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See section Ratings on page 336.
Power limit 1.5 · PN
Field weakening point 10…500 Hz
Switching frequency 4, 8, 12 or 16 kHz
Maximum Operational functionality and motor cable length
recommended The drive is designed to operate with optimum performance with the
motor cable length following maximum motor cable lengths. The motor cable lengths may
be extended with output chokes as shown in the table.
Frame Maximum motor cable length

size m ft
Standard drive, without external options
R0 30 100
R1…R4 50 165
With external output chokes
R0 60 195
R1…R4 100 330

Technical data 349
EMC compatibility and motor cable length

To comply with the European EMC Directive (standard IEC/
EN 61800-3), use the following maximum motor cable lengths for
4 kHz switching frequency.
All frame Maximum motor cable length, 4 kHz

sizes m ft
With internal EMC filter
Second environment 30 100
(category C3 1) )
First environment - -
(category C2 1) )
First environment - -
(category C1 1) )
With optional external EMC filter
Second environment 30 (at least) 2) 100 (at least) 2)
(category C3 1) )
First environment 30 (at least) 2) 100 (at least) 2)
(category C2 1) )
First environment 10 (at least) 2) 30 (at least) 2)
1)
(category C1 )
1)
See the terms in section Definitions on page 353.
2)
Maximum motor cable length is determined by the drive’s
operational factors. Contact your local ABB representative for the
exact maximum lengths when using external EMC filters.
Note: The internal EMC filter must be disconnected by removing the
EMC screw (see the figure on page 46) while using the low leakage
current EMC filter (LRFI-XX).
Note: Radiated emissions are according to C2 with and without an
external EMC filter.
Note: Category C1 with conducted emissions only. Radiated
emissions are not compatible when measured with standard
emission measurement setup and should be checked or measured
on cabinet and machine installations case by case.
Note: In multimotor systems, the calculated sum of all motor cable
lengths must not exceed the maximum motor cable length given in
the table.
Note: The external EMC filter must be installed onto a metal plate to
ensure efficient cooling.

350 Technical data
Control connection data

Analog inputs X1A: 2 Voltage signal, unipolar 0 (2)…10 V, Rin > 312 kohm
and 5 bipolar -10…10 V, Rin > 312 kohm
Current signal, unipolar 0 (4)…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
bipolar -20…20 mA, Rin = 100 ohm
Potentiometer reference
value (X1A: 4) 10 V ± 1%, max. 10 mA, R < 10 kohm
Resolution 0.1%
Accuracy ±1%
Analog output X1A: 7 0 (4)…20 mA, load < 500 ohm
Auxiliary voltage X1A: 9 24 V DC ± 10%, max. 200 mA
Digital inputs X1A: Voltage 12…24 V DC with internal or external
12…16 supply
(frequency input X1A: Type PNP and NPN
16) Frequency input Pulse train 0…16 kHz (X1A: 16 only)
Input impedance 2.4 kohm
Relay output X1B: Type NO + NC
17…19 Max. switching voltage 250 V AC / 30 V DC
Max. switching current 0.5 A / 30 V DC; 5 A / 230 V AC
Max. continuous current 2 A rms
Digital output X1B: Type Transistor output PNP
20…21 Max. switching voltage 30 V DC
Max. switching current 100 mA / 30 V DC, short-circuit
protected
Frequency 10 Hz …16 kHz
Resolution 1 Hz
Accuracy 0.2%
EIA-485 interface X1C: Cable Shielded twisted pair, impedance
23…26 100…150 ohm
Termination Daisy-chained bus, without drop lines
Isolation Bus interface isolated from the drive
Transfer rate 1.2…76.8 kbit/s
Communication type Serial, asynchronous, half duplex
Protocol Modbus
Clearance and creepage distance

The clearance and creepage distance between I/O connections and
mains circuit is 5.5 mm, which guarantees safety insulation of
overvoltage category 3 (IEC 60664-1).
Efficiency
Approximately 95 to 98% at nominal power level, depending on the
drive size and options
Degrees of protection
IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open: Standard enclosure. The drive
must be installed in a cabinet to fulfil the requirements for shielding
from contact.
IP20 / NEMA 1: Achieved with an option kit including a hood and a
connection box.

Technical data 351
Ambient conditions
Environmental limits for the drive are given below. The drive is to be
used in a heated indoor controlled environment.
Operation Storage Transportation
installed for in the protective in the protective
stationary use package package
Installation site altitude 0 to 2000 m (6600 ft) - -
above sea level
(above 1000 m
[3300 ft], see section
Derating on page
338)
Air temperature -10 to +50 °C (14 to -40 to +70 °C -40 to +70 °C
122 °F). No frost (-40 to +158 °F) (-40 to +158 °F)
allowed. See section
Derating on page
338.
Relative humidity 0 to 95% Max. 95% Max. 95%
No condensation allowed. Maximum allowed relative humidity is
60% in the presence of corrosive gases.
Contamination levels No conductive dust allowed.
(IEC 60721-3-3, According to According to According to
IEC 60721-3-2, IEC 60721-3-3, IEC 60721-3-1, IEC 60721-3-2,
IEC 60721-3-1) chemical gases: chemical gases: chemical gases:
Class 3C2 Class 1C2 Class 2C2
solid particles: Class solid particles: Class solid particles: Class
3S2. 1S2 2S2
Note: The drive must
be installed in clean
air according to
enclosure
classification.
Note: Cooling air
must be clean, free
from corrosive
materials and
electrically conductive
dust.
Sinusoidal vibration Tested according to - -
(IEC 60721-3-3) IEC 60721-3-3,
mechanical
conditions: Class 3M4
2…9 Hz, 3.0 mm
(0.12 in)
9…200 Hz, 10 m/s2
(33 ft/s2)
Shock Not allowed during According to ISTA 1A. According to ISTA 1A.
(IEC 60068-2-27, operation. Max. 100 m/s2 Max. 100 m/s2
2
ISTA 1A) (330 ft/s ), 11 ms. (330 ft/s2), 11 ms.
Free fall Not allowed 76 cm (30 in) 76 cm (30 in)

352 Technical data
Materials
Drive enclosure • PC/ABS 2 mm, PC+10%GF 2.5…3 mm and PA66+25%GF
1.5 mm, all in color NCS 1502-Y (RAL 9002 / PMS 420 C)
• hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5 mm, thickness of coating
20 micrometers
• extruded aluminium AlSi.
Package Corrugated cardboard.
Disposal The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve
energy and natural resources. The package materials are
environmentally compatible and recyclable. All metal parts can be
recycled. The plastic parts can either be recycled or burned under
controlled circumstances, according to local regulations. Most
recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors
and printed circuit boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors
contain electrolyte, which is classified as hazardous waste within the
EU. They must be removed and handled according to local
regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed
recycling instructions, please contact your local ABB distributor.
Applicable standards
The drive complies with the following standards:
• IEC/EN 61800-5-1: Electrical, thermal and functional safety requirements for adjustable
2003 frequency a.c. power drives
• IEC/EN 60204-1: Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1:
2006 General requirements. Provisions for compliance: The final
assembler of the machine is responsible for installing
- an emergency-stop device
- a supply disconnecting device.
• IEC/EN 61800-3: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC
2004 requirements and specific test methods
• UL 508C UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, third edition

Technical data 353
CE marking
The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of
the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives.
 Compliance with the European EMC Directive

The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard
(EN 61800-3:2004) covers requirements stated for drives. See section Compliance
with EN 61800-3:2004 on page 353.
Compliance with EN 61800-3:2004

 Definitions
EMC stands for Electromagnetic Compatibility. It is the ability of electrical/electronic
equipment to operate without problems within an electromagnetic environment.
Likewise, the equipment must not disturb or interfere with any other product or
system within its locality.
First environment includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which
supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly
supplying domestic premises.
Drive of category C1: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the
first environment.
Drive of category C2: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V and intended to be
installed and commissioned only by a professional when used in the first
environment.
Note: A professional is a person or organization having necessary skills in installing
and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects.
Category C2 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class first environment
restricted distribution. EMC standard IEC/EN 61800-3 does not any more restrict the
distribution of the drive, but the using, installation and commissioning are defined.
Drive of category C3: drive of rated voltage less than 1000 V, intended for use in the
second environment and not intended for use in the first environment.
Category C3 has the same EMC emission limits as the earlier class second
environment unrestricted distribution.
 Category C1
The emission limits are complied with the following provisions:

354 Technical data
1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and
installed as specified in the EMC filter manual.
2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual.
3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual.
4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see page
349.
WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.
 Category C2
1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the ABB documentation and
installed as specified in the EMC filter manual.
4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see page
349.
WARNING! In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in
which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required.
 Category C3
The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC/EN 61800-
3, second environment (see page 353 for IEC/EN 61800-3 definitions).
1. The internal EMC filter is connected (the metal screw at EMC is in place) or the
optional EMC filter is installed.
4. With the internal EMC filter: motor cable length 30 m (100 ft) with 4 kHz switching
frequency. For the maximum motor cable length with an optional external EMC
filter, see page 349.
WARNING! A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public
network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected
if the drive is used on such a network.
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on IT
(ungrounded) systems. The supply network becomes connected to ground potential
through the EMC filter capacitors which may cause danger or damage the drive.

Technical data 355
Note: It is not allowed to install a drive with the internal EMC filter connected on a
corner-grounded TN system as this would damage the drive.
UL marking
See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive.
The UL mark is attached to the drive to verify that it meets UL requirements.
 UL checklist
Input power connection – See section Electric power network specification on page
348.
Disconnecting device (disconnecting means) – See Selecting the supply
disconnecting device (disconnecting means) on page 35.
Ambient conditions – The drives are to be used in a heated indoor controlled
environment. See section Ambient conditions on page 351 for specific limits.
Input cable fuses – For installation in the United States, branch circuit protection
must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC) and any
applicable local codes. To fulfil this requirement, use the UL classified fuses given in
section Fuses and alternate short-circuit protection on page 340.
For installation in Canada, branch circuit protection must be provided in accordance
with Canadian Electrical Code and any applicable provincial codes. To fulfil this
requirement, use the UL classified fuses given in section Fuses and alternate short-
circuit protection on page 340.
Power cable selection – See section Selecting the power cables on page 36.
Power cable connections – For the connection diagram and tightening torques, see
section Connecting the power cables on page 47.
Overload protection – The drive provides overload protection in accordance with
the National Electrical Code (US).
C-Tick marking
See the type designation label for the valid markings of your drive.
C-Tick marking is required in Australia and New Zealand. A C-Tick mark is attached
to the drive to verify compliance with the relevant standard (IEC 61800-3:2004 –
Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 3: EMC product standard
including specific test methods), mandated by the Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic
Compatibility Scheme.
The Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme (EMCS) was introduced
by the Australian Communication Authority (ACA) and the Radio Spectrum
Management Group (RSM) of the New Zealand Ministry of Economic Development

356 Technical data
(NZMED) in November 2001. The aim of the scheme is to protect the radio frequency
spectrum by introducing technical limits for emission from electrical/electronic
products.
For fulfilling the requirements of the standard, see section Compliance with
EN 61800-3:2004 on page 353.
RoHS marking
The RoHS mark is attached to the drive to verify that drive follows the provisions of
the European RoHS Directive. RoHS = the restriction of the use of certain hazardous
substances in electrical and electronic equipment.
Declaration of incorporation

Dimension drawings 357
17
Dimension drawings
Dimension drawings of the ACS310 are shown below. The dimensions are given in
millimeters and [inches].

358 Dimension drawings
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open

R1 and R0 are identical except for the fan at the top of R1.
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open

3AUA0000050967-A

Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1

R1 and R0 are identical except for the fan at the top of R1.
Frame sizes R0 and R1, IP20 / NEMA 1

3AUA0000051086-A

Frame size R2, IP20 (cabinet installation) / UL open

3AUA0000051090-A

Frame size R2, NEMA 1
Frame size R2, IP20 / NEMA 1

3AUA0000051097-A


3AUA0000051109-A


3AUA0000051118-A


3AUA0000051130-A


3AUA0000051133-A


INDEX
Numerics
0xxxx register
EFB mapping 299
3-wire macro 105
4xxxx register
EFB mapping 299
A
ABB standard macro 104
abbreviations 21
ACC/DEC RAMP SHPE 206
actual values
scaling, EFB comm 297
AI MIN FUNCTION 212
alternate macro 106
analog output
parameter group 147
APPL SW VERSION 222
applicability 19
assistant 115
assistant control panel 67, 80
audience 19
autochange
overview 273
starting order counter 274
automatic reset 137
see reset, automatic

B
backing up parameters (Assistant panel) 97
basic control panel 67, 69
bypass connection 42
C
clamping plates 34
comm (EFB)
actual value scaling 297
analog output control, activate 291
control word 307
diagnostics 298
exception codes 301
fault, no master station on line 327
fault, swapped wires 327
input ref. sel., activate 291
misc. drive control, activate 297
PID control setpoint source, activate 291
reference scaling, ABB drives profile 296
relay output control, activate 297
set-up 289
state diagram 306
comm (FBA)
analog output control, activate 291
configuration 290
relay output control, activate 291
connection procedure 48
contrast, control panel 87
control panel 332
contrast 87
display contrast 87
control panel (Assistant)

parameter backup mode 97
control panel (Basic)
controls overview 70
CONTROL SW VERSION 222
control word
comm (EFB), description 307
controls overview (Basic panel) 70
D
declaration of incorporation 356
diagnostics
EFB comm 298
DIN rail installation 33
duty/assist cycle 141
E
EIA-485 54
embedded fieldbus 287, 327
EU directives 36
exception codes, EFB modbus 301
External control 177
external control 120
EXTERNAL FAULT 213
EXTERNAL FAULT 134
F
Fault History 312
Fault reset 193
Firmware version 222
frame size 21

H
hand/auto macro 108
I
installation 32
installation checklist 55
insulation 45
IR COMPENSATION 208, 209
L
Living zero 212
local control 119
M
macro 101
Maintenance
Capacitors 331
Fan 330
maintenance intervals 329
mapping
EFB modbus 301
modbus
EFB coils 299
EFB holding registers 299
EFB mapping summary 301
EFB supported features 298
EFB technical data 298
Modbus mapping 298
Motor overload protection 238, 248, 249
motor potentiometer macro 107
motor temperature
measure, parameter group 147

O
operation principle 23
overview 24
OVERVOLTAGE CTRL 199
P
PANEL LOSS 213
parameter
restore (Assistant panel) 97
PARAMETER LOCK 193
parameter lock 138
PFC control macro 110
PID
process sets, parameter groups 141
setpoint source, EFB comm activate 291
PID control macro 109
PID controller
basic set-up 141
pipe fill 160
power cables 36
power connections 25
power limit 137
power loss ride-through 129
process PID sets, parameter groups 141
Program version 222
R
ratings 336
reference scaling
EFB, ABB drives profile 296
required tools 30
reset, automatic

parameter group
residual current devices 42
RS-232 54
S
safety 15, 311
scaling
actual values, EFB comm 297
reference (EFB, ABB drives profile) 296
speed, constant
parameter group 147
SPFC control macro 111
standards 352
START FUNCTION 200
starting order counter 274
Starting the drive 177
start-up 57
state diagram
comm (EFB) 306
STOP FUNCTION 167, 201
Stopping the drive 177
T
terms 21
TEST DATE 222
thermal overload protection 41
timer functions
parameter group 147
type designation 26, 27
U
UNDERVOLTAGE CTRL 199

unpacking 31
US requirements 38
USER MACRO IO CHG 194
user macros 112
V
Version 222
W
warnings
use of warnings 15

Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting
the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales,
support and service contacts can be found by navigating to
www.abb.com/searchchannels.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to new.abb.com/service/training.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals

Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Navigate to
new.abb.com/drives/manuals-feedback-form.
Document library on the Internet

You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet at
www.abb.com/drives/documents.

Contact us
www.abb.com/drives
www.abb.com/drivespartners
3AUA0000044201 Rev D (EN) 2016-01-11

ABB ACS310 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB ACS310 User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB ACS310 User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ABB drives

Hotline hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Start-up and control with I/O

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

3. Operation principle and hardware description

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

5. Planning the electrical installation

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

8. Start-up and control with I/O

10. Application macros

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

11. Program features

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Power loss ride-through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

12. Actual signals and parameters

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

14 RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

13. Fieldbus control with the embedded fieldbus

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

14. Fault tracing

15. Maintenance and hardware diagnostics

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

16. Technical data

17. Dimension drawings

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Frame size R4, NEMA 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365

19. Further information

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Safety in installation and maintenance

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or

Safe start-up and operation

WARNING! Ignoring the following instructions can cause physical injury or

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Purpose of the manual

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Contents of this manual

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

• Technical data (page 335) contains technical specifications of the drive, eg

Categorization by frame size

Terms and abbreviations

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Quick installation and commissioning flowchart

Unpack and check the drive. Mechanical installation: Unpacking on page

If the drive will be connected to an IT Operation principle and hardware description:

Install the drive on a wall or in a cabinet. Mechanical installation on page 29

Route the cables. Planning the electrical installation: Routing the

Connect the power cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the power

Connect the control cables. Electrical installation: Connecting the control

Check the installation. Installation checklist on page 55

Commission the drive. Start-up and control with I/O on page 57

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581

Rectifier Intermediate Inverter

Website: ritech.vn Hỗ trợ kỹ thuật: 0979578581